Reconstitution and Dissolution of a Firm – CA Foundation Law Notes

Reconstitution and Dissolution of a Firm – CA Foundation Law Notes

Browsing through Reconstitution and Dissolution of a Firm – CA Foundation Law Notes help students to revise the complete subject quickly.

Reconstitution and Dissolution of a Firm – CA Foundation Business Law Notes

Reconstitution of A Firm:
Incoming and outgoing Partners: The constitution of a firm may be changed by the introduction of a new partner; death, retirement, insolvency and expulsion of a partner; or by the transfer of a partner’s share to an outsider. All these are included within the term reconstitution of a firm. Upon reconstitution, the rights and liabilities of the incoming and outgoing partners have to be determined. The provisions of the Partnership Act regarding such cases are stated below.

Introduction of a New Partner (Sec. 31):
A new partner can be introduced only with the consent of all the partners. The share of profits which a new partner is entitled to get is fixed at the time he becomes a partner. He is liable for all . the debts of the firm after the date of his admission but he is not responsible for any act of the firm done before he became a partner, unless otherwise agreed. These rules do not apply to a minor becoming a partner under Sec. 30.

The incoming partner may, however, assume liability for past debts by novation that is, by tripartite agreement between (a) the creditor (b) the partners and (c) the incoming partner.

Reconstitution and Dissolution of a Firm – CA Foundation Law Notes

Retirement of a Partner (Sec. 32):
A partner may retire –

  • with the consent of all the other partners,
  • in accordance with the terms of the agreement of partnership or
  • where the partnership is at will, by giving notice in writing to all the other partners of his intention to retire.

A retiring partner remains liable for the partnership debts contracted while he was a partner. He may however be discharged from any liability to any third party for acts of the firm done before his retirement by novation, if it is so agreed with the third party and the partners of the reconstituted firm. Such agreement may be implied from the course of dealing between the firm and the third party after he had knowledge of the retirement.

The retired partner continues to remain liable to third parties for all acts of the firm until public notice is given of the retirement. Such notice may be given either by the retired partner or by any member of the reconstituted firm.

A retired partner is not liable for the debts of the firm incurred after public notice of his retirement. A sleeping partner may retire without giving a public notice of his retirement because he is not known to be a partner to third parties.

Expulsion of a partner (Sec. 33):
A partner can be expelled only when the following conditions are fulfilled:

  • When the contract of partnership contains a provision for expulsion under stated circumstances.
  • The power to expel is exercised in good faith by the majority of the partners.
  • The expelled partner has been given notice of the charges against him and has been given an opportunity to answer the charges.

The liabilities of an expelled partner for the debts of the firm are the same as those of retired partner.

Insolvency of a partner (Sec. 34):
When the partner of a firm is adjudicated an insolvent, he ceases to be a partner from the date on which the order of adjudication was passed by the court. Whether the firm is thereby dissolved or not depends on the terms of the agreement between the partners.

Death of Partners (Sec. 35):
Ordinarily the death of partner has the effect of dissolving the firm. But it is competent for the partners to agree that the firm will continue to exist even after the death of partner.

Reconstitution and Dissolution of a Firm – CA Foundation Law Notes

Transfer of interest (Sec. 29):
What are the Rights of Transferee of Partner’s share?
Transferee’s rights: A share in a partnership is transferable like any other property, but as the Ik partnership relationship is based on mutual confidence, the assignee of a partner’s interest by sale, mortgage or otherwise cannot enjoy the same rights and privileges as the original one (section 29 of the Partnership Act). The Supreme Court in Narayanappa v. Krishnappa( 1966) has held that the £ assignee will enjoy only the rights to receive the shares of the profits of the assignor and amount of profits agreed to by other partners.

The rights of such a transferee may be noted as follows:
(a) During the continuance of partnership:
During the continuance of partnership, such transferee is entitled to receive the share of the profits of the transferring partner. However, he is bound to accept the profits as agreed to by the partners i.e. he cannot challenge the accounts.

A transferee of a Partner’s share is not entitled:

  • to interfere with the conduct of the business.
  • to require accounts or
  • to inspect books of the firm.

(b) On the dissolution of the firm:
On the dissolution of the firm or on the retirement of the transferring partner, the transferee will be entitled against the remaining partners:

  • to receive the share of the assets of the firm to which the transferring partners was entitled.
  • for the purpose of ascertaining the share, to an account as from the date of the dissolution.

Rights and liabilities of an outgoing partner:
(I) Rights of an outgoing partner – An outgoing partner possesses following rights:
(a) Right to carry on competing business – An outgoing partner has the right to carry on the business competing with that of the firm, and he may advertise such business (Sec. 36). But section 36 imposes some
restrictions on his activities in order to prevent unfair competition with the firm. The restrictions imposed upon outgoing partner are:

  • he may not use firm’s name,
  • he may not represent himself as carrying on the business on behalf of the firm
    or
  • he may not solicit the customers or the persons who were already dealing with the firm before he left the firm. The above restrictions are subject to a contract to the contrary.

However, the firm may enter into an agreement with the retiring partner not to do competitive business, and then he will not be entitled to carry on competitive business. This agreement will not be void as it will not be treated as an agreement in restraint of trade.

(b) Right to share subsequent profit in certain cases:
As per section 37, in case the accounts of the outgoing partners continue to remain unsettled and the remaining partner continues to run the business, such a partner is entitled to receive his share of profit or interest at the rate of 6% p.a. on the amount of his share in the firm.

(II) Liabilities of an outgoing partner – These may be classified into two stages:
(a) Liability for acts done before leaving the firm:
A retiring partner is liable for the acts done and debts incurred before his retirement, but he may be exempted from this liability in case on an agreement made by him with the third party and the remaining partners of the reconstituted firm.

(b) Liability for acts done after leaving the firm:
In case of retirement of a partner, a public notice is essential to this effect. If it is not given, the retiring partner will continue to be liable to third parties for the acts of the firm even after his retirement. A public notice is not essential in case of sleeping and deceased partners who is not known to be partner, and so will not be liable for such acts.

Reconstitution and Dissolution of a Firm – CA Foundation Law Notes

Dissolution of Firm (Secs. 39 To 55):
Dissolution of partnership and dissolution of firm:

Dissolution of firm Dissolution of Partnership
It involves closing down of the business as the partnership between all the partners comes to an end. It involves a change in the relationship amongst the partners due to retirement, expulsion etc., and the business of the firm does not necessary come to an end. It leads to reconstitution of firm.

Modes of dissolution of firm:
A firm may be dissolved on any of the following grounds:
1. By agreement (Sec. 40):
A firm may be dissolved any time with the consent of all the partners of the firm. Partnership is created by contract, it can also be terminated by contract.

2. By Compulsory Dissolution (Sec. 41):
A firm is dissolved-

  • by the adjudication of all the partners or of all the partners but one as insolvent, or
  • by the happening of any event which makes the business of the firm unlawful.

3. Dissolution on the happening of certain contingencies (Sec. 42):
Subject to contract between the partners, a firm is dissolved –

  • if constituted for a fixed term, by the expiry of that term
  • if constituted to carry out one or more adventures of undertakings, by the completion thereof,
  • by the death of a partner, and
  • by the adjudication of a partner as an insolvent.

The partnership agreement may provide that the firm will not be dissolved in any of the aforementioned cases. Such a provision is valid.

4. Dissolution by notice (Sec. 43):
Where the partnership is at will, the firm may be dissolved by any partner giving notice in writing to all other partners of his intention to dissolve the firm. The firm is dissolved as from the date mentioned in the notice as the date of dissolution, or, if no date is mentioned, as from the date of communication of the notice.

5. Dissolution by the Court (Sec. 44):
At the suit of a partner, the court may dissolve a firm on any one of the following grounds:
A. Insanity:
If a partner has become of unsound mind. The suit for dissolution in this case can be filed by the next friend of the insane partner or by any other partner.

B. Permanent incapacity:
If a partner becomes permanently incapable of performing his duties as a partner. Permanent incapacity may arise from an incurable illness like paralysis. The suit for dissolution in this case must be brought by a partner other than the person who has become incapable.

C. Guilty conduct:
If a partner is guilty of conduct which is likely to affect prejudicially the carrying on of the business, regard being had to the nature of the business. The suit for dissolution on the ground mentioned in this clause must be brought by a partner other than the partner who is guilty of misconduct.

D. Persistent breach of agreement:
If a partner wilfully and persistently commits breach of the partnership agreement regarding management or otherwise conducts himself in such a way that it is not reasonably practicable for the other partriers to carry on business in partnership with him.

E. Transfer of whole interest:
If a Partner has transferred the whole of his interest in the firm to an outsider or as allowed his interest to be sold in execution of a decree. Transfer of partner’s interest does not by itself dissolves the firm. But the other partners may ask the court to dissolve the firm if such a transfer occurs.

F. Loss:
If the business of the firm cannot be carried on except at a loss. Since the motive, with which partnerships are formed, is acquisition of gain, the courts have been given discretion to dissolve a firm in cases where it is impossible to make profits.

G. Just and Equitable clause:
If the court considers it just and equitable to dissolve the firm. This clause gives a discretionary power to the court to dissolve a firm in cases which do not come within any of the foregoing clauses but which are considered to be fit and proper cases for dissolution.

Reconstitution and Dissolution of a Firm – CA Foundation Law Notes

Consequences of dissolution:
a. Rights & liabilities of partners on dissolution (Secs. 45 to 55):
When the firm is dissolved, the business of the firm is wound up, the assets are realised to pay the debts and the surplus, if any is distributed amongst the partners. For the purposes of winding up of the firm, the partners possess certain rights and are subject to certain liabilities. These are discussed below.
1. Right to have the business wound up (Sec. 46):
On the dissolution of a firm, a partner has the right

  • to have the business of the firm wound up and the debts of the firm settled out of the property of the firm.
  • to have the surplus distributed among the partners according to their rights.

2. Continuing authority of partners for purpose of winding up (Sec. 47):
The partners authority to act for the firm and to bind their co-partners continues even after dissolution of the firm for the following two purposes :

  • to wind up the affairs of the firm (for example recovering money from debtors).
  • to complete transaction begun but unfinished at the time of the dissolution.

3. Right to share in personal profits earned after dissolution (Sec. 50):
Every partner has a right to share in any secret profits derived by any partner under any transaction carried out in the firm name or by use of the property or business connection of the firm, after the dissolution but before winding up.

4. Right to have premium returned on premature dissolution (Sec. 51):
Where a partner has paid a premium (goodwill) on entering into partnership for a fixed j term, and the firm is dissolved before the expiration of that term, he shall be entitled to repayment of the whole or a reasonable part of the premium. The amount of repayment will depend upon (a) the terms upon which he became a partner & (b) length of the time during which he was a partner.

Example:
X entered into a partnership, in a firm for a period of 10 years and paid ₹ 5,00,000 as premium. The firm was dissolved after expiration of 3 years because of the insolvency of a partner. Here, X shall be entitled to ₹ 3,50,000 (5,00,000/10 3 = 1,50,000; 5,00,000 – 1,50,000 = 3,50,000) as return of premium.

No such premium shall be paid to the partner if such premature dissolution:

  • is due to death of a partner, or
  • is due to his own misconduct or
  • is as per agreement which contains no provision for the return of premium.

5. Rights where partnership contract is rescinded for fraud or misrepresentation (Sec. 52):
Where a partner was induced to join the firm by the fraud or misrepresentation of any other partner, the aggrieved partner has the right to rescind the partnership agreement and is entitled:
→ to a lien on, or a right of retention of, the surplus or the assets of the firm remaining after the debts of the firm have been paid, for any sum paid by him for the purchase of a share in the firm and for any capital contributed by him;

→ to rank as a creditor of the firm in respect of any payment made by him towards the debts of the firm,

→ to be indemnified by the partner or partners guilty of fraud or misrepresentation against all the debts of the firm.

6. Right to restrain the use of firm name or firm property (Sec. 53):
After a firm is dissolved, every partner, may restrain any other partner:
→ from carrying on a similar business in the firm name or

→ from using any of the property of the firm for his own benefit, until the affairs of the firm have been completely wound up. However, it will not affect the right of any partner or his representative who has bought the goodwill of the firm to use the firm name.

b. Liabilities of partners on dissolution:
1. Continuing liability until public notice (Sec. 45):
If a public notice is not given of the dissolution of a firm the partners continue to be liable to third parties for any act done by any of them after dissolution.

2. Liability for continuing authority of Partners for purpose of winding up (Sec. 47):
After the dissolution of the firm, the partners continue to be liable for acts done to wind up the affairs of the firm and to complete transactions begun but unfinished at the time of the dissolution.

Reconstitution and Dissolution of a Firm – CA Foundation Law Notes

Mode of settlement of accounts after dissolution:
The partners may lay down their own procedure for the settlement of accounts after dissolution. In the absence of a prior agreement between the partners in this regard, the accounts may be settled in accordance with the provisions provided in sections 48, 49 and 55 of the Indian Partnership Act which are discussed below:
(i) Goodwill shall be included in the assets and it might be sold separately or along with other property of the firm.

(ii) Losses, including deficiencies of capital, shall be paid first out of profits, next out of capital, and lastly, for the balance, the partners shall individually subscribe in their profit sharing ratio.

(iii) Assets of the firm, including partners’ contributions to make deficiencies of capital, shall be applied firstly, for paying the debts of the firm to third parties, secondly if there remains any surplus, it shall be utilized in paying each partner the amount of advances given to the firm. Such payments are made in the ratio of advances made by the partners. For example, if X gives an advance of ₹ 50,000 and Y of ₹ 60,000, then the ratio of payment shall be 5:6.

thirdly, if still there remains any surplus, it shall be utilized for paying each partner rateably on account of capital. For example, the capitals of X, Y and Z have been contributed for ₹ 6,00,000, ₹ 7,00,000 and ₹ 8,00,000 respectively. Here, the proportion of capital shall be 6 : 7 : 8. and finally, the residue to be divided amongst partners in their profit sharing ratio.

(iv) In case one of the partners is insolvent and nothing is recoverable from him, then, the de-ficiency of such a partner is borne by the solvent partners in the ratio of their capitals in accordance with the rule in Garner v. Murray.

(v) Payment of firm debts and separate debts: According to Section 49 of Partnership Act, where there are debts of the firm as well as individual debts of the partners, then the following rules shall apply:
→ The property of the firm shall be first utilized in payment of the debts of the firm; and if there remains any surplus, then the share of each partner in such surplus shall be applied in payment of his individual debts, or if there is no such individual debt then his share shall be paid to him.

→ The individual property of any partner shall be applied first in the payment of his individual debts; and if there remains any surplus, it shall be utilized in the payment of the debts of the firm.

Reconstitution and Dissolution of a Firm – CA Foundation Law Notes

Public Notice (Sec. 72):
1. The Partnership Act requires that a public notice must be given in each of the following cases:
(a) On minor attaining majority:
A minor partner on becoming a major must give public notice of his intention to remain or not to remain a partner. [Sec. 30(5)]

(b) Retirement of a partner:
When a partner retires from the firm, he must give public notice to terminate further liability. [Sec. 32(3)]

(c) Expulsion of a partner:
When a partner is expelled from the partnership business he must give public notice to terminate further liability. [Sec. 33]

(d) Dissolution of the firm:
When a partnership firm is dissolved, the partners of the dissolved firm must give public notice to terminate further liability [Section 45(1)]

2. Mode of the Public Notice:
According to Sec. 72 the Public Notice becomes effective when the following steps have been taken:
(a) The notice has been published in the Official Gazette.

(b) The notice has been published in at least one vernacular newspaper (i.e. which is published in Indian language) circulating in the district where the concerned firm has its place or principal place of business.

(c) If the firm is registered, the notice has been sent to the Registrar of Firms.

3. Consequences of not giving public notice:
(a) On minor attaining majority:
If a minor is admitted to the benefits of partnership under Section 30 he has to give public notice within 6 months of his attaining majority or of his obtaining knowledge that he has been admitted to the benefits of partnership, whichever date is later. If he fails to give notice, that he has elected to become or not to become a partner in the firm, he shall become a partner in the firm on the expiry of the said 6 months and is liable as a partner of the firm.

(b) Retirement of a partner:
If a retiring partner does not give a public notice of the retirement from the firm under section 32, he and the other partners shall continue to be liable as partners to third parties for any act done by any of them which would have been an act of the firm if done before the retirement.

(c) Expulsion of a partner:
If in case of expulsion of a partner from the firm a public notice is not given, the expelled partner and the other partners shall continue to be liable to third parties dealing with the firm as in the case of a retired partner. [Section 33],

(d) Dissolution of the firm:
If a public notice is not given on dissolution of a registered firm, the partners shall be liable to third persons of any act done by any of them which would have been an act of the firm if done before the dissolution (section 45).

When public notice is given of the dissolution of a firm, no partner shall have authority to bind the firm except for certain specific purposes as given in Section 47. According to this section, after the dissolution of a firm, the authority of each partner to bind the firm and their mutual rights and obligations of the partners shall continue :

  • so far as may be necessary wind up the affairs of the firm
  • to complete transactions begun but unfinished at the time of the dissolution.
Common Business Terminologies – CA Foundation BCK Notes Chapter 6

Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3

Browsing through CA Foundation Business Economics Notes Chapter 3 Theory of Production and Cost help students to revise the complete subject quickly.

Theory of Production and Cost – Business Economics CA Foundation Notes Chapter 3

Meaning of production:
→ Production is one of the important economic activity that takes place in any economy apart from consumption and investments.

→ An individual firm is the micro-economic unit which undertake the production of goods and services.

→ A firm’s survival depends upon whether it is able to achieve optimum efficiency in production by minimizing the cost of production.

→ Production is the transformation of resources into goods and services. In other words, production is the act of transformation of Inputs into Output which satisfies the wants of some people. Example – Inputs of sugarcane, capital and labour are used to produce Sugar.

→ Production also includes production of Services like those of lawyers, teachers, doctors, etc.

→ The amount of goods and services that an economy is able to produce determines whether it is rich or poor. A country like U.S.A. is a rich country as its production level is high.

→ Man cannot create or destroy matter.

→ In Economics, the term production means creation of economic utilities in the matter i.e. in the things that already exist.

→ Thus, production means creation of those goods and services which have economic utilities i.e. exchange value.

→ According to James Bates and J.R. Parkinson, “Production is the organized activity of transforming resources into finished products in the form of goods and services; and the objective of production is to satisfy the demand of such transformed resources.”

→ Professor J. R. Hicks has defined production “as any activity whether physical or mental, which is directed to the satisfaction of other people’s wants through exchange.”

→ The definition indicates that the term production covers the whole process from creation of utilities till the satisfaction of human wants.

→ Utilities may be created or added in many ways, such as :
1. Form Utility:

  • It is created by changing the form of raw materials into finished goods for man’s use.
  • Example – converting raw cotton into cotton fabric.
  • Form utility is created by manufacturing industries.

2. Place Utility:

  • It is created by transporting goods from one place to another.
  • Example – when goods are taken from factory to marketplace, place utility is created.
  • Transport services are involved in creation of place utility.

3. Time Utility:

  • It is created by making things available when they are required.
  • Example – Banks create time utility by granting overdraft facilities.

4. Service Utility (Personal Utility):
It is created by providing personal services to the customers by professionals likes lawyers, doctors, bankers, shopkeepers, teachers, transporters, etc.

Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3

Factors of Production:

Land:
→ Generally, land means earth’s surface.

→ However, in economics land refers to all the free gifts of nature i.e. natural resources. Land includes natural resources:

  • on the surface of earth; Example – Soil, forest, plots of land, etc.
  • below the surface of earth, Example – mineral deposits, etc. and
  • above the surface of earth, Example – climate, sunshine, rain, etc.

→ Land has the following characteristics:

  • Primary Factor. Land is the original and primary or natural factor of production. It provides various natural resources for production.
  • Free Gift of Nature. Land is the creation of nature and not man made. It is a free gift of nature to mankind.
  • Inelastic Supply. Land is fixed in supply. Its supply cannot be either increased or decreased by any human efforts. However, its supply is relatively elastic from the point of view of a firm.
  • Lacks Geographical Mobility. Land cannot be moved bodily from one place to another. However, land is said to be mobile in the sense it can be put to many alternative uses.
  • Passive Factor. Land does not yield any result unless human efforts and capital are employed.
  • Heterogeneous. Land differs in nature, fertility, uses and productivity from one place to another.
  • Permanent. It means that land cannot be destroyed. The productive power of soil is original and indestructible according to Ricardo.
  • Diminishing Returns. The land is subject to the Law of Diminishing Returns more quickly in the cultivation of land.

Labour:

  • Labour in economics means any work whether physical or mental done in exchange for some monetary reward.
  • Anything done out of love and affection is not labour in economic sense.
  • Labour has the following peculiarities (characteristics) which makes it different from other factors:

1. Labour is inseparable from labourer:

  • All other suppliers of factors can be separated from the factors which they supply.
  • Example – Land can be separated from its owner.
  • However, the labourer cannot be separated from the work which he performs.
  • Example – A doctor has to attend his patients in person. Labour is connected with Human Efforts.

2. Human Factor:

  • It is a live factor of production. Hence, labour has feelings and temperament.
  • So it is very much affected by surroundings, working, conditions, motivation, leisure, recreation, working hours, etc.

3. Highly perishable:

  • Labour cannot be stored for future use. It is highly perishable.
  • A day lost without work means a day’s work gone forever.
  • Hence, labourer has weak bargaining power and has to accept even low wages.

4. The labourer sells his services and not himself:
In the labour market it is labour which is brought and sold and not the labourer.

5. Heterogeneous:

  • Labour power differs from labourer to labourer.
  • Labour power depends upon physical strength, education, skill, training, efficiency,
  • Hence, labour can be classified as unskilled, semi-skilled and skilled labour.
  • The skilled labour is called as human capital.

6. Mobile.

  • Labour is a mobile factor.
  • Labour is much less mobile than capital.
  • Labourer is human being and hence has attachment with his family, custom, religion, culture, etc. and so is hesitant to move from one place to another.

7. Active Factor:
Labour is the most active factor of production. Other factors are made operative with the use of labour.

8. Labour has sociological characteristics:

  • Employment of labour involves problems relating to labour welfare.
  • Example – Social security like provident fund, gratuity, medical benefits, pension, etc.
  • Other factors do not have such characteristics.

9. Supply curve of labour is backward sloping.

10. The supply of labour is inelastic in short run.

Capital:
→ In ordinary language, capital is used in the sense of money.

→ But in economics the term ‘Capital’ means man made stock of goods like factories, machines, tools, equipments, raw materials, dams, canals, transport vehicles, etc. which are used in production.

→ Thus, ‘Capital’ in economics is used in the sens(e of real capital i.e. capital goods.

→ Capital has therefore, been rightly defined as “produced means of production” and as “man made instrument of production”.

→ Land and labour are primary or original factors of production. But capital is produced by man working with nature to help in the production of further goods.

Following are the main characteristics of capital:
1. Capital is man made:
Capital is not produced by nature. It is artificial as it is produced by man.

2. Capital is productive:
Use of capital increases the overall productivity in a given process. It provides tools and implements to labour for production.

3. Supply of capital is elastic:

  • The supply of capital can be adjusted to demand.
  • The stock of capital depends on capital formation.
  • Thus, by raising the rates of savings and investments the supply of capital can be increased.

4. All capital is wealth:

  • Capital is that part of wealth which is used in further production of wealth.
  • Hence, capital has all the characteristics of wealth like utility, scarcity, transferability and price.

5. Capital is a passive factor:
It alone is unable to produce anything. It is ineffective without the use of labour and land.

6. Capital is the most mobile factor:
It has both place as well as occupational mobility.

7. Capital is durable:
Physical capital assets like plant and machinery, factory buildings, etc. last over a long time in the process of production. However, they are subject to depreciation.

8. Capital involves social cost:

  • In the creation of capital, the money to be used for present consumption has to be diverted.
  • Sacrifice of present consumption and enjoyment of the people is treated as a social cost.

Types of capital:
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 1
→ Fixed Capital. Those durable physical assets which can be repeatedly used in the process of production for long periods are called fixed capital.
Example – Machinery, Plant, Tools, Factories, Railways, etc.

→ Circulating or Working Capital. Working capital refers to those goods which are used up in the single act of production. Such goods are used only ONCE in production.
Example – raw materials, power, fuel, etc. They are single use producer’s goods.

→ Sunk Capital. Sunk capital is the capital which is used to produce only one single commodity. It can be put to a single specialized use only.
Example – A brick kiln can be used only to bake brick and nothing else. Sunk capital therefore, lacks occupational mobility.

→ Floating Capital. Floating capital is that which can be put to several uses.
Example – electricity, money, leather, etc.

→ Real Capital. Real capital refers to the physical capital goods like machinery, raw material, factory buildings, etc. which help in production.

→ Human Capital. The human capital is in the form of people who are equipped with education, skills, training, good health, etc. A faster economic growth can be achieved with the accumulation of human capital.

→ Tangible Capital. Tangible capital is one which can be seen and touched.
Example – machinery, tools, etc. in other words, it is real capital.

→ Intangible Capital. It cannot be seen or touched. It can only be felt.
Example – goodwill, etc.

→ Money Capital. It is in the form of shares, debentures, bonds, stock certificates, etc. Money is invested in expectations of returns.

→ Individual Capital. Capital resources having personal or private ownership of an individual or group of individuals is called individual capital.
Example – Tata Enterprises.

→ Social Capital. The capital which is owned by the society as a whole is called as social capital.
Example – roads, railways, schools, dams, canals, etc.

Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3

Capital Formation:

  • Capital formation means a sustained increase in the stock of real capital in a country.
  • It is thus, an addition of capital goods like machines, tools, factories, transport facilities, power, etc. in the country.
  • Such capital goods are used for further production of goods and thus increases the production capacity of the country.
  • Capital formation is also known as investment.
  • Capital formation plays an important role in the development of an economy generally, higher the rate of
  • capital formation, more economically developed an economy would be.

There are mainly three stages of capital formation which are as follows:
1. Savings:
→ Savings represents that part of income which is not consumed. Level of savings in a country depends on –

  • ability to save
  • willingness to save.

(i)

  • Ability to save depends upon the income of an individual.
  • Higher the income, higher is the savings.
  • This is because with the increase in income the propensity to consume falls and propensity to save increases.
  • This is true in case of both the individuals and the economy.

(ii)

  • A person with ability to save must also have willingness to save.
  • Willingness to save depends upon individual’s concern about future. If a person is foresighted and wants to make future secure, he will save more.
  • Willingness to save also depends upon family affection, desire for the growth and promotion of business, desire for prestige and power habits, sound banking system, stability in the money value, State’s taxation policy, etc.

2. Mobilization of Savings:

  • The money so saved by the households must enter into circulation i.e. must be mobilized and make them available to the businessmen or entrepreneurs who require it for investment purposes.
  • This requires a network of banks, financial institutions (like UTI, IDBI, etc.), insurance companies, etc.
  • Such facilities help to promote high rate of mobilization and canalization of savings.

3. Investments:

  • The final stage is the investment of savings into capital assets like machinery, tools, buildings, dams, etc.
  • Investment requires a large number of honest, dynamic, daring, efficient and skilled entrepreneurs in the economy.
  • Investments also depends upon the factors like expected profits, rate of interest, size of market, stability in the money value, internal peace and security, fear of foreign aggression, etc.

Entrepreneur:

  • The most important factor in production i.e. enterprise is provided by entrepreneur.
  • An entrepreneur is a person or group of persons who bring together the different factors of production i.e. land, labour and capital at one place; combine them in right proportions; initiate the process of production by making them work together and bear the risks and uncertainty involved in it.
  • He is therefore also called the organizer, the manager or risk bearer.

An entrepreneur performs the following functions:
1. Initiating a business enterprise:

  • The first function of an entrepreneur is to start a business. For this he brings together the different factors of production like land, labour and capital.
  • He pays them their respective remuneration i.e. rent for land, wages to labour and interest to capital.
  • Any surplus left after factor payment is his reward i.e. profit which is not fixed.
  • If his planning goes wrong he may also incur losses.

2. Risk and Uncertainty bearing:
→ Main function of an entrepreneur is to bear risk and uncertainty. According to Prof. F. H. Knight there are two types of risks namely –

  • Foreseeable or insurable risks, example – risk of fire, thefts, accidents, etc.
  • Unforeseeable or non-insurable risk, example – technological risks due to inventions, fluctuations in demand due to change in fashion etc., trade cycles, changes in govt, policies, etc.

→ Foreseeable risks can be predicted and hence can be insured. Such risks do not cause uncertainty and thus do not give rise to profits.

→ Unforeseeable risks involve uncertainty and give rise to profits.

→ True entrepreneurship lies in bearing non-insurable risks and uncertainties.

3. Innovations:

  • Prof. Joseph A. Schumpeter considers innovation as the true function of the entrepreneur.
  • Innovation refers to all those changes in the production process the objective of which is to reduce the cost of production and increase profits.
  • Innovations in wider sense includes introduction of new or improved production methods, a new machine, a new plant, use of a new source of raw material, change in the internal organizational set-up, etc.
  • Such innovations give rise to profits but temporarily because once these are adopted by other firms, the profits could disappear.
  • Hence, entrepreneur has to continuously introduce new innovations and contribute to technological progress and economic growth of the country.

Enterprise’s objectives and constraints:
→ Earning profit is considered to be the prime objective of every business. However, earning profit cannot be the only objective of the business because an enterprise functions in the economic, social, political and cultural environment. Hence, an enterprise has to set us objectives in relation to such environment. The objectives of an enterprise are as follows:
(1) Organic objectives: The basic purpose of all kinds of enterprises is to Survive and Exist i.e. to stay alive. This is possible only when it is able to recover its costs and earn profits. Once the enterprise is assured of its survival, it will aim at growth and expansion.

  • Growth as on objective has gained importance with the rise of professional managers. H.L. Marris’s and other economists assert that managers of a corporate firm are interested in maximizing the growth rate rather than in profit maximization.
  • Owners are interested in profits, capital, market share and public reputation.
  • For growth and expansion of the firm it is necessary that adequate profits are made so as to provide internal funds for further investment.
  • Growth and profit are both positively related to the size of the firm. Both of the objectives converge in one namely A Steady growth in the size of the firm.
  • Managers prefer balanced rate of growth over profits. The growth rate and growth is measured in terms of sales, number of branches, number of employees, etc.

(2) Economic Objectives: The basic and important objective of every business is to earn profit. Accordingly therefore, the firm determines the price and output policy in a manner that profits can be maximized.

  • Investors expect sufficient returns from their company. Similarly, creditors and employees are also interested in profitable enterprise.
  • The definition of profits in economic sense has different meaning than accountants definition of profits.
  • Accounting Profit = Total Revenue – Accounting Cost (Explicit Cost)
  • Economic Profit = Total Revenue – Economic Cost (i.e. Explicit + Implicit Cost)
  • Profit maximization objective has been criticized because all firms do not aim to maximize profits.

Example :

  • Some firm try to achieve Security with reasonable level of profit.
  • Some firms may try to Maximise Sales (Prof. Baumol)
  • Some economists point that owners and managers of a company try to Maximise their utility rather than profit.

(3) Social Objectives: A business enterprise is an integral part of society. It lives in a society. It cannot grow unless it meets the needs of the society. It makes use of resources of j society. Therefore, it owes something to society. Some of the important social objectives j of business are –

  • To maintain continuous and desired quantity of unadulterated goods of standard quality.
  • To avoid unfair trade practices.
  • To avoid profiteering and anti-social practices.
  • To create opportunities for gainful employment for the people in the society. A business should specially consider the handicapped, disabled and poor people.
  • To avoid air, water or noise pollution.

(4) Human Objectives: Employees are precious resources who contribute abundantly to the success in business. Therefore, the overall development of its employees, keep them motivated and taking care of employees should be major objectives of an organization.

The common human objectives are –

  • To provide fair deal to the employees at different levels.
  • To provide good working conditions.
  • To pay competitive and satisfactory wages and salaries.
  • To impart training to employees and keep updating their knowledge.
  • To provide opportunities to employees in decision making process on the matters affecting them.

(5) National Objectives: An enterprise should try to fulfil the nations need and aspirations. It should work towards implementation of national plans and policies. Some of the national objectives are –

  • To remove inequality of opportunities and provide opportunities to all irrespective of caste and religion to work and to progress.
  • To produce according to national priorities.
  • To help country achieve self-sufficiency in production of all types of goods and thus reduce dependence on other countries.
  • To provide education and training to young men to bring about skill formation for achieving growth and development.
  • All the enterprises have multiple objectives and therefore, the need to set priorities by balancing of the objectives.

In the pursuit of the above objectives an enterprise’s action may get constrained in following ways –

  • Lack of knowledge and information about many variable that affect business.
  • Constraints may be experienced due to governments’ restrictions on the production, price and movement of factors.
  • There may be infrastructural bottleneck.
  • Changes in business and economic conditions; change in government policies about location, prices, taxes, etc.; natural calamities like fire, flood, famine, etc.
  • Constraints are also faced due to inflation, rising interest rates, unfavourable exchange rate, capital and labour costs, etc.

Enterprise’s Problems
→ A business enterprise face many problem from its start, through its life time till it is closed down. Following are the main problems:
(1) Problems relating to objectives: An enterprise functions in the economic, social, political
and cultural environment. Therefore, it has a set of many objectives in relation to its environment.

  • These multifarious objectives many times conflict with one another. Hence, the enterprise faces the problem of choosing and striking balance between them.
  • Example – Social responsibility objective may run into conflict with expansion of production activity resulting in pollution.

(2) Problems relating to location and size of the plant: An enterprise has to decide about the Location of its plant. In doing so, it has to consider many costs like cost of labour, facilities and cost of transportation to decide where its plant should be located.

→ Another problem faced is about SIZE of the firm, whether it should be a small scale or large scale unit. Before deciding upon the scale of operations several aspects will have to be considered like technical, managerial, marketing, financial, etc.

(3) Problems relating to selecting and Organising physical facilities: A firm has to decide about the nature of production process to be used and the type of equipments required for it. This will depend upon the require volume of production
→ This choice will be based on –

  • the evaluation of costs of different equipments
  • efficiency

→ It has also to prepare layout of plant.

(4) Problems relating to Finance: A firm also has to do good financial planning. For this an enterprise will have to determine –

  • amount of funds required
  • demand and cost of its products
  • profits on investments, and
  • capital structure

(5) Problems relating to Organisation Structure: An enterprise faces problem relating to organizational structure. It has to divide the total work of the enterprise by creating different departments in order to carry on the specialized functions by each department.

  • It has to clearly define the roles and relationships of all positions also.

(6) Problems relating to Marketing: For survival and growth, a firm has to properly do marketing of its products and services.

  • It has to identify its actual and potential customers, tools of marketing, etc.
  • After identifying the market, the firm has to decide upon product, promotion, price and place aspects.

(7) Problems relating to Legal Formalities: Many legal formalities are to be carried out at the time of formation, during the life time and at closure.
Example – assessing various taxes and paying, maintenance of records, filing various returns, adhering to laws formulated by Govt., etc.

(8) Problems relating to Industrial Relations: This problem relates to winning worker’s co-operation, enforcing discipline among workers, workers participation in management, dealing with trade unions, etc.

Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3

Production Function:
→ Output is a function of inputs i.e. factor services such as land, labour and capital which are used in production. In other words, production is a transformation of Physical Inputs into Physical Output.

→ The functional relationship between physical inputs and physical output, per unit of time under a given state of technology is called production function.

→ It can also be expressed in the form of a mathematical equation in which output is the dependent variable and inputs are the independent variables.
Q = f (a, b, c …………. n)
Where –
Q denotes quantity of output of a commodity per unit of time
f stands for function of i.e. depends on a, b, c,… n denotes quantity of various inputs.

Assumptions of Production Function:
The production function is based on the following assumptions:

  • It is specified with reference to a specified period of time.
  • It is assumed that the state of technology remains the same, during the period of time.
  • It is assumed that the firm uses best and most efficient technique available in production.
  • It is assumed that the factors of production are divisible into viable units.

The production function can be explained under two heads:
1. The short run production function in which input – output relations are analysed where –

  • One input is variable, all other inputs are fixed, (described as the Law of Variable Proportions) OR
  • Two inputs are variable, all other factors are fixed (explained with the help of isoquants)

2. The long run production function in which input- output relations are analysed where all the inputs are variable (described as the Law of Returns to Scale).
Cobb-Douglas Production Function:
Q = f (L, K). Where –
Q = Output; L = Labour; K = Capital

→ Paul H. Douglas and C.W. Cobb of the U.S.A. studied the production function of the American manufacturing industries. This production function applies to the whole of manufacturing in U.S.A. rather than to an individual firm. In this case, output is manufacturing production and inputs used are labour and capital.

→ The conclusion of study is that labour contributed 3 /4th and capital about 1 /4th in the manufacturing production.

Fixed Inputs (Fixed Factors) and Variable Inputs (Variable Factors):

Comparison Fixed Inputs Variable Inputs
(i) Meaning 1. The factors which cannot be easily and quickly changed and require long time to make adjustment in them with the changes in the level of output are called fixed inputs or fixed factors of production.

2. In other words, factor inputs whose quantity does not vary from day-to-day are called as fixed inputs.

1. The factors which can be easily and quickly changed and readily adjusted with the changes in the level of output are called variable inputs or variable factors of production.

2. In other words, factor inputs whose quantity may vary from day-to-day are called as variable inputs.

(ii) Examples 1. Examples of fixed inputs – buildings, machinery, plant, top management, etc.

2. It requires long time to make variations in them.

3. Example – To construct a new factory building with a larger area and capacity.

1. Examples of variable inputs – ordinary labour, raw-material, power, fuel chemicals, etc.

2. It can be readily changed.

(iii) Relation with Output 1. Fixed inputs do not vary with the level of output.

2. Its quantity remains the same, whether the output is more or less or zero in Short run.

1. Variable inputs vary directly with the level of output.

2. Such factors are required more, when output is more; less, when output is less and zero, when output is zero in Short run.

(iv) Cost 1. The cost of the fixed inputs is called Fixed cost.

2. In the short run the firm has to bear the fixed cost even if the output is zero.

3. Since the quantity of fixed inputs remains the same, fixed cost remains the same whatever be the level of output.

1. The cost of the variable inputs is called Variable cost.

2. Since variable inputs vary directly with the level of output, variable costs are also positively related with output. If output is zero, variable cost is also zero.

3. If output is increased variable cost also increases and vice-versa.

Short Run (Short Period) & Long Run (Long Period):

Comparison Short Run Long Run
(i) Meaning 1. The short run is defined as the period of time in which some factors of production or at least one factor is fixed i.e. does not vary with output

2. Thus, in the short period some factors are Fixed Factors
→ Example – Factory building, machinery, management, etc. and some are Variable factors.
→ Example – Labour, raw-material, power, fuel, etc..

1. The long run is defined as the period of time in which all factors may vary.

2. In the long run, all factors become variable and so there is no distinction between fixed and variable factors.

(ii) Scale of Production OR Size of the Firm 1. In the short run, the output is produced with a Given scale of production i.e. the size of plant or firm (and so the production capacity) remains unchanged.

2. Hence, production can be increased or decreased only by changing the amount of variable factors

1. In the long run, the output is produced with the Change in the scale of production i.e. the size of plant or firm can be increased (and so the production capacity).

2. Hence, production can be increased by varying all factors i.e. fixed factors (of short period) as well as variable factors.

(iii) Production Law The production function which is studied in the short run period is called as the Law of Variable Proportions. The production function which is studied in the long run period is called as the Law of Returns to Scale.
(iv) Decisions about Change in factors 1. The decisions to change the amount of variable factors (like raw material, labour, etc.) are taken very frequently depending upon changes in demand of the commodity.

2. Hence, short run is the ‘Actual production period’ during which some factors are fixed while some are variable.

3. Thus, firms operate in the short run period.

1. The decisions to change the amount of fixed factors i.e. scale of production or to close down the firm are taken only once in a while.

2. Hence, long run is the ‘Planning period’.

3. Thus, firms plan in the long run period.

(v) Nature of Supply 1. In the short run period, supply can be adjusted up to a limited extent as per changes in demand.

2. In other words, supply is relatively inelastic.

1. In the long run period, supply can be fully adjusted as per changes in demand.
2. In other words, supply is relatively elastic.
(vi) Nature of Cost 1. In short run period, cost is classified as Fixed Cost and Variable Cost.

2. Fixed cost is the cost of fixed inputs and Variable cost is the cost of variable inputs.

3. Fixed cost is the main feature of short run period

1. In long run period All costs are variable.

2. Variable cost is the main feature of long run period.

(vii) Effect on Price 1. In short-run, the price determination of a commodity is more influenced by –
→ The demand forces than supply forces because supply in short-run is relatively inelastic.
→ The UTILITY of the commodity.2. The short-run price is called Sub-Normal Price
1. In long-run, the price determination of a commodity is more influenced by –
→ The supply forces than demand forces because supply in long-run is relatively elastic.
→  The Cost of Production of the commodity.2. The long-run price is called Normal Price.
(viii) Average Cost Curve 1. The short-run average cost curve is ‘U’ shaped.

2. Its U-shape is explained with the Law of Variable Proportions.

1. The long-run average cost curve is also U shaped.

2. But its U- shape is not as prominent as short-run average cost curve.

3. Its U-shape is explained with the Law of Returns to Scale.

4. Long-run average cost curve is also called ‘Planning Curve’ and ‘Envelope Curve’.

(ix) Profit of Firms In the short-run period –
(a) The firms under perfect competition on being at equilibrium may earn normal profits, super normal profits or incur losses.
(b) The monopoly firm on being at equilibrium may earn normal profits, super normal profits or incur losses.
(c) The firms under monopolistic competition on being at equilibrium may earn normal profits, super normal profits or incur losses.
In the long run period –
(a) The firms under perfect competition earn only Normal profits and operate at optimum level.
(b) The monopoly firm can earn Super Normal profits and operate at sub-optimum level.
(c) The firms under monopolistic competition earn only Normal Profits and operate at sub-optimum level.

Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3

Concepts of Product:
→ Product i.e. output refers to the volume of goods produced by a firm in a particular period of time.

→ There are three concepts relating to the physical production by factors namely –

  • Total Product (TP),
  • Average Product (AP), and
  • Marginal Product (MP).

1. Total Product (TP).

  • The total output produced by all the factors per unit of time is called total product.
  • Total product increases with an increase in the variable factor input.
  • Column Nos. (1) and (2) of the following table shows a total product schedule.

2. Average Product (AP):
→ The. average product means the total product per unit of a variable factor.

→ In other words, it is the total product divided by the number of units of a variable factor.
Average Product = \(\frac { Total Product }{ No.of units of Variable factor }\)
OR AP = \(\frac { TP }{ QVF }\)

→ Column No. (3) of the following table shows the average product of variable factor.

3. Marginal Product (MP):
→ The marginal product means addition made to total product by the use of an extra unit of variable factor.

→ It may be stated as –
MP = TPn – TPn-1
where,
MPn = Marginal product when ‘n ’ units of variable factors are used
TP = Total Product
n = number of units of variable factors used.

→ Marginal Product may also be defined as the change in total output due to use of additional unit of variable factor
MP = \(\frac { ∆ TP}{ ∆ QVF }\)
Where –
∆ = a small change Column No. (4) of the following table shows the marginal product schedule.
Table: Product Schedule

Units of Variable factor Example – Labour Total Product(TP) Average Product(AP) Marginal Product(MP)
1 10 10 10
2 30 15 20
3 60 20 30
4 80 20 20
5 90 18 10
6 90 15 0
7 85 12.1 -5

→ Average product and Marginal product are related to one another.
(i)

  • When average product of the variable factor is rising, marginal product of the variable factor is more than its average product.
  • So when average product curve is rising, the marginal product curve will lie somewhere above it.

(ii)

  • When average product of the variable factor is falling, marginal product of the variable factor is less than its average product.
  • So when average product curve is falling, the marginal product curve will lie somewhere below it.

(iii)

  • When average product of the variable factor is maximum and constant, marginal product is equal to average product.
  • In other words, the marginal product curve cuts the average product curve at its maximum point.

Law of Variable Proportions:
→ The Law of Variable Proportions examines the production function i.e. the input-output relation in short run where one factor is variable and other factors of production are fixed.

→ In other words, it examines production function when the output is increased by varying the quantity of one input.

→ Thus, the law examines the effect of change in the proportions between fixed and variable factor inputs on output in three stages viz. Increasing returns, diminishing returns and negative returns.

→ Statement of the Law :
“As the proportion of one factor in a combination of factors is increased, after a point first the marginal and then the average product of that factor will diminish”. (F. Benhan)

→ The law operates under some assumptions which are as follows:

  • There is only one factor which is variable. All other factors remain constant.
  • All units of variable factor are homogeneous
  • It is possible to change the proportions in which the various factors are combined.
  • The state of technology is given and is constant.

The three stages of the law can be explained with the help of the following schedule and diagram.
Table : Law of variable proportions
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 2

Stage I : The Law of Increasing Returns to Factor –

  • During this stage, total product (TP) increases at an increasing rate upto the point of inflexion ‘I’ and thereafter it increases at diminishing rate.
  • This is because marginal product (MP) of the variable factor increases upto point ‘M’ on MP curve and then start falling.
  • Rising MP also pulls up average product (AP), which goes on rising, in the first stage.
  • Rising AP indicates increase in the efficiency of variable factor i.e. labour.
  • Stage I ends where AP is maximum and is equal to MP as shown by point ‘C’ in the diagram.

The law of increasing returns operates because of the following two reasons:
1. Indivisibility of fixed factors –

  • Due to indivisibility, the quantity of fixed factors is more than the quantity of variable factors.
  • So when the quantity of variable factors is increased to work with fixed factors, output increases speedily due to full and effective utilisation of fixed factors.
  • In other words, efficiency of fixed factors increases.

2. Efficiency of Variable Factor Increases –
Due to increase in the quantity of variable factor, it becomes possible to introduce Divison of Labour leading to Specialistion. This results in more output per worker.

Stage II : The Law of Diminishing Returns to Factor –

  • In second stage, TP continues to increase at diminishing rate. It reaches the maximum at point ‘D’ in the diagram, where the second stage ends.
  • In this stage, both AP and MP of variable factor are falling- though remains positive. That is why this stage is called as the stage of diminishing returns.
  • At the end of this stage MP becomes, zero as shown by point ‘B’ in the diagram and corresponding to highest point ‘D’ on TP curve.

The law of diminishing returns operate due to the following two reasons:
1. Indivisibility of fixed factors –

  • Once the optimum proportion between indivisible fixed factors and variable factors is reached (as in Stage I) with any further increase in the quantity of Variable factor, the fixed factors become inadequate and are overutilised.
  • The fine balance between fixed and variable factor gets disturbed. This causes AP and MP to diminish.

2. Imperfect Substitutability of factors:

  • Variable factors are not perfect substitute of fixed factors.
  • The elasticity of substitution between factors is not infinite.

Stage III : The Law of Negative Returns to Factor –

  • In third stage, TP falls and so, TP curve slopes downward. MP becomes negative and the MP curve goes below the X-axis. AP continues to fall.
  • As the MP of variable factor becomes negative, this stage is called the stage of negative returns.
  • In this stage the efficiency of fixed and variable factors fall and factor ratio becomes highly sub-optimal.

The law of negative returns operate due to the following reasons:

  • The quantity of the variable factor becomes too excessive compared to fixed factors. They get in each other’s way and so TP falls and MP becomes negative.
  • Too large number of variable factors also reduce the efficiency of fixed factors.

Conclusion -Where to operate?

  • A rational firm will not produce either in Stage I or in Stage III.
  • In stage I, the marginal product of fixed factor is negative as its quantity is more than variable factor.
  • In stage III, the marginal product of variable factor is negative as its quantity is too large than fixed factor.
  • Therefore, firm would seek to produce in Stage II where both AP and MP of Variable factor are falling.
  • At which point to produce in this stage will depend on the prices of factor inputs.

Law of Returns to Scale:
→ The Law of Returns to Scale examines the production function i.e. the input – output relation in long run where increase in output can be achieved by varying the units of All factors in the same proportion.

→ Thus, in long run all factors become variable.

→ It means that in long run the scale of production and the size of the firm can be increased.

→ The law of returns to scale analyse the effects of scale on the level of output as –
1. Increasing Returns to Scale:

  • When the output increases by a greater proportion than the proportion increases in all the factor inputs, it is increasing returns to scale.
  • Example – When all inputs are increased by 10% and output rises by 30%.
  • The reasons of increasing returns to scale are – internal and external economies of scale; indivisibility of fixed factors; improved organisation; division of labour and specialisation; better supervision and control; adequate supply of productive factors, etc.

2. Constant Returns to Scale:

  • When the output increases exactly in the same proportion as that of increase in all factor inputs, it is constant returns to scale.
  • Example – When all inputs are increased by 10% and output also rises by 10%.
  • The reason of constant returns to scale is that beyond a certain point, internal and external economies are Neutralised by growing internal and external diseconomies.

3. Diminishing Returns to Scale:

  • When the output increases by a lesser proportion than the proportion increase in all the factor inputs, it is diminishing returns to scale.
  • Example – When all inputs are increased by 20% but output rises by 10%.
  • The reason of diminishing returns to scale is increased internal and external diseconomies of production.
  • Internal diseconomies like difficulties in management, lack of supervision and control, delay in decision-making etc.
  • External diseconomies like insufficient transport system, high freights, high prices of raw materials, power cuts, etc.

→ The law of returns to scale can also be illustrated with the help of the following schedule and diagram.
Table : Law of returns to scale

Units of Labour & Capital Marginal Product
(Units)
Total Product
(Units)
Remarks
1
2
200
300
200
500
Stage I
Increasing Returns
3
4
5
400
400
400
900
1300
1700
Stage II
Constant Returns
6
7
8
300
200
100
2000
2200
2300
Stage III
Diminishing Returns.

Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 3

Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3

Returns to Factor and Returns to Scale:

Returns to Factor Returns to Scale
1. Meaning 1. Returns to factor refers to the various production sizes where one factor is variable and other factor of production are fixed.
2. In other words, it examines production function when the output is increased by varying the quantity of one input.
3. It examines the effect of Change in the proportions between inputs on output.
1. Returns to scale refers to the various production sizes where increase in output can be achieved by varying the units of All Factors in the Same Proportions.
2. It show the effects on output when all factor inputs are varied in the same proportion simultaneously.
2. Nature of Inputs 1. Quantities of some inputs are fixed while the quantities of other inputs vary.
2. In other words, there are Fixed and Variable factors of production.
1. Quantities of all inputs can be varied.
2. In other words, all factors of production are Variable.
3. Time Element Returns to factor is called a Short Run production function. Returns to scale is called a Long run production function.
4. Application It does not apply where the factors must be used in fixed proportion to produce a commodity. It does apply where the factors must be used in fixed proportions to produce a commodity.
5. Stages of Law 1. The law has three stages namely –

  • Increasing Returns to factor,
  • Diminishing Returns to Factor, &
  • Negative Returns to factor

2. Of the three stages, diminishing returns pre-dominate.

1. The law has three stages namely –

  • Increasing Returns to Scale,
  • Constant Returns to Scale,
  • Diminishing Returns to Scale.

2. All the three stages of return appear.

6. Causes of Operation 1. Increasing returns to factor is due to indivisibility of fixed factors and division of labour and specialisation.
2. Diminishing returns is due to non- optimal factor proportion and imperfect substitutability of factors.
3. Negative returns fall in the efficiency of fixed and variable factors.
1. Increasing returns to scale is due to increased internal and external economies.
2. Constant returns to scale is due to the fact that internal and external economies are neutralised by growing internal and external diseconomies.
3. Diminishing returns is due to internal and external diseconomies of scale.
7. Scale of Production 1. The scale of output is unchanged and the production plant or the size and efficiency of the firm remain constant.
2. This is because, only one factor is variable and all other factors are fixed.
 

1. The scale of output can be increased and so the size of the firm too can be expanded.
2. This is because all factors are variable and hence can be increased in the same proportion simultaneously.

Production Optimisation:

Isoquants:
An iso-product curve or isoquant is a curve, which represents the various combinations of two variable inputs that give the same level of output. As all combinations on the iso-product curve give the same level of output, the producer becomes indifferent to these combinations. That is why iso-product curve are also called ‘production indifference curve’ or ‘equal product curve’. To understand consider the following production isoquant schedule.
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 4
In the schedule I above, the producer is indifferent whether he gets combination A, B, C, D or E. This is because all the combinations of capital and labour give the same level of output i.e. 100 units.

By plotting the above combinations on a graph, we can derive an iso-product curve as shown in the following figure:
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 5
In the diagram, quantity of capital is measured on X-axis and quantity of labour on Y-axis.

The various combinations A, B, C, D, E of capital and labour are plotted and on joining them we derive an iso-product curve. All combinations lying on the iso-product curve yield the same level of output i.e. 100 units and hence technically equally efficient.

If the production schedule II is also plotted on the graph, we will get another iso-product curve IQ200. This will lie above the IQloo as the combinations contain greater quantities of capital and labour. A set of iso-product curves is called iso-product curve map.
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 6
In the diagram, it can be observed that each iso-product curve is labelled in terms of output. All combinations lying of IQ100 give the output of 100 units and all the combinations lying on IQ100 give the output of 200 units. Higher iso-product curve represent higher level of output. Also it indicates how much more output can be achieved.

Marginal Rate of Technical Substitution:
The rate at which one factor of production is substituted in place of the other factor without any change in the level of output is called as the marginal rate of technical substitution. Consider the following schedule.
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 7
Each of the factor combinations in the table above yields same level of output. Moving from com-bination A to B, one unit of capital replaces 4 units of labour. Similarly, moving from B to C, one unit of capital now replaces only 3 units of labour and so on. It implies that labour and capital are imperfect substitutes. That is why MRTSKL is continuously diminishing. We can measure MRTSKL on an iso-product curve.

‘Iso-Cost Line’ OR ‘Equal Cost Lines’:
Iso-cost line (also known Equal Cost Line; Price Line; Outlay Line; Factor Price Line) shows the various combinations of two factor inputs which the firm can purchase with a given outlay (i.e. budget) and at given prices of two inputs.

Example:
A firm has with itself ₹ 1,000 which it would like to spend on factor ‘X’ and factor ‘Y’.
Price of factor ‘X’ is ₹ 20 per unit.
Price of factor ‘Y’ is ₹ 10 per unit.
Therefore, if the firm spends the whole amount on factor X, it can buy 50 units of X and if the whole amount is spent on factor Y, it can buy 100 units of Y. However, in between these two extreme limits, it can have many combinations of X and Y for the outlay of ₹ 1,000. Graphically it can be shown as follows –
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 8
In the diagram OP shows 100 units of Y and OM shows 50 units of X. When we join the two points P and M, we get the iso-cost line. All the combinations of factor X and factor Y lying on iso-cost line can be purchased by the firm with an outlay of ₹ 1,000. If the firm increases the outlay to ₹ 2,000, the iso-cost line shifts to the right, if prices of two factors remains unchanged. The slope of the iso-cost line is equal to the ratio of the prices of two factors. Thus,
Slope of line PM = \(\frac { Price if X }{ Price of Y }\)

Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3

Producer’s Equilibrium OR Production Optimization:
A firm always try to produce a given level of output at minimum cost. For this it has to use that combination of inputs which minimizes the cost of production. This ensures maximization of profits and produce a given level of output with least cost combination of inputs. The least-cost combination of inputs or factors is called producer’s equilibrium or production optimization. This is determined with the help of (a) isoquants, & (b) iso-cost line.

An isoquant or iso-product curve is a curve which shows the various combinations of two inputs that produce same level of output. The isoquants are negatively sloped and convex to origin. The slope of isoquants shows the marginal rate of technical substitution which diminishes. Thus, MRTSxy

Iso-cost line shows the various combination of two factor inputs which the firm can purchase with a given outlay and at given prices of inputs. There can be different outlays and hence different iso-cost lines. Slope of iso-cost line shows the ratio of the price of two inputs i.e. \(\frac{P_{x}}{P_{y}}\)
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 9
Which will be the least cost combination can be understood with the help of following figure. Suppose firm wants to produce 300 units of a commodity. It will first see the isoquant that represents 300 units.

In the adjoining diagram we find that all combinations a, b, c, d and e can produce 300 units of output. In order to produce 300 units firm with try to find out least cost combination. For this it will super impose the various iso-cost lines on isoquant as shown in the diagram.

The diagram shows that combination ‘C’ is,the least cost combination as here isoquant is tangent to iso-cost line HI. All other combinations a, b, d and e lying on isoquant cost more as these points lie on higher iso-cost lines. Hence, the point of tangency of isoquant and iso-cost line shows least cost combination. At the point of tangency.

Slope of iso-quant = Slope of iso-cost line
∴ MRTSxy = \(\frac{P_{x}}{P_{y}}\)
Thus, the firm will choose OM units of factor X and ON units of factor Y and be at equilibrium as the marginal physical products of two factors are proportional to the factor prices.

Internal Economies and Diseconomies:
→ Internal economies are those benefits which accrue to a firm when it expands the scale of production.

→ Internal economies are the result of the firm’s own efforts independent of the actions of other firms.

→ These economies are particular to the individual firms and are different for different firms depending upon the size of the firm.
The main types of internal economies are as follows –
1. Technical Economies:

  • The large scale production is associated with technical economies.
  • As the firm increases its scale of production, it becomes possible to use better plant, machinery, equipment and techniques of production.
  • Following are the main forms (causes/reasons) of technical economies

Economies of superior techniques:

  • A large sized firm can use sophisticated and costly machines and equipments.
  • Use of superior techniques reduces the cost of production per unit and increases aggregate output.

Economies of increased dimensions:

  • A large firm can get the mechanical advantage in using large machines and other mechanical units to produce more output.
  • Example – A Large boiler, large furnace, etc. can be operated by same team as required by smaller boiler, furnace, etc.

Economies of linked processes:
A large sized firm can develop its own sources of raw material, means of transportation, distribution system, etc.

Economies of the use of By-products:

  • A large sized firm can avoid all kinds of wastage of materials. The firm can use its by- products and waste material to produce another material.
  • Example – Sugar industry can make alcohol out of the molasses.

Economies of specialization:
A large sized firm can introduce greater degree of division of labour and specialisation.

2. Managerial Economies:

  • Large sized firms can introduce division of labour in managerial tasks.
  • They can employ business executive of high skill and qualification to look after the functioning of various departments like production, finance, sales, advertising, personnel, etc.
  • This helps to increase the efficiency and productivity of managers resulting in reduction in managerial costs.

3. Commercial Economies:

  • A large sized firm is able to reap economies of bulk purchases.
  • It can get discounts from suppliers, railways, transport companies, etc.
  • It enjoys prompt and regular supply of raw materials.
  • A large sized firm can also afford to spend large amount of money on advertising, publicity, etc.
  • It can also give various concessions to wholesale and retail dealers and customers and thus capture markets for its product.

4. Financial Economies:

  • A big firm enjoys goodwill among lenders or investors.
  • For raising finance it can either borrow from bank as it can offer better security or it can raise finance by issuing shares, debentures and by inviting public deposits. Such opportunities are not available to small firms.

5. Risk Bearing Economies :

  • A large firm is better placed to face the uncertainties and risks of business.
  • A big firm producing many variety of goods is in a better position to withstand economic ups and downs. Therefore, it enjoys economies of risk bearing.

→ Internal diseconomies means all those factors which raise the cost of production per unit of a particular firm when the scale of production is expanded beyond the point of optimal capacity.

→ Such diseconomies of scale are as follows:
1. Production Diseconomies :

  • Production diseconomies sets in when expansion of firm’s production beyond optimum size leads to rise in the cost per unit of output.
  • Example – Use of inferior or less efficient factors due to non-availability of efficient factors raises the per unit cost of output.

2. Managerial Diseconomies:

  • As the scale of production increases burden on management also increases.
  • Co-ordination of work among different departments becomes difficult. Supervision and control over the activities of subordinates becomes difficult, decision taking is delayed, etc.
  • As a result, wastage increase and the efficiency and productivity decrease.
  • Per unit cost starts rising.

3. Technical Diseconomies :

  • Every equipment has an optimum point at which it works more efficiently and economically.
  • Beyond optimum point they are overworked and may result in breakdowns, heavy cost of maintenance, etc.

4. Financial Diseconomies:

  • Expansion of production beyond the optimum scale results in increase in the cost of capital.
  • It may be due to increased dependence on external finances.

5. Marketing Diseconomies:

  • Selling diseconomies set in if the scale of production is expanded beyond optimum level.
  • The advertisement expenditure and marketing overheads increase more proportionately with the scale.

Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3

External Economies and Diseconomies:
→ External economies are those benefits which accrue to all the firms operating in a given industry from the growth and expansion of that industry.

→ External economies are not related to an individual firm’s own cost reduction efforts.

→ These are common to all the firms in an industry and shared by many firms or industries.

→ The main types of external economies are as follows –
1. Technological Economies:

  • When the whole industry expands, it may result in the discovery of new technical knowledge, firms pool manpower and finance for research and development resulting in new and improved methods of production and new inventions.
  • Use of improved and better machinery improves production function and cost of production per unit falls.

2. Economies of Localization :

  • When in an area, many firms producing the same commodity are set up, it is called localization of an industry.
  • Due to localization there is expansion of railways, post & telegraph, banking services, insurance, setting up of booking offices by transport, companies, setting up of powerful transformer by electricity department, etc.
  • All the firms get these facilities at low prices.

3. Economies of Information :

  • As pointed earlier, firms pool their resources for research and development.
  • All firms get the benefit of the research in terms of market information, technical information, information about governments economic policies, information about availability of new source of raw material, etc.
  • Also, specialized journals give information about latest developments.

4. Cheaper Inputs:

  • When an industry expands its needs for raw materials, machines, etc. also expand.
  • This may result in exploration of new and cheaper sources of raw materials, machinery, etc.
  • Also, the industries producing such inputs also expand in scale.
  • Therefore, they can supply these inputs at lower prices.
  • As a result the cost of production per unit of the firm using these inputs falls.

5. Growth of Ancillary Industries :

  • With the growth of an industry, many firms specialized in the production of inputs like raw material, tools, machinery, etc. come up.
  • Such firms are called ancillary units which provides inputs at lower cost to the main industry.
  • Likewise, some firms may get developed by processing the waste products of the industry.
  • Thus, wastes are converted into by-products. This reduces the cost of production in general.

6. Development of Skilled Labour:

  • When an industry expands specialized institutions like colleges, training centers, management institutes, etc. develop.
  • This results in continuous availability of skilled labour like technicians, engineers, management experts, etc.

7. Better transportation & Marketing Facilities :

  • When an industry expands many specialized transporters also develop.
  • The firm in need of specialized transport service can get them easily at cheaper rates.
  • Also many new marketing outlets and specialized marketing institutions develop. The firm need not spend on developing its own marketing outlets.
  • This reduces the cost.

→ The growth and expansion of an industry in a particular area beyond optimum level results in many disadvantages for firms in the industry.

→ Such disadvantages increases the costs of production of each firm.

→ Therefore, they are called external diseconomies. Some of the external diseconomies are as follows:
1. Diseconomies of Scarcity of Inputs :

  • When an industry expands its need for raw materials, machines, tools and equipments, etc. also expands.
    Some inputs are such which cannot be totally substituted.
  • The firms supplying these inputs come under pressure and may supply inputs at a higher price.
  • This raises the cost of production per unit of the firm who uses these inputs.

2. Diseconomies of Strains on Infrastructure :

  • Due to concentration of firms in an area infrastructural facilities become inadequate over a time.
  • Example – Excessive pressure on transport system results in delayed transportation of raw materials and finished goods.
  • Other facilities like electric power supply, communication system, water supply, etc. are also over taxed.
    This puts strain on infrastructural facilities resulting in increased cost of production.

3. Diseconomies of High Factor Prices :

  • With the concentration of an industry in a particular area, the demand for factors of production rises.
  • Thus, the prices of the factors of production go up resulting in increased cost of production.

4. Diseconomies of Expenditure on Advertising:

  • Expansion of an industry also means increase in the number of firms.
  • This means increase in competition among the firms.
  • This forces a firm to spend more and more on advertising.
  • This raises per unit cost.

Internal and External Eonomies:
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 10

Theory of Cost:

  • In the production analysis we had considered quantitative relationship between inputs and outputs.
  • In the cost analysis we are concerned with financial side of production i.e. the cost behaviour in relation to size of output, scale of operations, prices of factors of production, etc.
  • Therefore, a businessman must have a clear understanding of various concepts of costs.

Cost Concepts:
→ Accounting Costs and Economic Costs.
1. Accounting costs are those cash payments which firms make to outsiders for purchasing or hiring the services of various productive factors which do not belong to the entrepreneur.

2. The accounting costs are in the nature of contractual payments to the factor suppliers.
Example – Contractual payments like wages, rent on hired land, interest on borrowed capital, cost of power and fuel, purchase of raw-materials, insurance premium, transportation, advertising, taxes, etc.

3. These costs are recorded in firm’s account book.

4. All these money expenses are also known as Explicit Costs or accounting costs as they form part of the cost of production and accounted by the firm.

5. Economists take a broader view of the cost concept. Economist’s cost refer to what may be called Full costs or economic costs.

6. Economic Costs = Explicit costs (or accounting costs) + Implicit costs (or imputed costs)

7. Thus, economic cost is the sum total of accounting costs (also called explicit costs) and implicit cost (also called imputed costs or opportunity cost)

8. Implicit costs are costs of self owned and self supplied resources by an entrepreneur which are generally not recorded in the firm’s account book. There is no contractual obligation for payment to any body else.
Example – An entrepreneur may utilise his own building or his own capital or may act as a manager of his firm himself.

9. For these productive services, he does not pay rent or interest or salary to himself although the payments accrue to him.

10. These are implicit or imputed (estimated) costs of various factors owned and supplied by the owner himself.

11. When an entrepreneur invests capital in his business, devotes his time and skills in his business, he has to forego the opportunity of investing his, capital, time and skills elsewhere.

12. Implicit costs involves the sacrifice of alternatives that have been foregone in the production of a commodity.

13. Hence, implicit costs are also called “opportunity cost” and forms part of the economic costs.

14. A firm earns economic profits or normal profit when it recovers both explicit costs as well as implicit costs.

15. Thus, normal profit is a part of implicit cost. Profit earned over and above normal profit is called super normal profit.

Outlay Cost and Opportunity Cost:
1. Outlay costs involve actual outlay of funds on wages, material, rent, interest etc. Outlay costs involve financial expenditure at some time and thus are recorded in the books of account.

2. Our wants are unlimited and resources are scarce but have alternative uses. Hence, the prob¬lem of choice among the alternative uses of a given resource for particular purpose arises.

3. This is because, the use of a resource in producing a commodity always involves the loss of opportunity of production of some other commodity.

4. The sacrifice or loss of alternative use of a given resource is termed as “ opportunity cost.”

5. Thus, the opportunity cost is measured in terms of the foregone benefits from the next best alternative use of a given resource.
Example – The opportunity cost of producing a car is production of 10 scooters sacrificed, which could have been produced with the same amount of factors that make a car.

6. Hence, opportunity costs relate to sacrificed alternatives. They are Not recorded in the books of account.

7. The concept of opportunity cost is useful in the determination of relative prices of goods, normal remuneration to a factor, in decision making and in analysing optimum allocation of resources.

Direct (or Traceable) Costs and Indirect (or Non-Traceable) Costs:
1. A direct or traceable cost is one which can be identified easily and indisputably with a unit of operation,
→ Example  – a product, a department, a plant or a process.
→ Example – In the production of shoes, the cost of leather is a direct cost.

2. Indirect Costs or Non-Traceable Costs or Common Costs are those costs that are not traceable to plant, department and operation as well as those that are not traceable to individual final products but are charged to jobs or products in standard accounting practice.

3. Such costs although not directly traceable to the product may bear some functional relationship to production and may vary with output in some definite way.
Example – Electric Power. Such common costs which are incurred for general operation of business and benefits all products jointly are called indirect cost.

Incremental costs and Sunk Costs:
1. Incremental costs are related to the concept of marginal cost. While marginal cost refer to additional cost of producing an extra unit of output, incremental cost refers to the total additional cost when business decisions are taken like-to expand the production, hire more workers, materials, machinery, equipment, replace old plant and machinery, etc.

2. Sunk costs refer to the costs which has been already incurred in the past and cannot be recovered. It also includes an expenditure that has to be made in future under past commitments or contractual agreements. Sunk costs are irrelevant for decision making as it cannot be recovered. Sunk costs do not vary with the changes in business activity. Such costs also act as an important barrier to entry of firms into business. Example – expenses on advertising, R & D, special equipments, etc.

Historical costs and Replacement costs:

  • Historical costs are those costs on purchase of assets in the past.
  • Replacement costs refer to the expenditure to be made for replacing old assets.
  • Instability in asset prices make the two costs differ.

Private costs and Social costs:
1. Private costs are those costs which are incurred or provided for by firms. These may be either explicit or implicit since they form part of total cost of production, it implies they figure in business decisions. Therefore, private costs are internalized cost.

2. Social costs refer to the total cost to the society due to business activity. Social costs include both private cost and the external cost. It includes resources for which the firm is not required to pay the price like – atmosphere, rivers, lakes, roads, etc. and the cost in terms of disutility created like pollution of all types.

Cost Function:
→ Cost function is the functional relation between Costs and Output.

→ The Production function of a firm and the Prices it pays for the inputs determine the firm’s cost function.

→ Thus, cost function refers to the relation between Cost of a product and the various Determinants of its cost.

→ It can also be expressed in the form of a mathematical equation in which unit cost or total cost is the dependent variable and the prices of various inputs are independent variables.
C = f (0,S,T,U,P ….. )
Where
C is cost
O is the level of output
S is the size of plant
T is time under consideration
P is the prices of factors of production.

→ Production function determines the cost function.

→ Therefore, the behaviour of cost of production and the shapes of the cost curves depend upon the laws of returns.

→ The Law of returns to factor determine the shapes of short – period cost curves while the Law of returns to scale determine the shapes of long – period cost curves.

Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3

Short Run Total Costs:
Total Cost (in short run) = Total Fixed Cost + Total Variable Cost

Points Fixed Cost Variable Cost
1. Meaning 1. Fixed costs are incurred on the use of the fixed inputs.
2. Fixed inputs cannot be varied in the short run.
3. Therefore, fixed costs do not change with changes in output in short run.
4. Fixed costs are thus, Independent of output.
5. These include both Explicit Costs and Implicit Costs.
1. Variable costs are incurred on the use of the variable inputs.
2. Variable inputs can be varied in the short run.
3. Therefore, variable costs changes with the changes in output i.e. they increase or decrease when output rises or falls.
4. Variable costs thus, DEPEND on output.
2. Can Be Zero Or Not? 1. Fixed cost can never be zero.
2. If the level of output falls to ZERO, fixed costs are to be incurred in the short run.
3. In other words, if firm closes down for some time in short run but remains in business, these costs have to be borne by it
1. Variable cost can become zero.
2. If the level of output falls to zero, variable costs also falls to zero.
3. In other words, if a firm shuts down for some time in short run, it will not incur any variable cost as it will not use variable factors of production.
3. Examples Example – Contractual rent, maintenance cost, property taxes, interest on capital invested, wages of permanent staff, depreciation, etc. Example – wages of labour employed, prices of raw materials, power and fuel, expenses on transport, etc.
4. Determinant Factors The examples of fixed cost above have no bearing on the volume of production. 1. The examples of variable cost above are closely related to the volume of production.

2. Hence variable costs are the determinant factor.

5. Relation With Output Fixed cost have no relation with output in short run because these costs remain constant whatever be the level of output. 1. Variable costs are positively related with output.
2. If output is zero, variable cost is also zero.
3. If output is increased variable cost also rises FIRST at diminishing rate due to increasing return to factor AND THEN at an increasing rate due to diminishing returns to factor.
6. Function Of ? Fixed Costs are therefore function of TIME. Variable Costs are therefore function of Output.
7. Price Determination In short run, the firm do not bother about recovering the fixed costs as it has to bear these costs even at zero level of output. 1. In short run, the firm must recover the variable costs to remain in business.
2. In other words firm’s Average Revenue ≥ Average Variable cost
8. Other Names 1. Fixed costs are also known as Over Head Costs as these costs are common to all the units of commodity produced.
2. They are also known as Supple Mentary Costs because the volume of output produced does not directly depend upon them.
Variable costs are also known as Prime or Direct Costs as all the units produced depend directly on them.

Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 11

Semi Variable Cost:
Stair-step Variable Cost – Short run average cost:
→ For the purpose of making decisions about operations, unit cost functions or average costs are more useful than the total cost functions.

→ We examine here three of these unit cost functions namely –

  • Average Fixed Cost (AFC),
  • Average Variable Cost (AVC),
  • Average Total Cost (ATC).

1. Average Fixed Cost:
→ Average Fixed Cost is the fixed cost per unit of output. Thus,
→ Average Fixed Cost = \(\frac { Total Fixed Cost }{ Total Output }\)
→ OR AFC = \(\frac { TFC }{ Q }\)
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 12
→ The above table shows that as the output increases, AFC goes on falling.

→ The reason being TFC is spread over larger quantities of output.

→ When graphed, the AFC curve slopes downwards from left to right throughout its length.

→ The AFC curve comes closer and closer to the X – axis but not touch the X-axis as TFC can never be zero.

→ AFC curve will not touch Y-axis also because at zero level of output, TFC is a Positive value. Any positive value divided by zero will provide infinite value.

→ The AFC curve is a Rectangular hyperbola because mathematically it shows the same level of TFC at all its points and geometrically the area of every rectangle on this curve at all points will be equal to the area of every other rectangle.

2. Average Variable Cost:
→ Average variable Cost is the variable cost per unit of output. Thus,
→ Average variable Cost = \(\frac { Total Variable Cost }{ Total Output }\)
→ OR AVC = \(\frac { TVC }{ Q }\)
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 13
→ The above table shows that as the output expands, average variable cost falls initially due to increasing returns to the variable factor.

→ It is minimum at the optimum capacity output.

→ Beyond optimum capacity average variable cost rises very sharply due to diminishing returns to variable factor.

→ Thus, AVC and Average product of variable factor are inversely related.

→ When graphed, AVC curve declines over some range of output, reaches the minimum at optimum capacity, as at point ‘M’ in the above diagram and then goes on rising as output increases.

→ Thus, AVC curve is U-shaped indicating three phases decreasing phase, constant phase and increasing phase corresponding to the three phases of Average product of variable factor in the law of Variable Proportions.

3. Average Total Cost: {Or Simply Average Cost): .
→ Average Total Cost is the cost per unit of output. Thus,
→ Average Total Cost or Average Cost = \(\frac { Total Cost }{ Total Output }\)
→ ATC or AC = \(\frac { TC }{ Q }\)
→ ATC or AC = \(\frac { TFC }{ Q }\) + \(\frac { TVC }{ Q }\)
→ A TC or AC = AFC + AVC
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 14
→ The above table shows that as output increases, ATC falls initially, reach its minimum and then rises due to the Law of variable proportions.

→ Since, ATC = AFC + AVC, it follows that the behaviour and shape of the ATC curve depends upon the behaviour of AVC curve and AFC curve.

→ In the beginning, the ATC curve falls sharply when output expands. REASON being, initially both AVC and AFC curves fall.

→ When AVC curve starts rising, but AFC curve continue to fall steeply, the ATC will continue to fall. REASON being, fall in AFC curve is MORE than the RISE in AVC curve.

→ As output further increases, ATC curve rises. REASON being, there is sharp rise in AVC which offsets the, fall in AFC. Thus, ATC curve first fall, reach its minimum and then rise.

→ Therefore, ATC curve is ‘U’- shaped for the same reasons for which the AVC is a ‘U’ – shaped curve.

4. Marginal Cost.
→ Marginal Cost is addition to the total cost caused by producing one more unit of output.

→ Thus, marginal cost is the cost of the additional unit of output.

→ It is measured by the change in total cost resulting from a unit increase in output. Thus,
MCn = TCn – TCn-1 Or MC = \(\frac { ∆ TC }{ ∆Q }\) where, ∆ = change

→ Example – If 5 units are produced, total cost = ₹ 206
If 6 units are produced, total cost = ₹ 236
Marginal Cost of 6th unit of output = ₹ 30

→ The Marginal Cost is Independent of Fixed Cost.

→ In the short period, total fixed cost are constant for all levels of output.

→ The only change in total cost when output changes is Change in Variable Cost. Hence, marginal cost is affected only by the variable cost.

→ Therefore, marginal cost can also be defined as a change in TVC as a result of a unit change in output. This can be proved as follows –
MCn = TCn – TCn-1
since, TC = TFC + TVC
MCn = (TVCn + TFC n) – (TVC n-1 + TFC n-1 )
= TVCn + TFCn – TVC n-1 – TFC n-1.
= TVCn – TVCn-1
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 15

→ The above table shows that as the output increases, MC initially falls due to increasing returns to factor but finally MC rises due to diminishihg returns to factor.

→ Thus, marginal cost is the inverse of the marginal product of the variable factor.

→ When graphed, the MC curve first declines, reaches minimum and then goes on rising as output increases.

→ Thus, MC curve is U – shaped, this is due to the operation of the law of returns to factor and due to TC or TVC (AC or AVC).

→ MC curve passes through the minimum points of AVC and ATC curves

→ MC curve reaches its minimum point earlier to the minimum points of AVC and ATC curves.
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 16

Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3

Relationship between Average Cost and Marginal Cost:
→ Average Total Cost or Average Cost is the Cost per unit of output. Thus,
Average Total Cost = \(\frac { Total Cost }{ Total Output }\)
or AC = \(\frac { TC }{ Q }\)

Example – Suppose the total cost of producing 5 units of a commodity is ₹ 230, then average cost will be \(\frac { ₹ 230 }{ 5 units }\) = ₹ 46

→ Marginal Cost is addition to the total cost caused by producing one more unit of output. Thus, marginal cost is the cost of the additional unit of output. Symbolically, .
MCn = TCn – TCn-1
Example – The total cost of producing 5 units is ₹ 206 and that of 6 units is ₹ 236. Then, marginal Cost of producing one more unit = ₹ 236 – ₹ 206 = ₹ 30.

→ The relationship between Average Total Cost and Marginal Cost can be illustrated with the help of following table and graph.
Table : Relationship between Average Cost and Marginal Cost
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 17

→ Both the table and diagram above bring out the relationship between average cost and mar-ginal cost clearly as follows:
1. Both AC and MC are derived from total cost of production. They are derived from the same source
Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 18

2.

  • When average cost falls with increase in output, marginal cost also falls and is less than average cost.
  • It means that marginal cost falls faster.
  • Thus, when AC curve is falling, MC curve will be below AC curve.
  • MC curve reaches minimum point ‘C’ earlier then AC curve.
  • Then, MC curve start rising from point ‘C’ to point ‘P’ even when the AC curve is falling

3.

  • The MC curve cuts the AC curve at its minimum point. ‘P’ in the diagram.
  • It is the minimum point on AC curve i.e. point of optimum capacity where the average cost is minimum.
  • Points ‘A’ and ‘B’ on the AC curve shows higher average cost due to under and over utilization of plant capacity at respective points..
  • At point ‘P’ where the MC curve cuts the AC curve i.e. at point of optimum capacity, MC = AC.

4.

  • When AC rises, with increase in output, MC also rises and is higher than AC. It means that MC rises faster.
  • Thus, when AC curve is rising, MC curve will be above the AC curve.

5. At zero level of output, MC is indeterminate.

6. Between AC and MC, it is MC which brings about changes (i.e. rise or fall) in AC and not other way round.
Thus –

  • When MC < AC, it pulls down AC and AC falls
  • When MC = AC, AC is constant and at its minimum
  • When MC > AC, it pulls up AC and AC rises.

7. The concept of MC is more significant in finding out equilibrium output while that of AC in finding profit and loss.

Long Run Average Cost Curve :

  • Long run is a period of time during which the firm can vary all inputs.
  • In short run we have seen that, some inputs are fixed and others can be varied to increase the level of output.
  • But in long run all inputs are variable.
  • In the short run, the size of the plant is fixed. The size of plant cannot be increased or reduced.
  • However, in the long run the firm has sufficient time to bring about changes in the size of plant (i.e. machinery building etc.) in order to expand or contract output.
  • Thus, in the long run the firm moves from one plant to another. It can increase the size of plant to increase its output or can have smaller plant if it has to reduce output.
  • The long run average cost curve shows the minimum possible average cost for producing various levels of output.
  • Consider the following figure –
    Theory of Production and Cost – CA Foundation Economics Notes Chapter 3 19
  • In the fig., a smooth long run average cost curve has been shown which has been labelled as LAC.
  • The LAC curve envelopes infinite short run average cost curves each representing a plant. Hence, SACs are also called plant curves.
  • In the fig., the LAC curve is derived as a tangent to all the short run average cost curve from SAC1 to SAC7.
  • Thus, it is U- shaped.
  • In the long run, a firm can produce a particular output by building a relevant size of plant and operate on the corresponding SAC.
  • It selects that size of plant i.e. SAC which gives the lowest cost of producing the given output.
  • In the fig., seven short run average cost curves SAC1, to SAC7 corresponding to seven different plants are drawn.
  • In the fig., if the firm wants to produce OA level of output, it will operate on SAC1 at a cost of AG per unit.
  • If the firm produce OA level of output with SAC2 it will cost AK per unit to produce which is more.
  • Similarly, if the firm wants to produce OB level of output with SAC1 it will cost more i.e. BL per unit.
  • So the firm to produce OB output will have to increase the size of plant and operate with SAC2 where the cost per unit is less i.e. BH per unit.
  • Thus, larger outputs can be economically produced i.e. at lowest cost with the bigger plants and small output can be economically produced i.e. at lowest cost with smaller plants.
  • In the fig., OQ is the optimum output as it is being produced at the minimum point of LAC and corresponding SAC i.e. SAC4. Thus, the long run average cost is minimum at output OQ.
  • If the firm is producing less than optimum output OQ, the other plants are underutilized than their full capacity.
  • If the firm is producing more than optimum output OQ, the other plants are overutilized than their full capacity.
  • The fig., shows that LAC curve is not tangent to the minimum points of the SAC curves.
    → When LAC curve is sloping downwards, it is tangent to falling portions of SACs.
    → When LAC curve is rising upwards, it is tangent to rising portions of SACs.
  • LAC curve is also called planning curve. Thus is because firm plans output in the long run but operates in the short run i.e. by choosing a plant on LAC corresponding to the given output.
  • Thus, LAC helps the firm to make choice about the size of plant for producing a particular output at minimum cost.
  • However, modern firms face ‘L’ shaped cost curve.

Why Long Run Average Cost Curve is of U-shape?

  • As seen in the fig., LAC curve is U-shaped.
  • The shape of LAC curve depends on the Law of Returns to Scale.
  • As the firm expands, there is increasing returns to scale which means fall in long run average cost due to economies of scale.
  • When decreasing returns to scale occur it means rise in long run average cost due to diseconomies of scale.
  • This explains why LAC curve is U-shaped.
Relations of Partners – CA Foundation Law Study Material

Relations of Partners – CA Foundation Law Study Material

This Relations of Partners – CA Foundation Law Study Material is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Relations of Partners – CA Foundation Business Law Study Material

Question 1.
Explain the rights of a partner, under the Indian Partnership Act, 1932.
Answer:
Rights of partners
Subject to contract between the partners, the Partnership Act confers the following rights upon the partners of a firm:

1. Right to take part in the conduct of the business [Sec.l2(a)]
Every partner has a right to take part in the conduct of the business of the firm. The partners among themselves may agree to entrust the work of management to one or more of them.

2. Right to be consulted[Sec.l2(c)]
Every partner has a right to be consulted and heard before any matter is decided. Ordinary matters may be decided by majority opinion but matters of fundamental nature would require unanimity.
The matters which are to be decided by unanimous consent of all the partners are discussed below :

  • Nature of business [Sec. 12]
  • Admission of a partner [Sec. 31(1)].
  • Transfer by a partner of his interest in the firm [Sec. 29],
  • Admission of a minor to the benefits of partnership [Sec. 30(1)].

3. Right to access to books [Sec. 12(d)]
Every partner has a right to have access, to inspect and copy any of the records and books of the firm.

4. Right to share the profits [Sec. 13(b)]
Every partner has the right to share equally in the profits earned and to contribute equally to the losses sustained by the firm. This provision is irrespective of the amount of capital contribution made or business expertise offered. However, they may agree to share the profits in some other ratio.

5. Right to interest on Capital [Sec. 13(c)]
Every partner has the right to interest on capital, if so agreed, out of profits only.

6. Right to interest on advances [Sec. 13(d)]
A Partner is entitled to receive interest at 6% p.a. on any advance, in excess of the agreed amount of capital, made for the purposes of the business.

7. Right to indemnity [Sec. 13(e)]
Every partner has a right to claim indemnity from the firm in respect of payments made or liabilities incurred by him (a) in the ordinary and proper conduct of the business, and (h) in doing such act, in an emer¬gency, for the purpose of protecting the firm from loss, as would be done by a person of ordinary prudence, in his own case, under similar circumstances.

8. Right to prevent the introduction of a new partner [Sec. 31(1)]
Every partner is entitled to prevent the admission of a new partner into the firm.

9. Right to retire [Sec. 32(1)]
A partner to retire from the firm (a) with the consent of all other part¬ners, or (b) in accordance with the terms of the deed, or (c) by giving a notice to all other partners, of his intention to retire.

10. Right not to be expelled [Sec. 33]
Every partner has the right to continue in the partnership and not to be expelled from the firm.

11. Right to carry on competing for business after retirement [Sec. 36(1)]
Every outgoing partner has a right to carry on a competitive business under certain conditions.

12. Right to dissolve the firm (Sec. 43)
Where the partnership is at will, the firm may dissolve by any partner giving notice in writing to all the other partners of his intention to dis¬solve the firm.

Relations of Partners – CA Foundation Law Study Material

Question 2.
What are the duties conferred on the partners under the Indian Partnership Act, 1932?
Answer:
1. General Duties of Partners:
Section 9 of the Partnership Act lays down that all the partners are bound:

  • to carry on the business of the firm to the greatest common ad¬vantage,
  • to be just and faithful to each other, and
  • to render to any partner or his legal representative the true ac¬counts and
  • to render full information of all things affecting the firm.

2. Duty to indemnify for loss caused by fraud:
According to Section 10 of the Partnership Act, every partner shall indemnify (reimburse or pay back) the firm for any loss caused to it by his fraud in the conduct of the business of the firm.

3. Duty to attend diligently to his duties [Sec. 12(b)]:
Every partner is bound to attend diligently to his duties in the conduct of the business.

4. Duty to work without remuneration [Sec. 13(a)]:
A partner is normally not entitled to receive any remuneration for taking part in the business of the firm. However if the partnership agreement provides or business custom allows, a partner can be given remuneration.

5. Duty to contribute to the losses [Sec. 13(b)]:
The partners shall contribute equally to the losses sustained by the firm without regard to the capital contribution made by the firm.

6. Duty to indemnify for wilful neglect [Sec. 13(/)]:
A partner shall indemnify the firm for any loss caused to it by his willful neglect in the conduct of the business of the firm.

7. Duty to use firm’s property exclusively for the firm (Sec. 15):
Subject to contract between the partners, the property of the firm shall be held exclusively for the purposes of the business of the firm.

8. Duty to account for personal profits derived [Sec. 16(a)]:
If a partner derives any profit for himself from any transaction of the firm, or from the use of the property or business connection of the firm in the firm’s name, he shall account for that profit and pay it to the firm.

9. Duty not to compete with the business of the firm [Sec. 16(b)]:
No partner can carry on a business that is competing with that of the firm without the consent of the other partners, otherwise, the partner carrying on such a business will have to account for and pay to the firm all profits made by him in that business.

10. Not to assign (transfer) his interest in the firm (Sec. 29):
It is the duty of a partner not to assign his interest in the firm to a stranger (outsider) without the consent of all other partners.

Relations of Partners – CA Foundation Law Study Material

Question 3.
What is meant by “implied authority”? What are the statutory restrictions on implied authority as stipulated in the Indian Partnership Act, 1932?
OR
In the absence of any usage or custom of trade to the contrary, the implied authority of a partner does not empower him to do certain acts. State the acts which are beyond the implied authority of a partner under the provisions of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932
Answer:
Meaning of implied authority
Meaning of Implied Authority. The authority of a partner means the capacity of a partner to bind the firm by his act. This authority may be express or implied. Where the authority to a partner to act is expressly conferred by an agreement it is called express authority. It is implied when the law presumes certain powers exercisable by every partner unless negatived by a contract to the contrary.
According to Sec. 19(1) of the Act, “the act of a partner which is done to carry on, in the usual way business of the kind carried on by the firm “is called Implied Authority of partner. It is subject to the following 3 conditions:

(1) The act done by the partner must relate to the normal business of the firm and must be within the scope of the business of the firm. For example, if the partner of a firm dealing in electronic goods, purchases some wine in the name of the firm, the firm would not be liable.

(2) The act must be done in the usual way i.e., in the normal course. What is the usual way of carrying on the business, will depend on the nature of the business, customs and usages in that kind of business, and circumstances of each particular case.

(3) The act must be done in the name of the firm, or in any other manner expressing or implying an intention to bind the firm, by the partner in the capacity of a partner.
Limitation on Implied authority or Statutory Restrictions on Implied Authority [Sec. 19(2)]
Sec. 19(2) contains the list of acts regarding which a partner does not have an implied authority unless there is usage or custom or contract to the contrary. Accordingly, a partner cannot:

  • submit a dispute relating to the business of the firm to arbitration;
  • open a banking account on behalf of the firm in his own name;
  • compromise or relinquish any claim or portion of a claim by the firm;
  • withdraw a suit or proceeding filed on behalf of the firm;
  • admit any liability in a suit or proceeding against the firm;
  • acquire immovable property on behalf of the firm;
  • transfer immovable property belonging to the firm; or
  • enter into partnership on behalf of the firm.

Question 4.
What is the position of a minor as a partner in the firm, under the provisions of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932?
Answer:
According to Sec. 11 of the Indian Contract Act, an agreement by or with a minor is void. As such, he is incapable of entering into a contract of partnership. But with the consent of all the partners, for the time being, a minor may be admitted to the benefits of the partnership.
The position of a minor partner may be studied, under two heads:
1. Position before attaining majority
(1) Rights:

  • He has a right to such share of the property and of profits of the firm as may have been agreed upon.
  • He has also a right to have access to and inspect and copy any of the accounts, but not books of the firm. [Sec. 30(2)]
  • When he is not given his due share of profit, he has a right to hie a suit for his share of the property of the firm. But he can do so only if he wants to sever his connection with the firm. [Sec. 30(4)].

(2) Liabilities: The liability of the minor partner is confined only to the extent of his share in the profits and property of the firm. Over and above this, he is neither personally liable nor is his private estate liable.

2. Position on attaining majority
On attaining majority, a minor who has been admitted to the benefits of the partnership must give public notice of his intention to become or not to become a partner in the firm. The public notice must be given by him in this instance within 6 months of his attainment of the majority or acquiring knowledge that he had been admitted to the benefits of partnership, whichever date is later.
If he fails to give a public notice he is deemed to have become a partner in the firm on the expiry of the said six months [Sec. 30(5)]

(1) Where he elects to become a partner:

  • He becomes personally liable to third parties for all acts of the firm done since he was admitted to the benefits of partnership;
  • His share in the property and profits of the firm is the share to which he was entitled as a minor partner [Sec. 30(7)];
  • He is entitled to all rights & is bound by all the duties of a partner.

(2) Where he elects not to become a partner:

  • His rights & liabilities continue to be those of a minor up to the date of the public notice;
  • His share is not liable for any acts of the firm done after the date of the public notice;
  • He is entitled to sue the partners for his share of the property and profits in the firm.

Relations of Partners – CA Foundation Law Study Material

Question 5.
Discuss the rights and liabilities of an outgoing partner under the Indian Partnership Act, 1932.
Answer:
Rights and liabilities of an outgoing partner
The following are the rights & liabilities of an outgoing partner :

(I) Rights of an outgoing partner
An outgoing partner possesses the following rights:
(a) Right to carry on competing for business
An outgoing partner has the right to carry on the business competing with that of the firm, and he may advertise such business (Sec. 3 6). But section 3 6 imposes some, restrictions on his activities in order to prevent unfair competition with the firm. The restrictions imposed upon outgoing partners are:

(a) he may not use the firm’s name,
(b) he may not represent himself as carrying on the business on behalf of the firm, or
(c) he may not solicit the customers or the persons who were already dealing with the firm before he left the firm. The above restrictions are subject to a contract to the contrary.

However, the firm may enter into an agreement with the retiring partner not to carry on competing business, then he will not be entitled to carry competitive business & such an agreement will not be treated to be in restraint of trade provided reasonable restrictions have been imposed on the outgoing partner & the restriction intend to safeguard the interest of the firm.

(b) Right to share subsequent profit in certain cases
As per section 37, in case the accounts of the outgoing partners continue to remain unsettled and the remaining partners continue to run the business, such a partner is entitled to receive his share of profit or interest at the rate of 6% p.a. on the amount of his share in the firm. Alternatively, he may claim such share in the subsequent profits of the firm as is attributable to his share in the capital employed in the business of the firm [on account of non-settlement of accounts.]

(II) Liabilities of an outgoing partner
These may be classified into two stages.
(a) Liability for acts done before leaving the firm
A retiring partner is liable for the acts done and debts incurred before his retirement, but he may be exempted from this liability in case of an agreement made by him with the third party and the remaining partners of the reconstituted firm.

(b) Liability for acts done after leaving the firm
In the case of the retirement of a partner, a public notice is essential to this effect. If it is not given, the retiring partner will continue to be liable to third parties for the acts of the firm even after his retirement. Public notice is not essential in case of a sleeping or deceased partner who is not known to be a partner, and so as such will not be liable for future acts, of the firm.

Question 6.
What Is the liability of the firm, for misapplication by partners?
Answer:
Liability of firm for misapplication by Partners. (Sec. 27)
Where – (a) a partner acting within in his apparent authority receives money or property from a third party and misapplies it or
(b) a firm in the course of its business receives money or property from a third party, and the money or property is misapplied by any of the partners while it is in the custody of the firm, the firm is liable to make good the loss.

Relations of Partners – CA Foundation Law Study Material

Question 7.
State the modes by which a partner may transfer his interest in the firm in favor of another person under the Indian Partnership Act, 1932. What are the rights of such a transferee?
Answer:
According to the provisions of section 29 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, a share in the partnership is transferable like any other property. But since the partnership relationship is based on good faith and mutual confidence, the assignee of a partner’s interest by sale, mortgage or otherwise cannot enjoy the same rights & privileges as the original partner. Further, the transfer of an interest of a partner in the firm can be done only with the consent of all the other partners. The rights of such a transferee are as follows :

(a) During the continuance of partnership
During the continuance of partnership, such transferee is entitled to receive the share of the profits of the transferring partner. However, he is bound to accept the profits as agreed to by the partners ie. he cannot challenge the accounts.
A transferee of a Partner’s share is not entitled:

  • to interfere with the conduct of the business.
  • to require accounts or
  • to inspect books of the firm.
  • On the dissolution of the firm

On the dissolution of the firm or on the retirement of the transferring partner, the transferee will be entitled against the remaining partners:

  • to receive the share of the assets of the firm to which the transferring partner was entitled; and
  • for the purpose of ascertaining the share, to an account as from the date of the dissolution.

Question 8.
List the acts which are considered to fall within the scope of implied authority of a partner.
Answer:
The implied authority of a partner generally includes the following acts :

  1. To purchase goods for the purpose of the business of the firm on cash or credit
  2. To effect the sale of the goods of the firm on a cash or credit basis.
  3. To settle the accounts with debtors & creditors of the firm within the scope of his authority.
  4. To receive payments from the debtors of the firm, on behalf of the firm and issue receipts with respect to the same.
  5. To engage or hire employees or servants for the purpose of the conduct of the business of the firm.
  6. To hire the services of an attorney to maintain or defend a suit in relation to the business of the firm.
  7. To borrow money for the purpose of the business of the firm.
  8. To pledge the goods of the firm as a security for the borrowings on behalf of the firm & for the purpose of the business of the firm.
  9. To draw, accept, endorse or negotiate any P/N, B/E, or cheque in the name & on behalf of the firm.

Relations of Partners – CA Foundation Law Study Material

Question 9.
How can a partner be admitted into the firm? What are the rights and liabilities of a newly introduced partner?
Answer:
A partner can be admitted into a partnership firm only with the consent of all the partners. The share in the profits of the firm to which the incoming partner shall be entitled to, along with his rights and duties shall be fixed by way of mutual agreement at the time of his admission.

Rights of an incoming Partner:
Thus an incoming partner on his admission shall be entitled to the share in profits and property of the firm as fixed by way of mutual agreement at the time of his admission. Further, he shall be entitled to all such rights of a partner as conferred by the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, unless the same has been restricted by a contract to the contrary with the existing partners.

Liabilities of an incoming partner:
1. Generally an incoming partner is not liable for the acts of the firm, done prior to his admission.
2. However, in the following instances, the incoming partner shall be liable for the acts of the firm done before his admission:

  • If the incoming partner assumes liability for the past debt by novation that is by a tripartite agreement between the creditor; the existing partners & the incoming partner.
  • a minor who had been admitted to the benefits of the partnership shall be liable for all the acts of the firm done since he was admitted to the benefits if he decides to become a partner on attaining majority.

3. An incoming partner shall be liable for all the acts of the firm, done after his admission.

Question 10.
What are the legal consequences of the Insolvency of a Partner?
Answer:
The following are the legal consequences of the insolvency of a partner:

  1. A partner who is adjudicated as insolvent ceases to be a partner in the firm on the date on which the order of adjudication is made by the Court.
  2. Ordinarily but not invariably, the insolvency of a partner results in the dissolution of the firm from the date of the order of adjudication. Thus subject to a contract between the partners, the firm is dissolved on the date of adjudication.
  3. If a contract to the contrary exists and the firm continues to carry on business with the remaining partners after the insolvency of one, then the estate of the insolvent partner shall not be liable for any of the acts of the firm, done after the date of the order.
  4. The firm is also not liable for any of the acts of the insolvent partner done after the date of order of adjudication.
  5. In case the firm is not dissolved, the share of the insolvent partner, in the firm, shall vest in the Official Assignee or Receiver.
  6. Further, no public notice is required to be given on the insolvency of a partner.

Relations of Partners – CA Foundation Law Study Material

Question 11.
What are the legal consequences of the Death of a partner?
Answer:
The following are the legal consequences of Death of a Partner :
1. In the absence of a contract to the contrary, the death of partner results in the dissolution of the firm.
2. Where under a contract, a firm is not dissolved on the death of a partner, the estate of the deceased partner shall not be liable for the acts of the firm done after his death.
3. However, the estate of the deceased partner shall be liable for the acts of the firm done prior to his death except the following :

  • For the money borrowed by surviving partners so as to pay for the goods ordered during the lifetime of the deceased partner.
  • For the goods ordered during the lifetime of the deceased partner but delivered after his death.

4. Further no public notice is required on the death of a partner.

Question 12.
What is the provision related to the effect of notice to an acting partner of the firm as per the Indian Partnership Act, 1932?
Answer:
According to the provisions of Section 24 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, notice to an acting partner with respect to any matter relating to the affairs of the firm, operates as a notice to the firm, except in case of fraud committed by that partner or with the connivance/consent of that partner.
Thus the notice to an active partner serves as a notice to the rest of the partners just as a notice to the agent operates as a notice to the Principal. However, for the notice to be binding on all the other partners, it must be an actual notice (not constructive), received by an active partner (& not a dormant partner) & relate to the business of the firm.

Question 13.
Discuss the provision regarding personal profit earned by a partner under the Indian Partnership Act, 1932.
Answer:
According to the provisions of section 16 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, subject to a contract between the partners:

  • If a partner derives any profits for himself from any transaction of the firm or from the use of the property or business connection of the firm or from the name of the firm, he shall account for that profit and pay it to the firm.
  • If a partner carries on any business of the same nature as and competing with that of the firm, then he shall be liable to account for and pay to the firm all profits made by him in that business.

Relations of Partners – CA Foundation Law Study Material

Question 14.
X, Y and Z are partners in a partnership firm. They were carrying their business successfully for the past several years. Spouses of X and Y fought in lady’s clubs on their personal issues and X’s wife was hurt badly. X got angry about the incident and he convinced Z to expel Y from their partnership firm. Y was expelled from the partnership without any notice from X and Z. Considering the provisions of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, state whether they can expel a partner from the firm. What are the criteria for the test of good faith in such circumstances?
Answer:
Hint:- According to provisions of Section 33 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, a partner can be expelled from a firm on the fulfilment of the following conditions :
1. When the power of expulsion of a partner is expressly conferred on the partners in the deed of partnership.
2. The power of expulsion must be exercised by a majority of partners in the interest of the firm.
3. The power of expulsion must be exercised in good faith. Further, the power of expulsion is said to have been exercised in good faith only if

  • The expelled partner has been served with a notice of charges against him
  • The expelled partner has been given a reasonable opportunity of being heard by the other partners
  • The expulsion is in the interest of the firm.

In the given case it is evident that the expulsion of Y was not valid since it was not done in good faith.
Thus Y, the expelled partner shall have a right to sue the other partners for reinstatement in the firm.

Question 15.
A B and C are partners of a partnership firm ABC & Co. The firm is a dealer in office furniture. A was in charge of purchase and sale, B was in charge of maintenance of accounts of the firm and C was in charge of handling all legal matters. Recently through an agreement among them, it was decided that A will be in charge of maintenance of accounts and B will be in charge of purchase and sale. Being ignorant about such an agreement, M, a supplier supplied some furniture to A, who ultimately sold them to a third party. Referring to the provisions of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, advise whether M can recover money from the firm. What will be your advice in case M was having knowledge about the agreement?
Answer:
HintThe acts of a partner which are performed by him for the purpose of carrying on the business of the firm, in the usual way shall be binding on the firm. Further, the partners may by contract between them impose certain restrictions on the implied authority of a partner. However such a restriction shall be effective against a third party provided the third party has knowledge of such a restriction. Thus if any restriction on the implied authority of a partner has been imposed, the firm shall be bound by the act of such a partner which falls outside of the scope of his actual restricted authority provided the third party has no knowledge of such restriction on the authority.

Thus M can recover the money from the firm since he is not aware of the restrictions on the implied authority of A and he is acting in good faith.
However, if M had the knowledge of the restriction he cannot recover the money from the firm.

Relations of Partners – CA Foundation Law Study Material

Question 16.
A B and C are partners in a firm called ABC Firm. A, with the intention of deceiving D, a supplier of office stationery, buys certain stationery on behalf of the ABC Firm. The stationery is of use in the ordinary course of the firm’s business. A does not give the stationery to the firm, instead brings it to his own use. Supplier D, who is unaware of the private use of stationery by A, claims the price from the firm. The firm refuses to pay for the price, on the ground that the stationery was never received by it (firm). Referring to the provisions of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932 decided:

  • Whether the Firm’s contention shall be tenable?
  • What would be your answer if a part of the stationery so purchased by A was delivered to the firm by him, and the rest of the stationery was used by him for private use, about which neither the firm nor the supplier D was aware?

Answer:
HintThe firm is liable for the acts of a partner within the scope of his implied authority. Further, if the partner receives any money or property from a third person in the course of business of the firm & misapplies it or where a firm in the course of business receives money or property and the same is misapplied by a partner while in the custody of the firm, the firm shall be liable to compensate the third party.
Further, it is a duty of the partner to indemnify the firm for the loss sustained by it due to his fraud or misconduct:

  • This firm’s contention is not valid and it shall be bound to pay the price irrespective of the fact of not having received the stationery.
  • Where the stationery has been delivered to the firm and then it is used by A for private purpose, then also the firm shall be bound to make payment to D.

In both the above cases the firm can sue A for the loss sustained by it due to A’s misconduct.

Question 17.
Ram & Co. a firm consists of three partners A, B, and C having one-third share each in the firm. According to A and B, the activities of C are not in the interest of the partnership and thus want to expel C from the firm. Advise A and B whether they can do so quoting the relevant provisions of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932. (C.A. Foundation RTP Nov. 2018)
Answer:
HintRules with respect to expulsion;
Thus A & B can expel C, provided the power of expulsion is conferred by the partnership deed and the expulsion is being done in good faith, in the interest of the firm, after affording C a reasonable opportunity of being heard and a notice with respect to the same is served on C.

Question 18.
Mr. M, Mr. N and Mr. P were partners in a firm, which was dealing in refrigerators. On 1st October 2018, Mr. P retired from the partnership but failed to give public notice of his retirement. After his retirement, Mr. M, Mr. N and Mr. P visited a trade fair and enquired about some refrigerators with the latest techniques. Mr, X, who was exhibiting his refrigerators with the new techniques was impressed with the interactions of Mr. P and requested for the visiting card of the firm. The visiting card also included the name of Mr. P as a partner even though he had already retired. Mr. X supplied some refrigerators to the firm and could not recover his dues from the firm. Now, Mr. X wants to recover the dues not only from the firm, but also from Mr. P.
Analyse the above case in terms of the provisions of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932 and decide whether Mr. P is liable in this situation.
Answer:
According to the provision of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, when a person represents himself or knowingly permits himself to be represented as a partner in the firm, when in fact he is not, then he is liable like a partner in the firm to anyone who on the faith of such representation has given credit to the firm. Thus when a person by his words or conduct has wrongly induced a third party to believe that he is a partner then he shall be liable as a partner by holding out, to such a party, under the law of estoppel. This rule is also applicable to a former partner who has retired from the firm without giving proper public notice of his retirement. In such a case a person who even subsequent to the retirement of the partner, gives credit to the firm on the belief that he was a partner, shall be entitled to hold him liable, under the law of estoppel as a partner by holding out.

Thus applying the above provisions in the given case it can be concluded that Mr. P becomes a partner by holding out because he failed to give public notice of his retirement and made representations on behalf of the firm. Thus Mr. X can recover the amount not only from the firm but also from Mr. P under the law of estoppel.

Relations of Partners – CA Foundation Law Study Material

Question 19.
Mr. A, Mr. B and Mr. C were partners in a partnership firm M/s ABC & Co., which is engaged in the business of trading of branded furniture. The name of the partners was clearly written along with the firm name in front of the head office of the firm as well as on the letterhead of the firm. On 1st October 2018, Mr. C passed away. His name was neither removed from the list of partners as stated in front of the head office nor from the letter-heads of the firm. As per the terms of the partnership, the firm continued its operations with Mr. A and Mr. B as partners. The accounts of the firm were settled and the amount due to the legal heirs of Mr. C was also determined on 10th October 2018. But the same was not paid to the legal heirs of Mr. C. On 16th October 2018, Mr. X, a supplier supplied furniture worth ₹ 20,00,000 to M/s ABC & Co. M/s ABC & Co. could not repay the amount due to heavy losses. Mr. X wants to recover, the amount not only from M/s ABC & Co., but also from the legal heirs of Mr. C.
Analyse the above situation in terms of the provisions of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932 and decide whether the legal heirs of Mr. C can also be held liable for the dues towards Mr. X.
Answer:
According to section 35 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, where under a contract between the partners, the firm is not dissolved by the death of a partner, the estate of a deceased partner is not liable for any act of the firm done after his death. Further, in order that the estate of the deceased partner may be absolved from liability for the future obligations of the firm, it is not necessary to give any notice either to the public or to the persons dealing with the firm.

Thus applying the above-stated provisions in the given case, it can be concluded that Mr. X, the supplier may sue M/s. ABC & Co. for the recovery of his dues, but he cannot hold the legal heirs of Mr. C liable, since Mr. C’s estate shall not be liable for transactions of the firm made after his death i.e. after 1st October, 2018.

Question 20.
Ram, Mohan and Gopal were partners in a firm. During the course of the partnership, the firm ordered sunrise Ltd. to supply a machine to the firm. Before the machine was delivered, Ram expired. The machine, however, was later delivered to the firm. Thereafter, the remaining partners became insolvent and the firm failed to pay the price of the machine to Sunrise Ltd.
Explain with reasons:

  • Whether Ram’s private estate is liable for the price of the machine purchased by the firm?
  • Against whom can the creditor obtain a decree for the recovery of the price?

Answer:
Hint: Where under a contract between the partners, the firm is not dissolved by the death of a partner, & the remaining partners continue to carry on the business of the firm, then the estate of the deceased partner shall not be liable for any acts of the firm done after his death. Thus the estate of the deceased partner shall not be liable for the liabilities of the firm arising after his death.
In the given case order for the supply of the machine is given to Sunrise Ltd. by the firm during the lifetime of Ram, which does not result in the creation of any liability. The machine is delivered subsequent to the death of Ram.

  • Thus Ram’s estate shall not be liable for the price of the machinery.
  • The creditor shall have a right of action against the surviving partners & recover the amount from the partnership assets and the partners’ assets since they have become insolvent.

Question 21.
X, Y & Z carry on business in partnership business as merchants trading between Mumbai & London. Wheaton, a merchant in London to whom they sent their consignments secretly allows the share of commission which he received upon such consignments in consideration of Z using his influence to obtain consignments for him. Is Z liable to account to the firm the monies so received by him?
Answer:
Hint: Duty of the partner to account for any secret profits earned by him in the course of conduct of the business of the firm by virtue of the use of the property or name or connections of the firm. Thus here Z shall be liable to account for the share of commission that he receives from Wheaton during the course of conduct of the business of the firm.

Relations of Partners – CA Foundation Law Study Material

Question 22.
M/s XYZ & Associates, a partnership firm with X, Y, Z as senior partners were engaged in the business of carpet manufacturing and exporting to foreign counties. On 25th Aug. 2016, they inducted Mr. G an expert in the field of carpet manufacturing as their partner. On 10th Jan. 2018, Mr. G was blamed for unauthorized activities and thus expelled from the partnership by the united approval of the rest of the partners.

  • Examine whether action by the partners was justified or not?
  • What should have the factors to be kept in mind prior to expelling a partner from the firm by other partners according to the provisions of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932?

Answer:
According to the provisions of section 33 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, generally, a partner cannot be expelled from a firm, except on the fulfilment of the following conditions:

  • the power of expulsion must have existed in the contract between the partners.
  • the power of expulsion must have been exercised by a majority of the partners &
  • it has been exercised in good faith.

Further expulsion is deemed to have been made in good faith only if

  • the expulsion is in the interest of the partnership,
  • the partner to be expelled is served with a notice
  • and he is given a reasonable opportunity of being heard.

In the given case X, Y, Z, the senior partners of M/s. XYZ & Associates expel Mr. G unanimously on the grounds of unauthorised activities.

(i) Thus applying the above-stated provisions it is evident that the action of the partners was not justified, since all the conditions required for the lawful expulsion of Mr. G were not duly complied. Expulsion of Mr. G would have been valid if such a power existed in the contract of partnership & if all conditions of ‘expulsion made in good faith’ were satisfied.

2. The partners before unanimously expelling Mr. G should have assured that

  • the power of expulsion must have existed in the partnership deed;
  • Mr. G. should have been served with a notice of expulsion;
  • Mr. G should have been given an opportunity of being heard.
Choice of a Business Organization – Setting Up of Business Entities and Closure Important Questions

Choice of a Business Organization – Setting Up of Business Entities and Closure Important Questions

Choice of a Business Organization – Setting Up of Business Entities and Closure Important Questions

Question 1.
Choosing a form of business entity is crucial to a successful organization. Comment.
Answer:
Business organization refers to all necessary arrangements required to conduct a business in an optimized manner. It refers to all those steps that need to be undertaken for establishing and maintaining the relationship between men, material, and machinery to carry on the business efficiently for earning profits

Merits and Demerits of Various business organizations: A business enterprise can be owned and organized in several forms. Each form of organization has its own merits and demerits. The ultimate choice of the form of business depends upon the balancing of the advantages and disadvantages of the various forms of business.

The right choice of the form of the business is very crucial because it determines the power, control, risk, and responsibility of the entrepreneur as well as the division of profits and losses.

Being a long-term commitment, the choice of the form of business should be made after considerable thought and deliberation.

Success and Growth of Business: The selection of a suitable form of business organization is an important entrepreneurial decision because it influences the success and growth of a business – e.g., it determines the division or distribution of profits, the risk associated with business, and so on.

Types of Business Entities: The certain types of business entities in India are Sole Proprietorship, Partnership, Hindu Undivided Family (HUF) Business, Limited Liability Partnership (LLP), Co-operative Societies, Branch Office and Company which may be any kind of company including One Person Company (OPC), Private Limited Company, Public Limited Company,

Guarantee Company, Subsidiary Company, Statutory Company, Insurance Company, or Unlimited Company.
Non-Profit Business Entity: Company formed u/s 8 of the Companies Act, 2013 is a non-profit business entity. There can also be Association of Persons (AOP) and Body of Individuals (BOI), Corporation, Co-operative Society, Trust, etc.

Question 2.
Why would you prefer a Limited Liability Partnership form of organization for setting up a business compared to a Private Limited Company?
Answer:
One can prefer a Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) form of organization for setting up a business compared to a Private Limited Company for the following reasons:
1. Cost of formation/incorporation: The cost of incorporation of LLP is lower as compared to a private company.

2. Process of incorporation: The process of incorporation of LLP is fast as compared to a private company.

3. Change in internal rules: Internal rules and regulation of LLP’s are governed by the LLP agreement which can be changed easily by making a change in agreement as per the LLP Act, 2008; whereas internal rules and regulation of the companies are governed by the Article of Association which requires special procedure ie. passing of the special resolution in shareholders meeting which is a time-consuming and costly process.

3. Meetings: In the LLP Act, there is no stipulation for meetings of partners either periodically or compulsory at the year-end; whereas every private company must hold AGM every year. Every private company must hold 4 board meetings and the gap between the two meetings should not be more than 3 months. Thus, in LLP business can be conducted without any meeting by the partners of the LLP.

5. Business: In an LLP, each partner has the authority to do so unless expressly prohibited by, the partnership terms; whereas in the case of a company no individual director can conduct the business of the company.

6. Borrowing power: There are no restrictions on the borrowing powers on the LLP; whereas there are restrictions on borrowings power on the companies.

7. Accounts: LLP can choose to maintain the accounts on a cash basis/ accrual basis; whereas private companies have to keep their accounts on an accrual basis.

8. Audit: Audit of LLP is not compulsory if the capital contributed does not exceed ₹ 25 lakh or if the turnover does not exceed t 40 lakhs; whereas audit of a company is compulsory.

9. Appointment of Company Secretary: Appointment of Company Secretary is not provided in the LLP Act, 2008; whereas private companies may be required to appoint Company Secretary if its paid-up capital exceeds the limit prescribed under the Companies Act, 2013.

Question 3.
Distinguish between : Partnership & Company [June 2005 (4 Marks)], [Dec. 2013 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
Following are the main points of distinction between partnership and company:

Points Partnership Company
Meaning The partnership is the relation between persons who have agreed to share the profits of a business carried on by all or any of them acting for all. A company means a company formed and registered under the Companies Act, 2013. A company may be a private company or a public company.
Legal status A partnership firm has no separate existence apart from its members. A company is a separate legal entity distinct from its member.
Governing Act The partnership is governed by the Partnership Act, 1932. A company is governed by the Companies Act, 2013.
Minimum membership Minimum two persons are required to form a partnership. A minimum number of the member required to form a company are:

  • For private company: 2
  • For public company: 7
  • For one person company: 1
Maximum membership A partnership with objects of acquisition for gains cannot be formed beyond 50 numbers of partners. [Section 464 read with Rule 10 of the Companies (Miscellaneous) Rules, 2014] The maximum number of member are:

  • For private company: 200
  • For public company: Unlimited
Registration Registration of partnership is not compulsory but the Partnership Act, 1932 had made it indirectly essential to enjoy certain benefits. Registration of the company is compulsory under the Companies Act, 2013.
Capital Minimum capital is not specified. Minimum capital for the private and public companies will be as specified in the rules.
[Prior to the Companies {Amendment) Act, 2015, minimum paid-up capital for private company was ₹ 1,00,000 & for public company was ₹ 5,00,000]
Management All partners have a right to take part in the day-to-day affairs of the firm. The affairs of the company are managed by the Board of Directors. Members cannot take part in day-to-day business.
Mutual agency Every partner is principal as well as an agent of other partners. A member of the company is not an agent of another member or company.
Transfer of interest A partner cannot transfer his interest without the consent of all other partners. A shareholder can freely transfer his share. However, private companies can put restrictions on transfer.
Liability of a member The liability of a partner is unlimited. The liability of a member is limited up to the unpaid amount on share.
Audit It not compulsory for partnership firms to get their accounts compulsorily audited. The company has to get their accounts compulsorily audited as per the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013.

Question 4.
Distinguish between: Company & Club [June 2010 (6 Marks)]
Answer:
Following are the main points of distinction between Company & Club:

Points Company Club
Meaning “Company” means a company formed and registered under this Act or an existing company as defined in the Companies Act, 2013. A club is an association of persons formed with the object to promote some common beneficial purpose.
Registration Registration of a company is compulsory. Registration of a club is not compulsory.
Profit motive Most of the companies are formed with a view to earning profit. Clubs are formed not to earn profit.
Audit The company has to get their accounts compulsorily audited as per the Companies Act, 2013. Clubs are not required to get their accounts audited.

Question 5.
The requirement of capital affects the choice of business organization. Comment. [June 2019 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
Capital is one of the most crucial factors affecting the choice of a particular form of ownership organization.
Major Factors: Requirement of capital is closely related to the type of business and scale of operations

Heavy Capital: Enterprises requiring heavy investment (like iron and steel plants, large-scale infrastructure projects, etc.) should be organized as companies. Depending on the capital required, they can be set up as public companies and in some cases, maybe in the form of listed companies by raising money from the public and being listed on the stock exchanges.

Small Investment: Enterprises requiring small investment (like retail business stores, personal service enterprises, etc.) can be best organized as sole proprietorships or even as Partnerships. Apart from the initial capital required to start a business, the future capital requirements – to meet modernization, expansion, and diversification plans – also affect the choice of form of organization.

Sole Proprietorship’s Capital: In a sole proprietorship, the owner may raise additional capital by borrowing, by purchasing on credit, and investing additional amounts himself. Banks and suppliers, however, will look closely at the proprietor’s individual financial resources before sanctioning any loans or advances.

Partnerships Capital: Partnerships can often raise funds with greater ease since the resources and credit of all partners are combined in a single enterprise.

Companies Capital: Companies are usually best able to attract capital because

  • Investors are assured that their liability will be limited
  • Operations are in the public domain in a transparent manner
  • Easily accessible and
  • Ownership can be transferred to other investors.

Setting Up of Business Entities and Closure Questions and Answers

Comprehension Passages – CA Foundation BCR Notes

Comprehension Passages – CA Foundation BCR Notes

Browsing through Comprehension Passages – CA Foundation BCR Notes Pdf help students to revise the complete subject quickly.

Comprehension Passages – BCR Notes CA Foundation

Comprehension means understanding. An unknown passage that perturbs the candidate is not familiar with is given to judge whether the candidate understands the language and the contents. The given text is followed by a set of questions that the candidate is expected to answer.

A comprehension exercise consists of an unseen passage and the questions based on that passage. Questions are set to test the ability of students to understand the contents of the given passage and to infer information and meaning from it Students require the ability to understand the meaning of the passage and also the ability to answer the questions in their own words. They require command over English. It is often assumed that a person can grasp the meaning of a passage completely if he is familiar with the meaning of words used in it. Truly speaking, all the three components of language – sound, syntax and word contribute to meaning.

Therefore, complete understanding of a passage requires familiarity with the sound meaning, syntax meaning and word meaning of the passage. Sound meaning is particularly significant in conversation and public speaking. To comprehend a text, utmost attention should be paid to word meaning and grammar. The order of words in a sentence has a meaning of its own example.
I saw her crossing the road.
I saw her cross the road.
In science and technology, the denotation of most words is fixed. Therefore, word meaning does not offer a special problem. However, the context or situation can make a difference in meaning. For example, the word thermometer means one thing in a hospital and quite another in the chemistry lab. Similarly, the word glasses have one meaning in a bar and quite another with an old man who wants to watch TV.

Comprehension Passages – CA Foundation BCR Notes

Hints for Answering Questions to an unseen passage:

  • Read the passage quickly to get the general idea.
  • Read again but a little slowly so as to know the details in the passage.
  • Study each question and underline the words in the passage which contain answer to the question. Mark the question number against the relevant lines in the passage.
  • Write answers to the questions one by one.
  • Use complete sentences in each answer.
  • Use the same verb and tense in your answer which is used in the question.
  • Never begin an answer with ‘because’.
  • Answers should be brief, clear and to the point.
  • If you are asked to give the meaning of any words or phrases, write the meaning as clearly as possible in your own words. Your definition should be in conformity with the part of the speech.

Illustration 1:
Gandhi does not reject machinery as such. He observes: “How can I be against all machinery when I know that even this body is a most delicate piece of machinery? The spinning-wheel is a machine; a little tooth-pich is a machine. What I object to is the craze for machinery not machinery, as such. The craze is for what they call labour saving machinery. Men go on saving labour till thousands are without work and thrown on the open street to die of starvation. I want to save time and labour not for a fraction of making but for all.

I want the connection of wealth not in the hands of a few but in the hands of Today machinery merely helps a few to ride on the backs of millions. The impetus behind it all is not the desire to save labour but greed. It is against this system that I am fighting with all my might. The machine should not cut off the limbs of man ……. Factories run by power driven machinery should be nationalised and controlled by the state. The supreme consideration is man – Mahatma Gandhi.
Questions:
1. Why does Gandhiji accept machinery?
2. What are the evil effects of employers’ craze for machinery?
3. How, according to Gandhiji, can the evils of factories run by machines be avoided ?
4. How can machinery save time and labour?
5. Explain the following phrases:
(a) Not the desire to save but greed
(b) With all my might.
6. Write down the sentence wherein Gandhiji says human being is more important than the machine.
Answer:
1. Gandhiji accepts machinery because even human body is a delicate machine. He gives the example of the spinning wheel which is a machine.
2. Employers’ urge for machinery causes unemployment and starvation of workers. It also leads to concentration of wealth in the hands of a few persons who exploit workers.
3. According to Gandhiji the evil effects of factories run by machines can be avoided by nation-alisation and control of factories by the State.
4. Machinery can save time and labour because machines work faster and require fewer hands.
5. (a) It means the greed of employers to maximise their gain rather than the desire to save the labour of their workers,
(b) It means with all my strength.
6. “The machine should not cut off the limbs of man”.

Comprehension Passages – CA Foundation BCR Notes

Illustration 2:
Long years ago we made a tryst with destiny, and now the time comes when we shall redeem our pledge, not wholly or in full measure, but very substantially. At the stroke of the midnight hour, when the world sleeps, India will awake to life and’freedom. A moment comes, which comes but rarely in history, when we step out from the old to the new, when an age ends, and when the soul of a nation, long suppressed, finds utterance. It is fitting that at this solemn moment we take the pledge of dedication to the service of India and her people and to the still larger cause of humanity.

At the dawn of history India started on her unending quest, and trackless centuries are filled with her striving and the grandeur of her success and her failures. Through good and ill fortune alike she has never lost sight of that quest or forgotten the ideals which gave her strength. We end today a period of ill fortune and India discovers herself again. The achievement we celebrate today is but a step, an opening of opportunity, to the greater triumphs and achievements that await. Are we brave enough and wise enough to grasp this opportunity and accept the challenge of the future?

Freedom and power bring responsibility. That responsibility rests upon this Assembly, a sovereign body representing the sovereign people of India. Before the birth of freedom we have endured all the pains of labour and our hearts are heavy with the memory of this sorrow. Some of those pains continue even now. Nevertheless, the past is over and it is the future that beckons to us now. That future is not one of ease or resting but of incessant striving so that we may fulfil the pledges we have so often taken and the one we shall take toady.

The service of India means the service of the millions who suffer. It means the ending of poverty and ignorance and disease and inequality of opportunity. The ambition of the greatest man of our generation has been to wipe every tear from every eye. That may be beyond us, but as long as there are tears and suffering, so long our work will not be over.

– Jawaharlal Nehru

Questions:
1. In what does the “service of India” consist, according to the author?
2. What are the ideals which India has never forgotten?
3. Mention some of the responsibilities of freedom and power.
4. This speech is concerned with the living as well as the dead. In what way does Nehru appeal to his listeners? What motive urges Nehru to rouse the India of today to action?
5. Quote the line that has a direct reference to Mahatma Gandhi.
Answer:
1. According to Nehruji the ‘service of India’ consist of eradicating poverty, ignorance and dis-ease.
2. The ideals which India has never forgotten is to wipe every tear from every eye.
3. The responsibilities of freedom and power a?e to serve millions who suffer.
4. Nehruji appeals to his listeners by exhorting them with hope and bright future. The motive of service to mankind urges Nehruji to rouse the India of today to action.
5. “The ambition of the greatest man of our generation has been to wipe every tear from every eye”.

Comprehension Passages Notes Exercise Questions

Read the passage given below and answer the questions that follow:
1. The universe around us is not a continuum, a sort of a pea-soupy structure less fog. Common experience tells us that it is made up of objects, matter, and other associated phenomena that we can describe or measure. We soon realise that each of these “things” has a uniqueness that we detect through touch, taste, hearing, smell, or sight, and that each is distinguishable to a greater or lesser degree. With our unaided senses, we have no difficulty in distinguishing the sky and the land from the water, a gas and a solid from a liquid, the living from the non-living.

On a more refined level, we can discriminate degrees of roughness, intensity and shade of colour (provided we are not colour blind), and an acid taste from one that is salty, sweet, or bitter. But human powers of sensory discrimination are limited. We hear only within a certain range of sound waves, and see only a certain portion of the light spectrum. When we try to go beyond these limits, we can no longer directly comprehend the physical nature of things and must resort to instruments to pen¬etrate areas outside our naturally circumscribed sphere.

Instruments, therefore, act as extended senses. The 200 inch Hale telescope on Mount Palomar reaches across millions of light-years to bring distant galaxies of the macrocosm to reveal other wise invisible worlds. Similarly, the photographic plate, more sensitive than our eyes, extends our use of light rays. Ordinarily we can see only a minute portion of the electromagnetic spectrum, but by utilising photosensitive surfaces we can detect the long infrared rays on one side of the spectrum and the short ultraviolet rays X-rays, and even cosmic rays on the other.
Questions:
(i) What does the author mean by naturally circumscribed sphere and Instruments, therefore , act as extended senses?
(ii) In how many ways each “thing” be distinguished.
(iii) Why can’t we directly comprehend the physical nature of every thing?
(iv) What is the use of instruments in perception?
(v) What do we do to gain the knowledge of “things” in the universe?

2. Read the given passage and answer the questions that follows:
The Cinema is the only art invented by science. It was born and bred in the West in a terminological environment and so its manifestations in predominantly agricultural countries are a somewhat curious phenomenon of more sociological than aesthetic interest. What is remarkable is that with political independence and the rise of a national awareness of technology, a new minority cinema appears in many of these societies and quickly acquires compelling aesthetic and humanist values. Their content is increasingly charged with aspirations for a better life and their form with delight in a new medium.

In many of these countries, television is limited in its spread and its creative abilities, either by the lack of resources or by the constrictions of governmental ownership or both. The cinema on the other hand reflects a more vital and spontaneous expressing of the secret hopes and fears, ideals and enthusiasms of a country’s people. A small serious-creative cinema grows alongside the larger more conventional product and begins to engage the attention of select national and international audience. Examples of this can be seen in Sri Lanka, the Philippines. Hong Kong, Thailand, Korea and that is by no means an exhaustive list.
Questions:
(i) Why is Cinema called an ‘art invented by science’?
(ii) How is cinema in third-world countries of more sociological than ‘aesthetic’ interest?
(iii) What is meant by ‘minority cinema’? What has led to the rise of this cinema?
(iv) What do you understand by ‘content’ and ‘form’?
(v) How are television and cinema contrasted?
(vi) What are the two kinds of cinema to be seen in developing countries?
(vii) In line I, ‘was’ has been used as …………..
(viii) Give Present and Past forms of ‘born’ and ‘bred’.
(ix) Which parts of speech are reflected by the following words (as underlined in the passage):
By, increasingly, conventional, attention, Sri Lanka.

Comprehension Passages – CA Foundation BCR Notes

3. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow:
The main justification advanced for capital punishment is that it deters others from committing the same crimes. But statistics show that capital punishment is not a deterrent. Every state that has abolished capital punishment has actually had a decline rather that an increase in capital crimes.

And in England, where there has been a long decline in the use of capital punishment, there has been a similar decline in capital crimes. It is a well-known joke that when pick pockets were publicly hanged in England, other pickpockets plied their trade among the crowds watching the hanging. A deterrent indeed! Surely life imprisonment would be at least an equal deterrent.

On the other hand, (capital punishment is an absolute hindrance to rehabilitation and to the correction of a mistake). All modern criminologists recognize that the purpose of punishment is to bring about rehabilitation, but how can you rehabilitate a dead man? Furthermore it is being more and more realized that most criminals are sick. It certainly seems more reasonable to treat them than to kill them.

Additionally, it happens occasionally that an innocent man is put to death. What restitution can there be for such a horrible mistake? A compassionate society should not legalize murder, but should carry on programmes of rehabilitation. The constitution forbids cruel and inhuman punishment.

Certainly sentencing someone to die is inhumane and cruel. Seldom does the condemned know his executing date until it is close at hand. Thus he is in agony about his fate. If he is to be punished, he should be imprisoned only. He should not be condemned to die at a specific date. Capital punishment is a relic of a barbarous age. There has been a continuous decline in its use for centuries. Surely the time has come to abolish it altogether. It may be a one hundred per cent deterrent as far as the victim is cornered, but it does no other good, and it does degrade our society.
Questions:
(i) What does the author feel about capital punishment as a deterrent?
(ii) How according to author, should a com-passionate society deal with criminals?
(iii) What does the author want to prove with his joke about pick pockets?
(iv) What are the bad effects of capital punishment?
(v) What are the author’s objections to this kind of punishment?
(vi) What has been the justification for capital punishment?
(vii) What has been the experience of states abolishing capital punishment?

Comprehension Passages – CA Foundation BCR Notes

4. Read the passage below and answer the questions that follow:
All warm-blooded animal are incredibly help-less at first. Young birds and young bats must be taught to fly. Thousands of young seals and young sea lions are drowned every year. They never learn to swim “naturally”, the mother has to take them out under her flipper and show them how, birds sing without instruction, but they do not sing well unless they have had an opportunity of hearing older and more adept members of their species.

Older harvest mice build better nests than beginners. It is said that the young elephant does not seem to know at first what his trunk is for; it gets in his way and seems more of a hindrance than a help until his parents show him what to do with it. Insects, indeed, seem to start life completely equipped with all necessary reflexes, but even there the concept of “instinct” seems to require some modification, for they improve their talents with practice. Young spiders, for example, “begin by making quite primitive little webs, and only attain perfection in their art in course of time” and older spiders, if deprived of their spinnerets, will take to hunting.
Questions:
(i) What is the main idea in this paragraph?
(ii) Are warm-blooded animals dependent on being taught survival skills?
(iii) Do insects have instincts? Why do you say so?
(iv) Describe two things that warm-blooded animals must learn.
(v) Do you think the author is serious or is he writing tongue-in-cheek? Why?
(vi) What would an elephant use his trunk for?
(vii) What part of speech are the following:
→ Incredibly
→ Naturally
→ Necessary
(viii) Rewrite the entire passage in the simple past tense.

5. Read the following passage and answer the questions given at the end:
Nehru’s decision to opt for the mixed economy has almost universally been misunderstood and has been seen as the result to foreign influence.

Fabian socialism and Soviet centralized planning. But Nehru was always searching in every facet of his life and activity for the middle path that Lord Buddha has commended. His policy of non-alignment with its accent on negotiations and mediation was one expression of such a temperament and so also his concept of secularism that did not deny the life of the spirit and all that it implies.

His preference for a mixed economy falls in the same category. He genuinely believed that this path would help promote economic growth and social peace at the same time. No one can possibly claim that his total approach- a mixed economy, secularism, democracy and non-alignment-has not been productive of results.

It is a tribute to Nehru’s foresight that unlike most Third World countries, we are still a functioning democracy and a reasonable human society where the rulers feel obliged at least to profess high standards of public morality. I am emphasizing the essentially Indian origin of the concept of mixed economy in order to make the point that we can deviate from the search for a middle path for long only at the cost of grave violence to ourselves. The forms may differ. But the search for a middle path between capitalism and socialism has to go on. A Latin American type of economy and society is inconceivable in India.
Questions:
(a) Why has Nehru’s policy of mixed economy been misunderstood?
(b) Why did Nehru advocate mixed economy for India?
(c) What does, in the passage, prove that Nehru’s approach was right?
(d) What would happen if mixed economy were discarded?
(e) What was Nehru searching for in every facet of life?

6. Read the passage below and answer the questions following it:
There are situations in which we may not wish to use the most technically accurate language because it could hurt or offend our audience. For example, when breaking the news of a death to a close friend or member of the family, many people avoid blunt words such as died and prefer expressions such as passed away. This use of language is referred to as EUPHEMISM.

Euphemistic language is commonly used by people when talking about death, certain kinds of illness (e.g. cancer), sex and other bodily functions such as excretion. It even affects the languages used to describe certain parts of the body. For example, that part which is most accurately referred to as the belly is much more frequently called the stomach (inaccurate) or tummy (euphemistic). There is another way in which you can unintentionally offend your audience, and that is by exhibiting linguistic ‘tics; and using hackneyed phrases, or tired once-fashionable expression as CLICHES.

In the good old days it was all down to the private individual to earn an honest penny and make ends meet, but in this day and age all that’s gone by the board, Life’s a lottery and when push comes to solve, it’s every man for himself. Everybody uses cliches from time to time. They are formulate that save time and thought. Usually they either add nothing to what we are saying or just give a general impression of the line we are taking or the attitude we are presenting.
Questions:
(a) What is euphemism?
(b) In what circumstances is euphemism used?
(c) What is the other way in which one can offend his audience?
(d) How is cliche useful?
(e) Explain the underlined sentences.

Comprehension Passages – CA Foundation BCR Notes

7. Read the following passage and answer the questions given at the end:
We have now to consider mass movements in which the principles of non-violence are applied to the relations between large groups or entire populations and their governments. Of these, the movements best known to English speaking readers are those organized by Gandhiji in South Africa and later in India. The South African movement may be described as completely successful. The discriminatory legislation against the Hindus was repealed in 1914, entirely as the result of non-violent resistance and non-co-operation on the part of the Indian population.

In India, several important successes were recorded, and it was shown that very large groups of men and women could be trained to respond to the most brutal treatment with a quiet courage and equanimity that profoundly impressed their persecutors, the spectators in the immediate vicinity and, through the press, the public opinion of the entire world. The task of effectively training very large number in a very short time proved, however, too great and rather than all his movement degenerate into civil war, Gandhiji suspended the activities of his non-violent army.
Questions:
(a) Where did the non-violent movements take place?
(b) What was Gandhiji’s achievement in South Africa?
(c) What was the reaction in India?
(d) Why did Gandhiji suspend his movement?
(e) Give the meanings of any two words:
→ repealed
→ equanimity
→ degenerate

8. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow:
Economists, ethicists and business sages persuade us that honesty is the best policy, but their evi¬dence is weak. We hoped to find data that would support their theories and thus, perhaps encour¬age higher, standards of business behaviour. To our surprise, our pet theories failed to stand up. Treachery, we found, can pay. There is no compelling economic reason to tell the truth or keep one’s word punishment for the treacherous in the real world is neither swift nor sure.

Honesty is, in fact, primarily a moral choice. Business people do tell themselves that, in the long run, they will do well by doing good. But there is little factual or logical basis for this conviction. Without values, without a basis preference for right over wrong, trust based on such self-delusion would crumble in the face of the temptation. Most of us choose virtue because we want to believe in ourselves and have others respect and belief in us.

And for this, we should be happy, We can be proud of a system in which people are honest because they want to be, not because they have to be. Materially too, trust based on morality provides great advantages. It allows us to join in great and exciting enterprises that we could never undertake it we relied on a economic incentives alone.

Economists tell us that trust is enforced in the market place through retaliation of reputation. If you violate a trust your victim is apt to seek revenge and others are likely to stop doing business with you, at least under favourable terms. A man or woman with a reputation for fair dealing will prosper. Therefore, profit maximizers are honest. This sound plausible enough until you look for concrete examples. Cases that apparently demonstrate the lawful consequences of trust turns out to be few and weak, while evidence the tracery can pay seems compelling.
Questions:
(i) What does the another think about the theory “honesty is the best policy”.
(ii) Why does the another say that one can be proud of the present situation?
(iii) Why do economists and athieists want use, to believe?
(iv) Which is the material advantage which the author sees in being honest?
(v) Why do businessman, according to economists, remain honest?
(vi) Explain the use of words/phrases – ‘stand up’, ‘self-delusion’, ‘retaliation of reputation’.
(vii) Give the passage an appropriate title.

9. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow:
Education, taken in the most extensive sense, is properly that which makes the man. One method of education, therefore, would only produce one kind of men, but the great excellence of human nature consists in the variety of which it is capable. Then instead of endeavouring, by uniform and fixed systems of education, to keep mankind always the same, let us give free scope to everything which may bid fair for introducing more variety amongst us. The various character of the Athenians was certainly preferable to the uniform character of the Spartans or to any uniform national character whatever Uniformity is the characteristic of the brute creation.

Among them every species of bird build their nests with the same materials and in the same forms the genius and disposition of one individual is that of all and it is only education which men give them that raises any of them much above others. But it is the glory of human nature that the operations of reason, though variable and by no means in-fallible, are capable of infinite improvement. We come into the world worse provided than any of the brutes but when their faculties are at a full stand and their enjoyments incapable of variety or increase our intellectual powers are growing apace, were are perpetually deriving happiness from new sources, and even before we leave this world are capable of testing the felicity of angels.
Questions:
(i) What is the author’s notion of education?
(ii) What is the problem that confronts us?
(iii) How were Athenians preferable to Spartans?
(iv) How can we constantly derive pleasure from new source?
(v) Bring out the difference between uniform and fixed systems of education.
(vi) What contributes to the capability of infinite improvement?
(vii) Explain the italicised portion.

10. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow:
Ever since after the discovery of transistor by Brattain and Shockley in 1948, attempts are being , made of make smaller and smaller transistors. And in 1959, it was Richard R Feynman who predicted a technological world composed of self repheating molecules whose purpose would be the production of nanosized objects. Almost 40 years after Feynman’s initial proposition, the nanometic scale looms large on the research agenda. This was about the same time that Ari Aviram and Mark Ratner, at IBM, proposed the idea of a single molecules rectifier.

Scientific discoveries and inventions have, in fact, propelled man to challenge new frontiers. Nanotechnology is one such technological wonder that we are experiencing now. Coverage of various events led to the recognition of nanotechnology as an area for special emphasis. These included recognition of new phenomena that would be necessary to extend the progress associated with the general area of information technology, scientific discoveries of new instruments and materials, and an awareness of an information frontier that offered a rich supply of new principles, phenomena, materials and opportunities to enrich social functions.

In fact, with the evolving strength of disciplines, the fertile frontier of discoveries requiring knowledge across discipline boundaries had been some-what neglected for decades. This is where the concept and trust in nanotechnology represents a substantial difference to the manner in which knowledge and technological innovation is pursued. Semiconductor behaviour has provided the electronics engineers with remarkably productive developments and semiconductor industry is edging closer to the word of nanotechnology where components are miniaturised to the point of individual molecules and atoms. Miniaturisation is known to follow Moore’s law since its depiction in 1960.

Nanotechnology was originally defined in the 1970s as the science of manipulating atoms and single molecules. Its remit has since expanded to embrace all technologies capable of building ‘ structures at the scale of a billionth of a metre. Until the 1990s, atomic manipulations were developed with sustainability in mind. Hope was that building machines from the bottom up atom by atom, rather than top down, etching them from larger blocks, would minimise the energy and materials expended in manufacturing. US industrial lobbies then broadened the definition as a way of accessing public funds earmarked for materials and chemistry research and development. These Answer the following questions based on your comprehension of the above passage:
Questions:
(i) Who discovered transistor and in which year?
(ii) What did Feynman predict in 1959?
(iii) What are the three major areas, the recognition of which could benefit from nanotechnology?
(iv) What had been neglected for decades?
(v) Describe the developing relationship between semiconductors and nanotechnology
(vi) Give the original definition of nanotechnology and its present extended meaning.
(vii) What did the National Nanotechnology Initiative (1999).

Comprehension Passages – CA Foundation BCR Notes

10 A. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow:
Science deals with the positive world, the visible world that we can see and hear and touch. It applies positive methods of experiment and ob¬servation. Nehru is convinced that methods and approach of science have revolutionized human life more than anything else in the long course of history. Science has opened doors and avenues leadings up to the very portals of what has long been considered the unknown. The technical achievements of science have transformed an economy of scarcity into one of abundance.

It has made the world progress by reaps and bounds and helped man to build up a glittering civilization. It has added so much to the power of man’that since time he appeared on this earth, he has begun to feel that he can triumph over his physical environment and shape it as he likes it. Indeed man has become a geological force. He is changing the face of this planet chemically, physically and in many other ways.

But science ignores the ultimate purposes and looks at face alone. Not to speak of the ultimate purposes, science does not understand even the immediate purpose. So when man has acquired so much power and knowledge to mould the world after his heart’s desire, he does not know how to do it. Though science has made man so powerful in the control of nature, he has no power to control himself.

Perhaps new developments in biology, psychology and similar sciences may help man to understand and control himself more than he has been able to do so far. But it is also possible that before that time arrives the progress of science, unconnected with moral discipline and ethical considerations will lead to the concentration of power in the hands of few evil and selfish men. In their ambition to dominate others, they will destroy this glittering civilization and the very achievements of sciences.

It is the critical temper of science that searches for truth and knowledge. It is the courage to refuse to accept anything without test and trial and the capacity to change the previous result in the light of new evidence. It is essential not only for application of science but for the solution of many problems of life also. There are scientists who apply methods of science in their sphere of work, but lack the critical temper of science in their day-to-day life. The scientific temper needs to be the way of life. The ultimate purposes of man may be said to be to gain knowledge, to realize and to appreciate goodness and beauty. The methods of science are applicable to these. Therefore to face life, we need and temper and approach of science, allied of course, to philosophy, metaphysics and all that lies beyond. Questions
(i) What are the benefits of science?
(ii) What is the negative impact of science?
(iii) Why the author recommends the scientific approach despite the fact that it ignores the ultimate purpose of life?

11. Read the given passage carefully and answer the questions that follow:
Our Earliest Ancestors
(a) The story of our ancestors on their long road to human civilization begins in East Africa, at a gorge called Olduvai, where scientists stumbled across the fossilized remains of animals that provide an invaluable link with past. What is more, quantities of strangely shaped stones were found nearby, which could have been crude tools for cutting and slicing meat. Then came other significant discoveries – the fossilized remains of skills, not altogether human, but with features markedly similar to those of humans. Such finds, together with the strangely-shaped, stones, were likely evidence of creatures which were developing a primitive intelligence, and not relying just on jaws and teeth to get their food.

(b) Even so, discoveries such as these are pain¬fully few. This is not surprising when we consider how rare it is to find a few bones of anything that perished countless years ago. When a creature died on the open plains of Africa, the scent of its decay sooner or later attracted other animals of all kinds. They devoured the soft tissue and crushed the bones in their jaws. Hardly any trace of its existence would be left. A very few carcass¬es, however, sank into the muddy shores of lakes or rivers where they lay hidden from other animals. Then the gradual process of fossilization began. Ever so slowly, bone and tissue turned into stone.

(c) Fossil finds alone will not tell the whole story, however. Scientists have to take into account what the world was like when our earliest ancestors began to appear. Two million years ago, the gorge at Olduvai would have held a great lake, and around its shores animals would have swarmed in abundance. But their world was slowly changing as the planet underwent major alterations of climate. A drastic cooling of the earth’s surface meant that the rich forests of Africa began to die off, and the almost endless canopy of trees broke up into scattered areas, each isolated from the other.

So, too, the lush plants and vegetation began to dwindle; the forests no longer provided an ever ready supply of food for the creatures that roamed them, as bare, open grassland took over the landscape. Now, in their struggle to survive, they had to keep moving to where food could be found. It was about that time, so scientists believe, that our ancestors emerged. They faced the same problems as their fellow creatures; they, too, had to learn how to search out food in the wide plains of Africa and acquire essential skills of survival.

(d) But these ancestors of ours did not acquire – these skills overnight, nor did they enter these open plains like people rushing to stake a claim in empty territory; they were competing for a place in environment already significantly populated with other animals, experts by now in exploiting the food re-sources of the open plains Our ancestors shared the same habitat with creatures that would snap at their feet, trying to steal their meal as they were eating it, or would pace menacingly around nearby. It was physically , impossible to master them: our ancestors simply had to stay out of their reach.

(e) Besides, life on the African plain was very much at the mercy of the different weather seasons. The dry season meant lean times, and many animals had to be content with tough, low-quality vegetation, which was the only food around in any quantity. But our ancestors did not go on depending on this poor quality food. They began looking for new opportunities to get at tastier foods.

(f) What they discovered was that the African plains contained plants that hid their juicier parts underground. In the dry season, when other edible plants above ground grew scarce, the roots and bulbs of these special plants provided rich and healthy eating-but all of it below the surface, available only to animals that could claw it out. Lacking the specialized claws and teeth needed to get at these prized foods, our ancestors learnt how to fashion a stick or stone to dig out the succulent roots of plants.

(g) By now our ancestors were clearly acquiring an even more valuable skill, that of knowledge-not just in knowing how to make simple instruments, but in knowing their own habitat in close detail. They came to recognize the habits of other creatures, and to turn them to their advantages.

Circling vultures promised the remains of some animal killed not far away, a meal for the taking if they got there soon enough. They knew that adult antelopes, while impossible to catch, sometimes left their young in grass and went off to browse. Our hungry ancestors could pluck die infant like, ready fruit, if they knew here to look.

(h) In time they probably came to relay a great deal on communicating knowledge such as this to one another. This communication undoubtedly gave them the edge over many of their four-footed rivals in prizing out the secret scraps of energy-giving food that dotted the landscape.

They could make something of a living that way, if they relied on each other and carefully avoided known dangers. Our early ancestors managed to survive, if too only barely. A hard road lay ahead on their progress towards dominion over the Earth. (875 words)
Questions:
(i) On the basis of your reading of the passage answer the following questions as briefly as possible.

  • Why did it take a long time to discover evidence of our ancestors?
  • What is the discovery that led the scientists to believe that the primitive man was not an unintelligent creature?
  • What are fossils? Why do scientists study fossils?
  • How did the dwindling forests affect the life of our ancestors?
  • What threat did the wild animals pose for our ancestors?
  • Why was is not possible for our ancestors to master the animals around them?
  • How did knowledge of their habitual help our ancestors?
  • How did our ancestors manage to survive in the hostile conditions?

(ii) Pick out the words/phrases from the passage which mean the same as: (Do any 2).

  • Discovered, something by chance (para 1).
  • Got control of (para 3).
  • In a situation where someone or something has complete power over you (para 5).

Comprehension Passages – CA Foundation BCR Notes

12. Read the passage given below carefully and answer the questions that follow:
(a) So great is our passion for doing things for ourselves, that we are becoming increasingly less dependent on specialized labour. No one can plead ignorance of a subject any longer, for there are countless do it-yourself publications. Armed with the right tools and materials, newly-weds gaily embark on the task of decorating their own homes. Men of all ages spend hours of their leisure time installing their own fireplaces, laying-out their own gardens; building garages and making furniture.

Some really keen enthusiasts go so far as to make their own record players and radio transmitters. Shops cater for the do-it- yourself craze not only by running special advisory services for novices, but by offering consumers bits and pieces which they can assemble at home. Such things provide an excellent outlet for pent up creative energy, but unfortunately not all of us are born handymen.

(b) Wives tend to believe that their husbands are infinitely resourceful and versatile. Even husbands who can hardly drive a nail in straight are supposed to be born electricians, carpenters, plumbers and mechanics. When lights fuse, furniture gets rickety, pipes get clogged, or vacuum cleaners fail to operate, wives automatically assume that their husbands will some how put things right. The worst thing about the do-it-yourself game is that sometimes husbands live Under the delusion that they can do any¬thing even when they have been repeatedly proved wrong. It is a question of pride as much as anything else.

(c) Last spring my wife suggested that I can in a man to look at our lawn mower. It had broken down the previous summer, and though I promised to repair it, I had never got round to it. I wouldn’t hear of the suggestion and said that I would fix it myself. One Saturday afternoon I hauled the machine into the garden and had a close look at it.

As far as I could see, it only needed a minor adjustment: a turn of a screw here, a little tightening up there, a drop of oil and it would be as good as new. Inevitably the repair job was not quite so simple. The mower firmly refused to mow, so I decided to dismantle it. The garden was soon littered with chunks of metal which had once made up a lawn mower. But I was extremely pleased with myself. I had traced the cause of the trouble. One of the links in the chain that drives the wheels had snapped.

(d) After buying a new chain I was faced with the insurmountable task of putting the confusing jigsaw puzzle together again. I was not I surprised to find that the machine still refused to work after I had reassembled it, for the simple reason that I was left with several curiously shaped bits of metal which did not seem to fit anywhere. I gave up in despair.

The weeks passed and the grass grew. When my wife nagged me to do something about it, I told her that either I would have to buy a new mower or let the grass grow. Needless to-say that our house is now surrounded by a jungle. Buried somewhere, in deep grass there is a rusting lawn-mower which I have promised to repair one day. (539 words)
Questions:
(1) Answer the following questions briefly.

  • Why do people not rely on specialized labour so much now-a- days, according to the writer?
  • How do business organizations encourage people to do things for themselves?
  • What do wives tend to believe about their husbands?
Non-Banking Finance Companies (NBFC) – Economic, Business and Commercial Laws Important Questions

Non-Banking Finance Companies (NBFC) – Economic, Business and Commercial Laws Important Questions

Non-Banking Finance Companies (NBFC) – Economic, Business and Commercial Laws Important Questions

Question 1.
Discuss briefly the regulatory framework governing the Non-Banking Finance Companies (NBFC) in India.
Answer:
(a) Regulated by RBI: With the amendment of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 in January 1997, in terms of Section 45-IA, all Non-Banking | Financial Companies have to be mandatorily registered with the RBI.

(b) Governing Chapter: The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) is entrusted with the responsibility of regulating and supervising the Non-Banking Financial Companies by virtue of powers vested in Chapter III-B of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934.

(c) Objective: The regulatory and supervisory objective is:

  • To ensure healthy growth of the financial companies;
  • To ensure that these companies function as a part of the financial system within the policy framework, in such a manner that their existence and functioning do not lead to systemic aberrations.

(d) Benefit: The quality of surveillance and supervision exercised by the RBI over the NBFCs is sustained by keeping pace with the developments that take place in the non-banking sector of the financial system.

Question 2.
Distinguish between: Banks and Non-Banking Financial Companies
Answer:
Following are the main points of distinction between Banks and Non-Banking Financial Companies:

Points Banks Non-Banking Financial Companies
Meaning The bank is an RBI authorized financial institution that aims at providing banking services to the general public. NBFC is a company engaged in the business of loans and advances, acquisition of shares, stocks, bonds, debentures, and securities issued by Government or local authority or other marketable securities of a like nature, leasing, hire-purchase, insurance business, and chit business.
Demand deposit Banks can accept terms deposits posits as well as demand deposits. NBFCs can accept only term de¬posit but not demand deposits.
Payment & settlement system. Banks form part of the payment settlement and settlement system. NBFCs do not form part of the payment and settlement system.
Cheque Banks can issue cheques drawn on themselves. NBFCs cannot issue cheques drawn on themselves.
Credit creation Banks are termed as creators of credit through money multiplier activity. NBFCs cannot be termed as creators of credit.
Transaction Banks provide a variety of services transaction services. NBFCs do not facilitate trans-action services.
Reserve ratios Banks are required to maintain reserve ratios with RBI. NBFCs are not required to maintain reserve ratios with RBI.
Deposit Insurance Available Not available

Question 3.
Write a short note on Asset Finance Company (AFC)
Answer:
An AFC is a company that is a financial institution carrying on as its principal business the financing of physical assets which supports the productive or economic activity of the organization to be financed.

Such type of NBFC may finance a large number of assets such as

  • Automobiles,
  • Tractors,
  • Lathe machines,
  • Generator sets,
  • Earthmoving and material handling equipment,
  • Moving on own power and
  • General-purpose industrial machines.

Principal business for this purpose is defined as aggregate of financing real or physical assets supporting economic activity and income arising there-from is not less than 60% of its total assets and total income respectively.

The asset finance companies can either be deposit-taking or non-deposit-taking.

Question 4.
What are the regulations relating to the acceptance of deposits by non-banking financial companies conferred under chapter III B of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934? [Dec. 2019 (4 marks)
Answer:
Some of the important regulations relating to acceptance of deposits by NBFCs are as under:

  • Term of Deposit: The NBFCs are allowed to accept/renew public deposits for a minimum period of 12 months and a maximum period
    of 60 months. They cannot accept deposits repayable on demand.
  • Interest Rate: NBFCs cannot offer interest rates higher than the ceiling rate prescribed by RBI from time to time. The interest may be paid or compounded at rests not shorter than monthly rests.
  • Incentives/gifts: NBFCs cannot offer gifts/incentives or any other additional benefit to the depositors.
  • Credit rating: NBFCs should have a minimum investment-grade credit rating.
  • Deposit Insurance: The deposits with NBFCs are not insured.
  • Guarantee by RBI: The repayment of deposits by NBFCs is not guaranteed by RBI.
  • Disclosures: Certain mandatory disclosures are to be made about the company in the Application Form issued by the company soliciting deposits.

Question 5.
What do you mean by a Non-Banking Financial Company? Enumerate the powers of the Reserve Bank of India vested in the RBI Act for regulating and supervising the Non- Banking Financial Companies. [Dec. 2018 (4 Maries)]
Answer:
(a) Meaning of NBFC: Non-Banking Financial Company (NBFC):

  • is a company registered under the Companies Act, 1956/2013;
  • engaged in the business of loans and advances, acquisition of shares, stocks, bonds, debentures, and securities issued by Government or local authority or other marketable securities of a like nature;
  • engaged in the business of leasing, hire-purchase, insurance business, and chit business.

NBFC does not include any institution whose principal business is that of:

  • Agriculture activity,
  • Industrial activity,
  • Purchase or sale of any goods or providing any services and
  • Sale/purchase/construction of the immovable property.

(b) Power of RBI for regulation and supervision of NBFC
1. The Reserve Bank has been given the powers under the RBI Act, 1934 to register, lay down policy, issue directions, inspect, regulate, supervise and exercise surveillance over NBFCs that meet the 50-50 criteria of principal business.

2. The regulatory and supervisory power of the Reserve Bank of India is as under:

  • Ensure healthy growth of NBFC’s
  • Issue certificate of registration and prescribe net owned fund for NBFC’s
  • Regulate or prohibit the issue of prospectus or advertisements soliciting deposits of money by NBFC’s
  • Determine the policy for NBFC’s
  • Call for information and issue directions to NBFC’s
  • Prevent the affairs of any NBFC being conducted in a manner detrimental to the interest of the depositors or in a manner prejudicial to the interest of the NBFC.

Question 6.
‘Non-Banking Financial Companies’ are akin to that of banks, but they differ from banks in certain cases. Explain. [June 2019 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
(a) Meaning of NBFC:

  1. A Non-Banking Financial Company (NBFC) is a company registered under the Companies Act,
  2. Engaged in the business of loans and advances, acquisition of shares/stocks/bonds/ debentures /securities issued by Government or local authority or other marketable securities of a like nature, leasing, hire-purchase, insurance business, chit business
  3. It does not include any institution whose principal business is that of agriculture activity, industrial activity, purchase or sale of any goods (other than securities), or providing any services and sale/purchase/construction of the immovable property.

(b) Similarity between NBFC and Bank: NBFCs are doing functions similar to banks. NBFCs lend and make investments and hence their activities are akin to that of banks;

(c) Difference between NBFC and bank
There are a few differences as given below:

  • NBFC cannot accept demand deposits.
  • NBFCs do not form part of the payment and settlement system and cannot issue cheques drawn on themselves.
  • The deposit insurance facility of Deposit Insurance and Credit Guarantee Corporation is not available to depositors of NBFCs, unlike in the case of banks.

Question 7.
State the requirements for registration of Non-Banking Finance Company with Reserve Bank of India under the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 [Dec. 2019(4 Marks each)]
Answer:
(a) In terms of Section 45-IA of the RBI Act, 1934, no Non-banking Financial Company can commence or carry on the business of a non-banking financial institution without obtaining a certificate of registration from the Reserve Bank of India. There are various broad categories of NBFC’s which can apply to and be registered with the RBI.

(b) However, for applying for registration, the NBFC should comply with the following:

  1. It should be a company registered under the Companies Act, and
  2. It should have a minimum net-owned fund.

Question 8.
Write a short note on Capital Requirements ‘Systemically Important Core Investment Company’
Answer:
(a) Meaning: “Systemically important Core Investment Company (CIC- ND-SI)” means a core investment company having total assets of not less than ₹ 100 crores either individually or in aggregate along with other CICs in the Group and which raises or holds public funds.

(b) Capital Requirements for ‘Systemically Important Core Investment Company (CIC-ND-SI):
Adjusted Net Worth of a CIC-ND-SI should at no point of time be less than 30% of its aggregate risk-weighted assets on the balance sheet and risk-adjusted value of off-balance sheet items as on the date of the last audited balance sheet as at the end of the financial year prescribed under the Core Investment Companies (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016.

(c) Directions: Such NBFC needs to comply with Core Investment Companies (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016.

Question 9.
Whether permission of RBI is necessary in case of acquisition by Systemically Important Core Investment Company of other Core Investment Company if the acquisition does not result in a change in management?
Answer:
Acquisition/Transfer of Control of Systemically Important Core Investment Company (CIC-ND-SI): A systemically important CIC, shall require a prior written permission of the RBI for the following:

  1. Any takeover or acquisition of control of CIC, which may or may not result in a change of management.
  2. Any change in the shareholding of CIC, including progressive increases over time, results in the acquisition/transfer of shareholding of 2696 or more of the paid-up equity capital of the CIC. However, prior approval shall not be required in case of any shareholding going beyond 26% due to buyback of shares/reduction in capital where it has the approval of a competent Court. The same is to be reported to the RBI not later than 1 month from its occurrence.
  3. Any change in the management of the CIC results in a change in more than 30% of the directors, excluding independent directors. However, prior approval shall not be required in the case of directors who get re-elected on retirement by rotation.
  4. CICs shall continue to inform the RBI regarding any change in their directors/management not later than 1 month from the occurrence of any change.

Question 10.
State the provisions relating to registration of the Systemically Important Non-Deposit taking Company and Deposit taking Company under the relevant directions issued by the Reserve Bank of India.
Answer:
Registration: In exercise of the powers conferred under section 45-IA( 1 )(b) of the RBI Act, 1934 and all the powers enabling it in that behalf, the RBI, has specified? 200 lakhs as the Net Owned Fund (NOF) for a non-banking financial company to commence or carry on the business of the non-banking financial institution, except wherever otherwise a specific requirement as to NOF is prescribed by the RBI.

A non-banking financial company holding a Certificate of Registration issued by the RBI and having net owned fund of less than? 200 lakhs, may continue to carry on the business of the non-banking financial institution if such company achieves net owned fund of? 200 lakhs before April 1, 2017.

It will be incumbent upon such NBFCs, the NOF of which currently falls j below? 200 lakhs, to submit a statutory auditor’s certificate certifying compliance with the prescribed levels by the end of the period as given above.

NBFCs failing to achieve the prescribed level within the stipulated period shall not be eligible to hold the Certificate of Registration as NBFCs.

Question 11.
As a part of Corporate Governance, each ‘Applicable NBFC’ has to constitute some committees. Explain the role of each such committee.
Answer:
Constitution of Committees of the Board:
1. Audit Committee: All applicable NBFCs shall constitute an Audit Committee, consisting of not less than 3 members of its Board of Directors. The Audit Committee constituted u/s 177 of the Companies Act, 2013 shall be the Audit Committee for this purpose.

The Audit Committee shall have the same powers, functions, and duties as laid down in Section 177 of the Companies Act, 2013.

The Audit Committee must ensure that an Information System Audit of the internal systems and processes is conducted at least once in two years to assess operational risks faced by the applicable NBFCs.

2. Nomination Committee: All applicable NBFCs shall form a Nomination Committee to ensure the fit and proper status of proposed/existing directors.

The Nomination Committee shall have the same powers, functions, and duties as laid down in Section 178 of the Companies Act, 2013.

3. Risk Management Committee: To manage the integrated risk, all applicable NBFCs shall form a Risk Management Committee, besides the Asset Liability Management Committee.

Question 12.
State to whom the provisions of Non-Banking Financial Company – Systemically Important Non-Deposit taking Company and Deposit-Taking Company (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016 shall apply? [Dec. 2018 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
The provisions of Non-Banking Financial Company – Systemically Important Non-Deposit taking Company and Deposit taking Company (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016 shall apply to the following:

  • Every Systemically Important Non-Deposit taking Non-Banking Financial Company (NBFC-ND-SI) registered with the RBI under the provisions of the RBI Act, 1934.
  • Every Deposit-taking Non-Banking Financial Company (NBFC-D) registered with the RBI under the provisions of the RBI Act, 1934.
  • Every NBFC-Factor registered with the RBI u/s 3 of the Factoring Regulation Act, 2011 and having an asset size of ₹ 500 Crores and above.
  • Every Infrastructure Debt Fund – Non-Banking Finance Company (IDF-NBFC) registered with the RBI under the provisions of the RBI Act, 1934.
  • Every Non-Banking Finance Company – Micro Finance Institutions (NBFC-MFIs) registered with the RBI under the provisions of the RBI Act, 1934 and having an asset size of ₹ 500 Crores and above.
  • Every Non-Banking Finance Company – Infrastructure Finance Company (NBFC-IFC) registered with the RBI under the provisions of the RBI Act, 1934 and having an asset size of ₹ 500 Crores and above.

Question 13.
What are the reporting requirements for non-banking financial companies?
Answer:
Deposit accepting NBFCs are required to submit the following returns/ documents to the RBI:

  • NBS-1 Quarterly returns on deposits in First Schedule.
  • NBS-2 Quarterly return on Prudential Norms.
  • NBS-3 Quarterly return on Liquid Assets
  • NBS-4 Annual return of critical parameters by a rejected company holding public deposits.
  • NBS-5 This return stands withdrawn.
  1. Audited Balance sheet and Auditor’s Report by NBFC accepting public deposits.
  2. Branch Information Return.

Returns to be submitted by NBFCs-ND-SI:

  • NBS-7 Quarterly statement of capita! funds, risk-weighted assets, risk asset ratio, etc., for NBFC-ND-SI.
  • Monthly Return on Important Financial Parameters of NBFCs-ND-SI.
  • ALM returns such as:
  1. Statement of short term dynamic liquidity in format ALM [NBS- ALMl] – Monthly
  2. Statement of structural liquidity in format ALM [NBS-ALM2] – Half-yearly
  3. Statement of Interest Rate Sensitivity in format ALM [NBS-ALM3] – Half-yearly
  4. Branch Information return.

Economic, Business and Commercial Laws Questions and Answers

Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material

Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material

Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material

Question 1.
Rules applicable in absence of partnership deed.
Answer:
Rules applicable in absence of partnership deed:
In the absence of any provision in partnership deed, following provisions of partnership Act are applicable:

  • Profit/Loss sharing ratio will be equal
  • No interest is to be allowed on capital
  • No interest is to be charged on drawings
  • 6% per annum interest is to be given on partner’s loan
  • No salary is to be paid to any partner
  • Interest and salary, if payable, will be paid only if there is profit unless agreement provides otherwise.
  • Student should use above, whenever question is silent with regard to this items.

Question 2.
Meaning of Limited Liability Partnership.
Answer:
Limited Liability Partnership:
A need has been felt to make a new legislation related to a new corporate form of business organization in India to meet with the contemporary growth of the Indian economy. It provides an alternative to the traditional partnership with unlimited liability on the one hand and the statute-based governance structure of the limited liability company on the other hand, in order to enable professional expertise and entrepreneurial initiative to combine, organize and operate in flexible, innovative and efficient manner.

Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) is a corporate business organization that provides the benefits of limited liability but also allows its members the flexibility of organizing their internal structure j ust like in case of a partnership, based on a mutually arrived agreement. The LLP form enables entrepreneurs, professionals and enterprises providing services of any kind or engaged in scientific and technical disciplines, to form commercially efficient vehicles suited to their requirements. Owing to flexibility in its structure and operation, the LLP is a suitable vehicle for small enterprises and for investment by venture capital.

A LLP is a new form of legal business entity with limited liability. It is a separate legal entity where LLP itself is liable to the third parties upto the assets it owns but the liability of the partners is limited. It is an alternative corporate business vehicle that not only gives the benefits of limited liability at low compliance cost but allows its partners the flexibility of organising their internal structure as a traditional partnership. It gives the benefits of limited liability of a company and the flexibility of a partnership.

LLP is also called as a hybrid between a company and a partnership as it contains elements of both, a corporate entity as well as a partnership. Since LLP contains elements of both ‘a corporate structure’ as well as ‘a partnership firm structure’ LLP is called a hybrid between a company and a partnership.

Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material

Question 3.
Salient features of LLP
Answer:
Characteristic/Salient features of LLP are:
1. A body corporate:
A LLP is a body corporate formed and incorporated under LLP Act and is a legal entity separate from the partners constituting it. [Sec. 3]

2. Separate Legal Entity:
The LLP is a separate legal entity. It is liable to the full extent of its assets but liability of the partners is limited to their agreed contribution in the LLP. In other words, creditors of LLP shall be the creditors of LLP alone and not of the partners.

3. Perpetual Succession:
Death, insanity, retirement or insolvency of partners has no impact on the existence of LLP. The LLP can continue its existence irrespective of changes in partners. It can enter into contracts in its own name. It can also hold properties in its own name. It is created by law and law alone can dissolve it.

4. Absence of Mutual Agency:
The cardinal principal of mutual agency of partners in a partnership is missing in LLP. In case of LLP, the partners of LLP are agents of LLP alone and not of the other partners. Hence, no partner can be held liable on account of the independent or un-authorized actions of other partners. Thus individual partners cannot be held liable for liability incurred by another partner’s wrongful business decisions or misconduct.

5. LLP Agreement:
The partners are free to make rules related to the mutual rights and duties of the partners as per their choice. This is done through an agreement. In the absence of any such agreement, the mutual rights and duties shall be governed by the provisions of the LLP Act, 2008.

6. Artificial Person:
A LLP is an Artificial legal person created by law capable of enjoying all the rights of an individual. It can do everything which a natural person can do, except the contracts of very personal nature like, it cannot marry, it cannot go to jail, cannot take an oath, cannot marry or get divorce. Further, it cannot practice a learned profession like CA, Law or Medicine. A LLP is invisible, intangible, immortal but not fictitious because it really exists.

7. Common Seal:
Being an artificial person, a LLP work on its own but it has to act through its partners. Hence, it may have a common seal which can be considered as its official signature. [Section 14(c)]. It should be noted that it is not mandatory for a LLP to have a common seal. If it decides to have one, then it shall remain under the custody of some responsible official and it shall be a fixed in the presence of at least 2 designated partners of the LLP.

8. Limited Liability:
Every partner of a LLP is, for the purpose of the business of LLP, the agent of the LLP, but not of other partners (Section 26). The liability of the partners will be limited to their agreed contribution in the LLP.

9. Management of Business:
The partners in the LLP are entitled to manage the business of LLP. However, only the designated partners are responsible for legal com¬pliances.

10. Minimum and Maximum number of Partners:
Every LLP shall have least two partners and shall also have at least 2 individuals as designated partners. It is mandatory that at least one of the designated partners shall be resident in India. Further, there is no maximum limit of partners in LLP.

11. Business for profit Only:
LLP can be formed only for carrying on any lawful business with a view to earn profit. Thus, LLP cannot be formed for charitable or not-for- profit purpose.

12. Investigation:
The Central Government shall have powers to investigate the affairs of an LLP by appointment of competence authority.

13. Compromise or Arrangement:
Any compromise or arrangement including merger and amalgamation of LLPs shall be in accordance with the provisions of the LLP Act, 2008.

14. Conversion into LLP:
A firm, private company or an unlisted public company would be allowed to be converted into LLP in accordance with the provisions of LLP Act, 2008.

15. E-Filling of Documents:
Every form or application of document required to be led or delivered under the act and rules made thereunder, shall be led in computer read¬able electronic form on its website www.mca.gov.in and authenticated by a partner or designated partner of LLP by the use of electronic or digital signature.

16. Foreign LLPs:
Section 2(l)(m) defines foreign limited liability partnership “as a limited liability partnership formed, incorporated, or registered outside India which established a place of business within India”. Foreign LLP can become a partner in an Indian LLP.

Advantages of LLP Form:
The following are the advantages of LLP form of business organization:

  • It is easier to form a LLP as compared to a company.
  • The partners of a LLP enjoy limited liability.
  • It operates on the basis of an agreement.
  • It is not rigid as far as capital structure is concerned.
  • It provides flexibility without imposing detailed legal and procedural requirements.
  • It is easy to dissolve an LLP as compared to a Company.

Question 4.
Essential elements to incorporate LLP.
Answer:
Under the LLP Act, 2008, the following elements are very essential to form a LLP in India:

  • Persons intending to incorporate a LLP shall decide a name for the LLP.
  • A LLP shall execute a limited liability partnership agreement between the partners inter se or between the LLP and its partners. In the absence of any agreement the provisions as set out in First Schedule of LLP Act, 2008 will be applied.
  • Then they shall complete and submit the incorporation document in the form prescribed with the Registrar electronically, along with the prescribed fees.
  • There must be at least two partners for incorporation of LLP [Individual or body corporate].
  • A LLP shall have a registered office in India so as to send and receive communications.
  • It should appoint atleast two individuals as designated partners who will be responsible for number of duties including doing of all acts, matters and things as are required to be done by the LLP. At least one of them should be resident in India. Each designated partner shall hold a Designated Partner Identification Number (DPIN) which is allotted by MCA.
  • As soon as the process is completed, a certificate of registration shall be issued which shall contain a Limited Liability Partnership Identification Number (LLPIN)

Steps or process for incorporating an LLP:
Step 1: Reservation of name

  • The first step while incorporating a LLP is the reservation of name of LLP.
  • The name of a LLP shall not be similar to that of an existing LLP, Company or a Partnership Firm.
  • The applicant has to file e-form 1, for ascertaining the availability and reservation of name. 6 names in order of preference can be indicated.
  • The name should contain the suffix “Limited Liability Partnership” or “LLP”.

Step 2: Incorporation

  • In the second step, the applicant has to file e-form 2 for incorporating a new LLP.
  • This form contains the details of the proposed LLP and the Partners and Designated Partners along with their consent to act as such.

Step 3: Execute a LLP Agreement –
→ It is mandatory to execute LLP Agreement. [Sec. 23]

→ LLP agreement shall be filed with the registrar in e-form 3 within 30 days of incorporation of LLP.

→ The contents of the LLP Agreement are enumerated below:

  • Name of LLP
  • Name and address of partners and designated partners
  • Form of contribution & interest on contribution
  • Profit sharing ratio
  • Remuneration of Partners
  • Rights & Duties of Partners
  • Proposed Business
  • Rules for governing LLP.

Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material

Question 5.
Partnership and Joint Venture Comparison.
Answer:
Partnership and Joint Venture Comparison:
→ When two or more persons join together, to do business on joint ac¬count on regular basis & to share the profits or losses such relationship is known as partnership & the persons are known as partners.

→ When two or more persons join temporarily to do a particular job or work & to share profits or losses, is known as joint venture & the persons are known as coventurer’s.

→ Partnership is a relationship between persons who have agreed to share profits or losses of a business carried on by all or any of them acting for all.

→ Whereas, a joint venture is a contractual agreement whereby two or more parties undertake an economic activity which is subject to joint control.

→ Thus joint venture is a temporary partnership formed for a particular economic activity or venture.

→ The following additional differences exist between joint venture and other forms of partnership.

  • Accrual basis of accounting is followed in case of partnership and a joint venture generally follows cash basis of accounting.
  • The financial results of a partnership are obtained at regular intervals i.e. on annual basis. On the other hand, the financial results of a joint venture are obtained generally at the end of the venture.

Question 6.
LLP & Partnership firm.
Answer:
LLP & Partnership firm:

Basis LLP Partnership
1. Regulating Act The Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008. The Indian Partnership Act, 1932.
2. Body corporate It is a body corporate. It is not a body corporate.
3, Separate legal entity It is a legal entity separate from its members. It is a group of persons with no separate legal entity.
4. Creation It is created by a legal process called registration under the LLP Act, 2008. It is created by an agreement between the partners.
5. Registration Registration is mandatory. LLP can sue and be sued in its own name. Registration is voluntary. Only the registered partnership firm can sue the third parties.
6. Perpetual succession The death, insanity, retirement or insolvency of the partner(s) does not affect its existence of LLP. Members may join or leave but its existence continues forever. The death, insanity retirement or insolvency of the partner(s) may affect its existence. It has no perpetual succession.
7. Name Name of the LLP to contain the word Limited Liability Partners (LLP) as suffix. No guidelines. The partners can have any name as per their choice.
8. Liability Liability of each partner limited to the extent to agreed contribution except in case of wilful fraud. Liability of each partner is unlimited. It can be extended upto the personal assets of the partners.
9. Mutual agency Each partner can bind the LLP by his own acts but not the other partners. Each partner can bind the firm as well as other partners by his own acts.
10. Designated partners At least two designated partners and atleast one of them shall be resident in India. There is no provision for such partners under the Indian Partnership Act, 1932.
11. Common seal It may have its common seal as its official signatures. There is no such concept in partnership
12. Legal compliances Only designated partners are responsible for all the compliances and penalties under this Act. All partners are responsible for all the compliances and penalties under the Act.
13. Annual filing of documents LLP is required to file:
(i) Annual statement of accounts
(ii) Statement of solvency
(iii) Annual return with the registration of LLP every year
Partnership firm is not required to file any annual document with the registrar of firms.
14. Foreign partnership Foreign nationals can become a partner in a LLP. Foreign nationals cannot become a partner in a partnership firm.
15. Minor as partner Minor cannot he admitted to the benefits of LLP. Minor can be admitted to the benefits of the partnership with the prior consent of the existing partners.

Question 7.
LLP & Limited Liability Company.
Answer:
LLP & Limited Liability Company:

Basis LLP Limited Liability Company
1. Regulating Act The LLP Act, 2008. The Companies Act, 2013.
2. Members/Partners The persons who contribute to LLP are known as partners of the LLP. The persons who invest the money in the shares are known as members of the company.
3. Internal governance structure The internal governance structure of a LLP is governed by agreement between the partners. The internal governance structure of a company is regulated by statute (i.e., Companies Act, 2013).
4. Name Name of the LLP to contain the word “Limited Liability Partnership” or “LLP” as suffix. Name of the public company to contain the word “limited” and Private company to contain the word “Private limited” as suffix.
5. Number of members/ partners Minimum – 2 members Maximum – No such limit on the members in the Act. Private company: Minimum – 2 members
Maximum – 200 members Public company:
Minimum – 7 members Maximum – No such limit on the members.
Members can be organizations, trusts, another business form or individuals.
6. Liability of members/ partners The members of the LLP can be individuals / or body corporate through the nominees. Liability of a member is limited to the amount unpaid on the shares held by them.
7. Management Liability of a partners is limited to the extent of agreed contribution except in case of wilful fraud. The affairs of the company are managed by board of directors elected by the share-holders.
8. Minimum number of directors/ designated partners The business of the company managed by the partners including the designated partners authorized in the agreement. Private Co. – 2 directors

Public Co. – 3 directors

Question 8.
A, B & C were partners in a firm. Their partnership deed provides the following:
(a) Interest on capital will be allowed @ 1096 p.a
(b) Interest on drawing will be charged @ 1096 p.a
(c) A is entitled for ₹ 2000 per month as salary
(d) 1096 of the net profit is to be transferred to reserve
(e) A is entitled for 1096 of Net profit as his commission
(f) B is entitled for 1096 of Net profit as his commission after charging his commission
(g) C is entitled for 1096 of Net Profit as his commission after charging A’s commission, B’s commission & his own commission
(h) Profits were to be shared in the following manner:
(i) Upto ₹ 30,000 in equal ratio
(ii) Above ₹ 30,000 in 5 : 3 : 2
On 1st January 2015, their capital were₹ 60,000,₹ 80,000 & ₹ 50,000 respectively. During the year they withdrew ₹ 8,000, ₹ 12,000 & ₹ 6,000 respectively as their drawings. During the year 2015, the firm earned Net profit of ₹ 1,62,000, it was later discovered that while calculating profit of the year, depreciation of ₹ 18,000 on Plant was overlooked.
Prepare Profit & Loss Appropriation Account for year 2015.
Solution:
Profit & Loss Appropriation Account
for the year ended 31st, December 2015
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 1
Working Notes:
1.Calculation of Divisible Profit:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 2

Question 9.
A, B, C were partners in a firm sharing profit in the ratio 5:3:2. They distributed their profits of ₹ 30,000 of the year in equal ratio. Give necessary entry for the effect.
Solution:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 3
Rectified Entry:

B’s Capital A/c                Dr. 1,000
C’s Capital A/c                Dr. 4,000
To A’s Capital A/c 5,000

(Being the adjustment made for profit divided in wrong ratio)

Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material

Question 10.
The Chartered Accountants X, Y and Z form a partnership, profits being divisible in the ratio of 3 : 2 : 1 subject to the following:
i. Z’s share of profit is guaranteed to be not less than ₹ 15,000 p.a.

ii. Y gives guarantee to the effect that gross fees earned by him for the firm shall be equal to his average gross fee of the preceding five years when he was carrying on profession alone (which average works out at ₹ 25,000).
The profit for the first year of the Partnership is ₹ 75,000. The gross fees earned by Y for the firm are ₹ 16,000. You are required to show the distribution of profits.
Solution:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 4
Summary
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 5

Question 11.
A and B were in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 3:2. In appreciation of the services of their clerk C. Who was in receipt of a salary of ₹ 2,400 p.a. and a commission of 5% on the net profit after charging such salary and commission. They took him into partnership as from 1st April, 2005, giving him one-eight share of profits.
The agreement provided that any excess over his former remuneration to which, C becomes entitled will be born by A and B in the ratio of 2:3.
The profit for the year ended 31st March, 2006, amounted to ₹ 44,400. Prepare statement showing the distribution of the profit amongst all the partners.
Solution:
(i) Share of ‘C’ as partner 44,400 X 1/8 = 5,550

(ii) C’s remuneration as clerk

Profit

(-) Salary to clerk

Profit before commission

(-) Commission 42000 x 5/105

Profit after Salary & comm.

44,400

2,400

42,000

2,000

40,000

Total remuneration to ‘C’ 2,400 + 2,000 = 4,400

(iii) Excess to ‘C (i) – (ii) = 5,550 – 4,400 = 1,150 to be borne by A & B as follows:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 5a
Summary:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 6

Question 12.
X,Y & Z start business in partnership, X put in ₹ 20,000 for the whole year, Y puts ₹ 30,000 at first and increases it to ₹ 40,000 at the end of four months but withdraws ₹ 20,000 at the end of six months, while Z puts ₹ 40,000 at first but withdraws ₹ 10,000 at the end of nine-months. At the end of the year how should they divide a profit of ₹ 79,000 on the basis of effective capital employed by each partner?
Solution:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 7
Profit = ₹ 79,000
To be divided in the ratio of effective capital, which in monthly terms is 2,40,000 : 3,20,000 : 4,50,000, among X, Y & Z. i.e. 24 : 32 : 45

X’s share = 79,000 X 24/101=

Y’s share = 79,000 X 32/101=

Z’s share = 79,000 X 45/101=

18,772

25,030

35,198

79,000

Question 13.
Partners A & B are sharing in the ratio of 3:2 (i.e. 3/5 & 2/5). They admit C. Calculate new ratio in the following alternative cases.
Solution:
(1) ‘C’ is admitted with 1/6th share.
C’s share is 1 /6th of the total profit.
∴Balance profit left for A & B = 1 – 1/6 = 5/6.
Because nothing is specified we will assume that A & B will share balance in old ratio.
∴ A’s share – 5/6 X 3/5 = 15/30 = 3/6 & B’s share = 5/6 X 2/5 = 10/30 = 2/6
Thus the new ratio of A, B & C will be 3/6, 2/6 & 1/6 or 3 : 2 : 1

(2) ‘C’ is admitted with 1 / 6th share & ‘A’ & ‘B’ decided to share equally in future.
‘C’ share = 1/6 ∴ Balance is 5/6
which will be shared equally by A & B.
∴ \(\frac { 5 }{ 6 }\) x \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) = \(\frac { 2.5 }{ 6 }\) and B’s are \(\frac { 5 }{ 6 }\) x \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) = \(\frac { 2.5 }{ 6 }\) = \(\frac { 5 }{ 12 }\)
Thus the New Ratio of A, B & C = 5/12, 5/12, 2/12 OR 5 : 5 : 2

(3) ‘C’ is admitted with 1 / 6th share, which he purchased from B.
C’s share =1/6 which will come from B
∴ B’s New share = 2/5 – 1/6 = 12/30 – 5/30 = 7/30.
∴ A’s New share will remain as the old share i.e. 3/5 = 18/30.
Thus, the New Ratio of A, B & C will be 3/5, 7/30 & 1/6. i.e. 18/30, 7/30, 5/30 i.e. 18 : 7 : 5

(4) ‘C’ is admitted with 1 /6th share which he bought from A & B in 2:3 ratio.
C’s share is 1 / 6
Purchased from ‘A’ 1/6 x 2/5 = 2/30
Purchased from ‘B’ 1/6 x 3/5 = 3/30
∴ A’s share 3/5 – 2/30 = 18/30 – 2/30 = 16/30 & B’s share 2/5 – 3/30 = 12/30 – 3/30 = 9/30
Thus, the New Ratio of A, B, C will be 16/30, 9/30 & 5/30 le. 16:9:5

(5) ‘C’ is admitted. He purchased 1/3rd of A’s share & 2/3rd of B’s share.
C’s share = Purchased from A + Purchased from B
Purchased from A = 3/5 x 1/3 = 1/5 i.e. 3/15
Purchased from B = 2/5 x 2/3 = 4/15
∴ A’s share = 3/5 – 1/5 = 2/5 = 6/15
B’s share = 2/5 – 4/15 = 6/15 – 4/15 = 2/15
C’s share = 1/5 + 4/15 = 3/15 + 4/15 = 7/15
Thus, the New Ratio of A, B, C will be 6/15, 2/15 & 7/15 i.e. 6 : 2 : 7.
(1) When we say new partner is purchasing share that means old partners are selling their share. Similarly in case of death/retirement, outgoing partner will sell his share and other will purchase it.

(2) Similarly ratios will be worked out in case of Retirement/Death. In such cases wording may be like outgoing partners sells his share or other partner purchases share from the outgoing partner. When nothing is specified, it can be assumed that the remaining partner will continue to share in their old ratio.

Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material

Question 14.
X, Y and Z were sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 1/2: 1/3: 1/6 respectively. The firm had insured the partner’s lives severally. The surrender values of the life policies appearing in the balance sheet as at 31st March, 2006 were – X for ₹ 5,000, Y for ₹ 4,000 and Z for ₹ 3,000. The surrender values represents 50% of the sum assured in each case. Y and Z decide to share equally in future. Give the necessary journal entries assuming (a) If X retires on 31-3-2006 (b) If X dies on 31-3-2006.
Solution:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 8

Question 15.
A, B and C were partners sharing profits, and losses in the ratio of 2:2:1. C retired on 1st July, 2005 on which date the capitals of A, B and C after all necessary adjustments stood at t 74,000, ₹ 63,750 and 42,250 respectively. A and B continued to carry on the business for six months without settling the accounts of C. During the period of six months from 1 -7-2005, a profit of ₹ 20,500 is earned by the use of the firm’s property. State which of the two options available u/s 37 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932 should be exercised by C.
Solution:
(i) Share in the subsequent profits attributable to the use of his balance.
\(\frac{₹ 42,250}{₹ 1,80,000}\) x ₹ 20,500 = ₹ 4,812

(ii) Interest @ 6% p.a. on the use of his balance = ₹ 42,250 x 6/12 x 6/100 = ₹ 1,267.50
C should exercise option (i) since the amount payable to him under this option is more as compared to the amount payable to him under option (ii).

Question 16.
X and Y are in partnership sharing profits and losses as 3:2. They admit Z into the firm, Z paying a premium (share in goodwill) of ₹ 36,000 for 1 /6th share of the profits. As between themselves, X and Y agree to share future profits and losses equally. Draft journal entry showing the appropriation of premium (goodwill) money.
Solution:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 9
This means that ‘X’ has sacrificed 11/60, whereas ‘Y’ has gained 1 /60 & ‘Z’ has gained 10/60. ‘Z’ is bringing ₹ 36,000 as Goodwill for 10/60 share.
∴ Total goodwill of the firm = \(\frac{36,000 \times 60}{10}\) = 2,16,000
Y is also gaining (means his new ratio is higher)
∴ He will also have to contribute towards goodwill to the extent of his gain.
∴ His contribution = 2,16,000 x 1/60 = 3,600
X has sacrified in favour of Y and Z
∴ He should get the credit for it.

Question 17.
A and B were partners in 1:1. They admitted C as a new partner for 1 / 5th share. At the time of his admission following Revaluation were made:
Building of ₹ 60,000 at ₹ 1,00,000
Plant of ₹ 40,000 at ₹ 30,000
Creditors of ₹ 50,000 at ₹ 70,000
At the time of revaluation some unrecorded investment of ₹ 20,000 were found. Show necessary Accounting treatment in the following cases:
Case I. When Revised figures of Assets and Liabilities were to be shown in the Balance Sheet of the New Firm (or When Revaluation A/c is to be prepared)
Case II. When Revised figures of Assets and Liabilities were not to be taken in the Balance Sheet of the New Firm (or When Memorandum Revaluation Account is to be prepared)
Solution:
Case I:
Revaluation Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 10
Journal entries:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 11
(Being transfer of profit on revaluation to old partners in their old profit sharing ratio)
Case II:
Memorandum Revaluation Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 12

C’s Capital A/c                  Dr. 6,000
To A’s Capital A/c 3,000
To B’s Capital A/c 3,000

(Being adjustment of profit or loss on revaluation made among the partners)

Question 18.
A and B were partners in a firm in equal ratio. They admit C as a new partner for 1 /5th share. C introduced the required sum of capital and his share of goodwill of ₹ 4,000 in cash. On the date the following balances appears in the books of the firm:

A’s Capital A/c 36,000
B’s Capital A/c 24,000
Profit on Revaluation 12,000
General Reserve 6,000
Profit & Loss (Dr. Balance) 6,000
Workmen Compensation Fund 5,000

There was Workmen Compensation liability of 11000. Calculate the amount of capital of the Incoming Partner.
Solution:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 13
Working Note:

Total capital of A & B for 4/5th Share (46,000+34,000) 80,000
Total capital of the firm (on the basis of capital of A&B) (80,000 x 5/4) 1,00,000
Capital of C for 1 /5th Share (1,00,000 x 1/5) 20,000

Question 19.
A and B were partners in a firm. They admit C for 1 / 5th share. C introduced ₹ 40,000 as his Capital. On the date following balances appeared in the books of the firm:

A’s Capital A/c 47,000
B’s Capital A/c 32,000
Loss on Revaluation 1,000
General Reserve 3,000
Investment Fluctuation fund 20,000

On the date Investment of the firm of ₹ 50,000 was valued at ₹ 42,000. Give necessary accounting treatment regarding Goodwill.
Solution:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 14
Calculation of Hidden Goodwill:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 15
Journal Entry:

C’s Capital A/c                  Dr. 13,400
To A’s Capital A/c 6,700
To B’s Capital A/c 6,700

(Being incoming partner’s current account debited for his share of goodwill & credited to old partners in their sacrificing ratio).

Question 20.
Messrs Dalai, Banerji and Malick is a firm sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 2:2:1. Their Balance Sheet as on 31st March, 2006, is shown as below:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 16
The partners have agreed to take Mr. Mistri as a partner with effect from 1st April, 2006 on the following terms:
(a) Mr. Mistri shall bring ₹ 5,000 towards his capital and required sum of goodwill.
(b) The value of stock should be increased by ₹ 2,500.
(c) Provision for bad and doubtful debts should be provided at 10% of the debtors.
(d) Furniture should be depreciated by 10%.
(e) The value of land and buildings should be enhanced by 20%.
(f) The value of the goodwill be fixed at ₹ 15,000.
(g) General Reserve will be transferred to the Partners’ Capital Accounts.
(h) The new profit sharing ratio of Dalai, Banerji, Malick and Mistri shall be 5:5:3:2.
(i) The Outstanding liabilities include ₹ 1,000 due to Mr. Sen which has been paid by Mr. Dalai. Necessary entries were not made in the books.
Prepare –
(i) Revaluation Account
(ii) The Capital Accounts of the partners, and
(iii) The Balance Sheet of the firm as newly constituted.
Solution:
Revaluation A/c
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 17
Capital Accounts of Partners
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 18
Balance Sheet of M/s. Dalai, Banerji, Malick & Mistri as on 1st April, 2006
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 19
Working Note:
1.Calculation of Sacrifice/Gain of Partners:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 20

2.Goodwill Treatment:

Mistri’s Capital A/c (15000 x 2/15)    Dr. 2,000
To Dalai’s Capital A/c (15000 x 1/15) 1,000
To Banerji’s Capital A/c (15000 x 1/15) 1,000

Question 21.
Gopal and Govind are partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio 60:40. The firms Balance Sheet as on 31-3-2006 was as follows:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 21
Due to financial difficulties, they have decided to admit Guru as a Partner in the firm from 1-4-2006 on the following terms:
Guru will be paid 40% of the profits. Guru will bring in cash ₹ 1,00,000 as capital. It is agreed that goodwill of the firm will be valued at 2 years purchase of 3 years normal average profits of the firm and Guru will bring in cash for his share of Goodwill. It was also decided that the partners will not withdraw their share of goodwill nor will the goodwill appear in the books of account.

The profits of the previous three years were as follows:

  • For the year ended 31-3-2004 Profit ₹ 20,000 (includes insurance claim received of ₹ 40,000).
  • For the year ended 31.3.2005 Loss₹ 80,000 (includes voluntary retirement compensation paid ₹ 1,10,000).
  • For the year ended 31.3.2006 Profit of ₹ 1,05,000 (includes a profit of ₹ 25,000 on the sale of assets).

It was decided to revalue the assets on 31.3.2006 as follows:

Fixed Assets 4,00,000
Investments Nil
Current Assets 1,80,000
Loans and Advances 1,00,000

The new profit sharing ratio after the admission of Guru was 35 : 25 : 40.
Pass Journal Entries on admission, show goodwill calculation and prepare Revaluation Account, Partners Capital Accounts and Balance Sheet as on 1.4.2006 after the admission of Guru.
Solution:
Calculation & Adjustment for Goodwill.
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 22
Entry:

Cash a/c  Dr. 24,000
To Gopal 15,000
To Govind 9,000

Capital Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 23
Revaluation A/c
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 24
Balance Sheet as on 1st April 2006
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 25

Question 22.
The Balance Sheet of A & B, a partnership firm, as at 31st March, 2006 is as follows:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 26
A & B share profits and losses as 1:2, They agree to admit C (who is also in business on his own) as a third partner from 1-4-2006.
The Assets are revalued as under:
Goodwill – ₹ 18,000, Land and Building ₹ 30,000, Furniture ₹ 6,000.
C brings the following assets into the partnership Goodwill ₹ 6,000, Furniture ₹ 2,800, Stock ₹ 13,600.
Profits in the new firm are to be shared equally by the three partners and the Capital Accounts are to be so adjusted as to be equal. For this purpose, additional cash should be brought in by the partner or partners concerned.
Prepare the necessary accounts and the opening Balance Sheet of new firm, showing the amounts of cash, if any, which each partner may have to provide.
Solution:
Capital Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 27
Revaluation A/c
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 28
Cash/Bank A/c
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 29
Balance Sheet
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 30
It represents personal goodwill of incoming partner, brought by C as asset, later on written off in new ratio.
Working Notes:
(1) Goodwill Treatment:

C’s Capital A/c (18000 x 1/3).   Dr. 6,000
To B’s Capital A/c (18000 x 1/3) 6,000

(Being adjustment for goodwill made between the partners)

(2) Calculation of Sacrifice/Gain:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 30a

Adjustment of Capital:
→ Capital can be adjusted if required by the question.

→ It can be adjusted in any ratio and taking anybody’s capital as base.

→ But if not clarified in the question then adjust in profit sharing ratio.

→ If not clarified take total capital as base, in this case partner whose cap¬ital is short will bring cash and cash will be repaid to the partner whose capital is excess. Total capital will remain unchanged.

→ If highest capital (highest capital per share of profit) is taken as base then other partners capital will fell short and they will contribute the required cash (in this question it was hinted that partner or partners shall bring cash). Total capital will increase.

→ If smallest capital (smallest capital per share of profit) is taken as base then other partners capital will show excess capital and the same will be repaid to them.

→ Adjustment of capital can be done through cash or through current account.

Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material

Question 23.
The following is the balance sheet of A and B who share profits and losses as 4/7 and 3/7:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 31
They agree to take C into partnership and give him a share of 20 paise in the rupee subject to the following terms and conditions:

  1. C is to contribute capital @ ₹ 12000 for each 10 paise share in the rupee.
  2. Land and Buildings are to be increased to ₹ 40000.
  3. Machinery is to be depreciated by 1096 and Furniture by ₹ 500.
  4. Stock is to be appreciated by ₹ 1000.
  5. Goodwill of the firm is to be valued at 2 years’ purchase of average profits of the last three years. (Profits for the last three years were ₹ 14500, ₹ 20000 and ₹ 22500.)
  6. A provision of 2 1/2% is to be made for bad debts and another of ₹ 2500 for outstanding expenses.
  7. A trade creditor for ₹ 1600 is not traceable for a number of years and the amount is to be written back.

Show Journal entries and capital accounts of the partners assuming no goodwill account is to be opened and the book values of assets and liabilities are not to be disturbed.
Also prepare the Balance Sheet of the new firm.
Solution:
Working notes:
(1) New Profit sharing ratio:
C comes for 20 paise share in the rupee, i.e., for share, the share left for A and B is (1 – \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 }\)) or \(\frac { 4 }{ 5 }\)
So, A’s share is \(\frac { 4 }{ 7 }\) of \(\frac { 4 }{ 5 }\) or \(\frac { 16 }{ 35 }\)
And, B’s share is \(\frac { 3 }{ 7 }\) of \(\frac { 4 }{ 5 }\) or \(\frac { 12 }{ 35 }\)
Hence, new ratio is \(\frac { 16 }{ 35 }\) : \(\frac { 12 }{ 35 }\) : \(\frac { 7 }{ 35 }\)
Value of Goodwill:
Average profit of the last three years : \(\frac{1,500+20,000+22,500}{3}\) = ₹ 19,000
Value of Goodwill on the basis of 2 years’ purchase ₹ 19,000 x 2 = ₹ 38,000
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 32
(3) Adjustment required:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 33
Journal Entry
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 34
Capital A/c
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 35
Balance Sheet as at …..
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 36

Question 24.
On 31st March 2006, the Balance Sheet of M/s. Ram, Rahul and Rohit sharing profits and losses in proportion to their capitals, stood as follows:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 37
On 31st March, 2006, Ram desired to retire from the firm and the remaining partners decided to carry on. It was agreed to revalue the Assets and Liabilities on that date on the following basis:
1. Land and Buildings be appreciated by 30%.
2. Machinery be depreciated by 20%.
3. Closing stock to be valued at ₹ 80,000.
4. Provision for bad debts be made at 5%.
5. Old credit balances of Sundry Creditors ₹ 10,000 be written back.
6. Joint Life Policy of the partners surrendered and cash obtained ₹ 60,000.
7. Goodwill of the entire firm be valued at ₹ 1,80,000 and Ram’s share of the Goodwill be adjusted in the Accounts of Rahul and Rohit who share the future profits equally. No Goodwill account being raised.
8. Total capital of the firm is to be the same as before retirement. Individual capital be in their profit sharing ratio.
9. Amount due to Ram is to be settled on the following basis: 5096 on re¬tirement & the balance 5096 within 1 year.
Prepare Revaluation Account, Capital Account of Partners, Rahul & Rohit. Loan Account of Ram, Cash Account and Balance Sheet as on 1.4.06 of M/s. Rahul and Rohit.
Solution:
Capital A/c
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 38
Revaluation A/c
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 39
Cash/Bank A/c
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 40
Adjustment of Goodwill

Rahul                  Dr. 30,000
Rohit                   Dr. 60,000
To Ram 90,000

Joint life policy A/
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 41
Balance Sheet as on 1st April, 2006
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 42

Question 25.
Dowell & Co. is a partnership firm with partners Mr. A, Mr. B and Mr. C, sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 10:6:4. The Balance Sheet of the firm as at 31st March, 2006 is as under:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 43
It was mutually agreed that Mr. B will retire from partnership and in his place Mr. D will be admitted as a partner with effect from 1 st April, 2006. For this purpose, the following adjustments are to be made:
i. Goodwill is to be valued at ₹ 1 lakh but the same will not appear as an asset in the books of the reconstituted firm.
ii. Buildings and Plant & Machinery are to be depreciated by 5 per cent and 20 per cent respectively. Investments are to be taken over by the retiring partner at ₹ 15,000. Provision of 20 per cent is to be made on debtors to cover doubtful debts.
iii. In the reconstituted firm, the total capital will be ₹ 2 lakhs which will be contributed by Mr. A, Mr. C and Mr. D in their new proRt sharing ratio, which is 2 : 2 : 1.
iv. The surplus funds, if any, will be used for repaying the Bank Overdraft.
v. The amount due to the retiring partner shall be transferred to his loan account.
You are to prepare:
(a) Revaluation A/c;
(b) Partner’s Capital Accounts;
(c) Bank Account; and
(d) Balance Sheet of the reconstituted firm as on 1st April, 2006.
Solution:
Capital Account:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 44
₹ 2,00,000 capital balance is written in new ratio 2:2:1 and the shortfall in capital account then is contributed by the new partners A, C & D.
Revaluation Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 45
Cash/Bank Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 46
Table of Goodwill Adjustment
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 47
Balance Sheet as on 1st April, 2006
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 48G

Question 26.
X, Y and Z are partners sharing profits and losses in the proportion of 3:2:2 respectively. The Balance Sheet of the firm as on 1-1-2006 was as follows:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 49
X retired on 1-1-2006, on which date R is admitted as a new partner. For the purpose of adjusting the rights as between old partners, goodwill to be valued at ₹ 42,000 and Sundry Debtors and Stock to be reduced by ₹ 8,000 and to ₹ 50,000 respectively. X is to receive ₹ 22,000 in cash on the date of retirement and the balance due to him is to remain as loan at 896 p.a. Repayment of loan to be made at the end of each year by annual instalments representing 2596 of the future profit before charging interest on loan.

R is to bring in ₹ 50,000 in cash as his capital on the date of admission. The new partners are to share profits and losses equally after paying the interest on X’s loan.

The net profit for the year ended 31st Dec., 2006, is ₹ 32,000 before taking into account the instalment payable to X.
You are required to show :
(a) Profit and Loss Appropriation Account for the year ended 31st Dec., 2006.
(b) Capital Accounts of the new partners; and
(c) X’s Loan Account as on 31st Dec., 2006.
Solution:
Revaluation Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 50
Capital Accounts
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 51
Working Notes:
1. Calculation of Gain/Sacrifice:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 52

2. Goodwill Treatment:

Y(42,000 x 1/21) Dr. 2,000
Z(42,000 x 1/21) Dr. 2,000
R(42,000 x 7/21) Dr. 14,000
To x (42,000 x 9/21) 18,000

(Being adjustment for goodwill made between the partners)
X’s Loan Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 53
Repayment of loan is 25°6 of profit before interest i.e. 32,000 X 25% = ₹ 8,000/- paid together with the interest accrued for the year ₹ 3,200/-

P&L Appropriation Account
For the year ended 31.12.2006
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 54

Question 27.
A, B and C were in partnership sharing profit and losses in the proportion of 4 : 3 : 3. The balances in the books of the firm as on 31-12-2006, subject to final adjustment, were as under:
Trial Balance
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 55
Adjustment: C died on 30-6-06. The Partnership deed provided that:
1. Interest was to be credited on capital accounts of partners at 1096 p.a. on the opening balance.

2. On the death of a partner, (i) Goodwill to be valued at 3 years’ purchase of average annual profits of 3 years up to the date of death, after deducting interest on capital employed at 896 p.a. & a fair remuneration for each partners; (ii) Fixed assets were to be valued by a valuer & all other assets-liabilities to be taken at book value.

3. Wherever necessary, profit or loss should be apportioned on a time basis.

4. The amount due to the deceased partner’s estate was to receive interest @ 12% p.a. from the date of the death until paid.
You ascertain that:

  • Profits for three years, before charging partner’s interest were: 2003 -₹ 1,68,000; 2004 – ₹ 1,89,000; 2005 – ₹ 1,80,000;
  • The independent valuation at the date of death revealed: Land and Building ₹ 1,50,000; Furniture & Fixtures ₹ 15,000;
  • A fair remuneration for each of the partners would be ₹ 3 7,500 p.a. & that capital employed in the business to be taken as ₹ 3,90,000 throughout.

It was agreed among the partners that:

  • Goodwill was not to be shown as an asset of the firm as on 31-12-06. Therefore adjustment for goodwill was to be made in Capital A/c;
  • A & B would share equally from the date of death of C;
  • Depreciation on revised value of assets would be ignored.

You are required to prepare:

  • Partner’s Capital Accounts and
  • Balance – Sheet of the firm as on 31-12-06.

Solution:
Partners’ Capital Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 56
Balance Sheet as on 31-12-2006
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 57
(1) Revaluation Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 58

(2) Adjustment in regard to Goodwill
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 59

(3) Profit & Loss Appropriation Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 60

(4) C’s Executor Loan Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 61

Question 28.
Firm ABC consist of 3 partners A, B and C, sharing profits and losses in the ratio 5:3:2 respectively. The partner A died on February 20,2006, Profit and Loss Account for the period upto date of death and Balance Sheet as on that date were prepared. The Balance Sheet as on that date was as given by the side.
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 62
In addition to the assets shown above, the firm had 3 life policies in the name of each partner, for insured value of 20,000 each, the premium of which were charged to Profit & Loss Account.
According to the partnership deed, on death of partner, the asset and liabilities are to be revalued by a valuer. The re-valued figures were :
(1) Goodwill ₹ 21,000, Machinery ₹ 45,000, Debtors are subject and to a provision for doubtful debts at 10% and Furniture at ₹ 7,000.
(2) Provision for taxation to be created for ₹ 1,500.
(3) Death-claim for policy in the name of A will be realised in full & the surrender values of the other 2 policies were ₹ 7,500 each.
The business will be continued by B & C, henceforth sharing profits and losses equally. The net balance due to A is transferred to a Loan account which will be paid off later.
Show Capital Account, Revaluation Account and the new Balance Sheet of the firm.
Solution:
Journal Entries
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 63
Capital Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 64
Revaluation Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 65
A’s (Legal heirs/representatives) Loan Account)
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 66
Profit on Joint Life Policy Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 67
Balance Sheet
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 68
Working Note:
1. Calculation of Gain/ Sacrifice:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 69

Question 28.
A,B and C are partners in a firm sharing profits and losses as 8:5:3. The Balance Sheet as at 31st December, 2005 was as follows:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 70
From 1st January, 2006 they agreed to alter their profit-sharing ratio as 5:6:5. It is also decided that:
(a) The fixed assets should be valued at ₹ 3,31,000;
(b) A provision of 5% on sundry debtors be made for doubtful debts;
(c) The goodwill of the firm at this date be valued at three years’ purchase of the average net profit of the last five years before charging insurance premium; and
(d) The stock be reduced to ₹ 1,12,000.
There is a joint life insurance policy for ₹ 2,00,000 for which an annual premium of ₹ 10,000 is paid, the premium being charged to Profit and Loss Account. The surrender value of the policy on 31st December, 2005 was ₹ 78,000.
The net profits of the firm for the last five years were ₹ 14,000, ₹ 17,000, ₹ 20,000, and ₹ 127,000.
Goodwill and the surrender value of the joint life policy was not to appear in the books.
Draft Journal Entries necessary to adjust the capital accounts of the partners and prepare the revised Balance Sheet.
Solution:
M/s A, B and C
Journal Entries
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 71
Balance sheet (revised)
As on 1st January, 2006
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 72

Working Note:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 73
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 74

Question 29.
A, B and C are partners sharing profits in the ratio of 3 : 2 : 1. Their Balance Sheet as at 31st March, 2018 stood as:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 75
B retired on 1st April, 2018 subject to the following conditions:
(i) Office Equipments revalued at ₹ 3,27,000.
(ii) Building revalued at ₹ 15,00,000. Furniture is written down by ₹ 40,000 and Stock is reduced to ₹ 2,00,000.
(iii) Provision for Doubtful Debts is to be created @ 5% on Debtors.
(iv) Joint Life Policy will appear in the Balance Sheet at surrender value after B’s retirement. The surrender value is ₹ 1,50,000
(v) Goodwill was to be valued at 3 years purchase of average 4 years profit which were:

Year
2014 90,000
2015 1,40,000
2016 1,20,000
2017 1,30,000

(vi) Amount due to B is to be transferred to his Loan Account
Prepare the Revaluation Account, Partners’ Capital Accounts and the Balance Sheet immediately after B’s retirement.
Solution:
Revaluation A/c
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 76
Partners’ Capital A/c
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 77
Balance Sheet as on 1.4.2018 (After B’s retirement)
 Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 78
Working Notes: Calculation of goodwill:
1. Average of last 4 year’s profit
= (90,000 + 1,40,000 + 1,20,000 + 1,30,000)/4 = ₹ 1,20,000

2. Goodwill at three years’ purchase = ₹ 1,20,000 x 3 = ₹ 3,60,000
Goodwill adjustment
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 79

Question 30.
Dinesh, Ramesh and Naresh are partners in a firm sharing profits and losses in the ration of 3 : 2 : 1. Their Balance Sheet as on 31st March, 2018 is as below :
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 80
The partners have agreed to take Suresh as a partner with effect from 1st April, 2018 on the following terms :
(i) Suresh shall bring ₹ 8,000 towards his capital.
(ii) The value of stock to be increased to ₹ 14,000 and Furniture & Fixtures to be depreciated by 10%.
(iii) Reserve for bad and doubtful debts should be provided at 5% of the Trade Receivables.
(iv) The value of Land & Buildings to be increased by ₹ 5,600 and the value of the goodwill be fixed at ₹ 18,000.
(v) The new profit sharing ratio shall be divided equally among the partners.
The outstanding liabilities include ₹ 700 due to Ram which has been paid by Dinesh. Necessary entries were not made in the books.
Prepare (i) Revaluation Account, (ii) Capital Accounts of the Partners, (iii) Balance Sheet of the firm after admission of Suresh.
Solution:
Revaluation A/c
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 81
Partner’s Capital A/c
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 82
Working Note:
Calculation of Sacrificing Ratio
Sacrificing Ratio = Old Ratio-New Ratio
Dinesh = \(\frac { 3 }{ 6 }\) – \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 }\) = \(\frac { 3 }{ 12 }\) (Sacrifice)
Ramesh = \(\frac { 2 }{ 6 }\) – \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 12 }\) (Sacrifice)
Naresh = \(\frac { 1 }{ 6 }\) – \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 12 }\) (Gain)
Suresh = Nil – \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 }\) = \(\frac { – 1 }{ – 4 }\) Nil – (Gain)
Sacrifice by Mr. Dinesh = 18,000 x \(\frac { 3 }{ 12 }\) = 4,500
Sacrifice by Mr. Raraesh = 18,000 x \(\frac { 1 }{ 12 }\) = 1,500
Cash A/c
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 83
Balance Sheet of the new firm as on 1.4.2018
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 84
Note: The effect of above calculation is that extra ₹ 1,000 to Z is borne by X & Y in their profit sharing ratio i.e. 3:2.

Question 31.
Monika, Yedhant and Zoya are in partnership, sharing profits and losses equally. Zoya died on 30th June 2018. The Balance Sheet of Firm as at 31st March 2018 stood as.
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 85
In order to arrive at the balance due to Zoya, it was mutually agreed that:
(i) Land and Building be valued at ₹ 1,75,000
(ii) Debtors were all good, no provision is required
(iii) Stock is valued at ₹ 13,500
(iv) Goodwill will be valued at one Year’s purchase of the average profit of the past five years. Zoya’s share of goodwill be adjusted in the account of Monika and Yedhant.
(v) Zoya’s share of profit from 1st April 2018, to the date of death be calculated on the basis of average profit of preceding three years.
(vi) The profit of the preceding five years ended 31st March were :

2018 2017 2016 2015 2014
25,000 20,000 22,500 35,000 28,750

You are required to prepare :
(1) Revaluation account
(2) Capital accounts of the partners and
(3) Balance sheet of the Firm as at 1st July 2018.
Solution:
Revaluation Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 86
Capital Account
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 87
Balance Sheet of the firm as at 1st July, 2018(after death)
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 88
Working Notes:
(1) Calculation of Goodwill
Profits of the past five years:
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 89
= ₹ 26,250
= 26,250 x 1 year purchase
= ₹ 26,250

(2) Treatment of Goodwill

Monika Dr. 4,375
Yedhant Dr. 4,375
To Zoya 8,750

(Being goodwill adjusted in the gaining ratio 1:1)

(3) Calculation of Zoya’s share of profit, upto the date of death
Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material 90

True or False

Question 1.
A partner who devotes more time to a business than other partners is entitled to get a salary.
Answer:
False: No partner is entitled for salary unless it is provided for in the partnership deed.

Question 2.
Partners can share profits or losses in their capital ratio, when there is no agreement.
Answer:
False: If there is no agreement profits or losses are to be shared equally among the partners.

Question 3.
The business of partnership firm must be carried on by all the partners.
Answer:
False: The business of the partnership firm can be carried on by all the partners or by any one of them acting for all.

Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material

Question 4.
Goodwill brought in by an incoming partner in cash for joining a partnership firm is taken away by the old partners in their new profit sharing ratio.
Answer:
False: When a new partner brings in cash for goodwill, it is taken away by the old partners in their sacrificing ratio.

Question 5.
Goodwill is fictitious asset.
Answer:
False: Goodwill is an intangible asset.

Question 6.
Goodwill is in the nature of personal account.
Answer:
False: Goodwill is an intangible asset so it is in nature of real account.

Question 7.
If a partner retires, then other partners have a gain in their profit sharing ratio.
Answer:
True: If a partner retires, his share of profit or loss will be shared by the other partners in their profit sharing ratio unless otherwise agreed.

Question 8.
Minor can be admitted to the benefits of LLP.
Answer:
False: Minor cannot be admitted to the benefits of LLP.

Question 9.
The objective of taking a joint life policy by the partnership firm is to secure the lives of the existing partners of the firm.
Answer:
False: The objective of taking a joint life policy is to enable the firm to make payment to the legal representatives of a deceased partner or to the retiring partner.

Partnership – CA Foundation Accounts Study Material

Question 10.
LLP has no separate legal entity.
Answer:
False: LLP has separate legal entity.

Question 11.
LLP Partners act as agents of LLP and other partners.
Answer:
False: LLP Partners act as agents of LLP and not of other partners.

Question 12.
When there is no partnership deed prevails, the interest on loan of a partner to be paid @ 6%.
Answer:
True: When there is no partnership deed then the provisions of the Indian Partnership Act are to be applied for settling the dispute. Interest on loan is payable @ 6% p.a.
as per Indian Partnership Act.

Question 13.
Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) is governed by Indian Partnership Act, 1932.
Answer:
False: LLP is governed by LLP Act, 2008.

Financial Services Organization & its Registration Process – Setting Up of Business Entities and Closure Important Questions

Financial Services Organization & its Registration Process – Setting Up of Business Entities and Closure Important Questions

Financial Services Organization & its Registration Process – Setting Up of Business Entities and Closure Important Questions

Question 1.
Discuss briefly the regulatory framework governing the Non-Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs) in India.
Answer:
1. Registered with RBI: With the amendment of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 in January 1997, in terms of Section 45-IA, all Non-Banking Financial Companies have to be mandatorily registered with the RBI.

2. Provision under RBI Act: The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) is entrusted with the responsibility of regulating and supervising the Non-Banking Financial Companies by virtue of powers vested in Chapter III-B of the p Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934.

3. Objective: The regulatory and supervisory objective is:

  • To ensure healthy growth of the financial companies;
  • To ensure that these companies function as a part of the financial system within the policy framework, in such a manner that their existence and functioning do not lead to systemic aberrations.

The quality of surveillance and supervision exercised by the RBI over the NBFCs is sustained by keeping pace with the developments that take place in the non-banking sector of the financial system.

Question 2.
Distinguish between: Banks and Non-Banking Financial Companies
Answer:
Following are the main points of distinction between Banks and Non-Banking Financial Companies:

Points Banks

Non-Banking Financial Companies

Meaning The bank is an RBI-authorized financial institution that aims at providing banking services to the general public. NBFC is a company engaged in the business of loans and advances, acquisition of shares, stocks, bonds, debentures, and securities issued by the Government or local authority or other marketable securities of a like nature, leasing, hire- purchase, insurance business, and chit business.
Demand deposits Banks can accept term deposits as well as demand deposits. NBFCs can accept only term deposits but not demand deposits.
Payment & settlement system Banks form part of the payment and settlement system. NBFCs do not form part of the payment and settlement system.
Cheque Banks can issue cheques drawn on themselves. NBFCs cannot issue cheques drawn on themselves.
Credit creation Banks are termed as creators of credit through money multiplier activity. NBFCs cannot be termed as creators of credit.
Transaction services Banks provide a variety of transaction services. NBFCs do not facilitate transaction services.
Reserve ratios Banks are required to maintain reserve ratios with RBI. NBFCs are not required to maintain reserve ratios with RBI.

Question 3.
Explain the various advantages of NBFCs.
Answer:
Various advantages of NBFCs are as follows:
1. Competitive Interest Rates: Non-Banking Financial has brought down the interest rates to either equal to bank lending rates or at times even lower to bank rates. When the rate of interest is also lowered, borrowers found this more easy and affordable. This has also resulted in lower EMI (Equated Monthly Instalment) for borrowers.

2. Quick Processing: As compared to banks, NBFC’s are lenient towards eligibility criteria. This makes loan approval easier, a smoother process, and quicker. Most of the time, people apply for loans when they are in immediate need of money. NBFCs have taken this as an opportunity to meet the demand by quickly processing the loans at the competitive rate of interest. At times, borrowers are even ready to compromise on the interest rates if the loan amount is huge and if they could get it approved quickly.

3. fewer Rules and Regulations: The rules and regulations for lending are not as stringent as banks. Example: NBFC’s do not have statutory reserve ratios and can open branches at their will. This helps borrowers to get loans easily. In view of less complicated loan processing requirements, borrowers are highly satisfied. Even the loan amount approved will be quite lesser than the collateral value. This is due to the high risk of default.

4. Loan available for Individuals with Poor Credit Rating: Individuals with poor credit ratings generally will not get loans from banks. On the other hand, loans will be offered to individuals with low credit scores by NBFCs but most of the time the interest rates for such borrowers will be higher than market rates. Due to these aforementioned advantages, most of the NBFCs are growing.

5. NBFCs offer a variety of loans: Corporate sector prefers banks; however retail sector chooses NBFCs over banks. Simple loans such are vehicle financing loans, gold loans, home loans, and durable loans are offered by NBFCs and the customer satisfaction ratio is high here.

Question 4.
Rakesh is interested to form a Non-Banking Financial Company (NBFC) for carrying business of providing microfinance in the rural areas in the name of ‘SABKO Loan Company Ltd.’. Advice him about the g various categories of NBFCs and let him know which category of NBFC will suit him for applying for the license. [Dec. 2018 (5 Marks)]
Answer:
Before applying for NBFC License, the type and category of the NBFC license must first be determined. The following are the categories of NBFC Companies:
1. Asset Finance Company (AFC): An Asset Finance Company is a company which is a financial institution carrying on as its principal business the financing of physical assets such as automobiles, tractors, lathe machines, generator sets, earthmoving, and material handling equipment, moving on own power and general purpose industrial machines.

2. Investment Company: An Investment Company is any company that is a financial institution carrying on as its principal business the acquisition of securities (shares/bonds/other financial securities).

3. Loan Company: Loan Company is any company that is a financial institution carrying on as its principal business the providing of finance whether by making loans or advances or otherwise for any activity other than its own but does not include an Asset Finance Company.

4. Infrastructure Finance Company: Infrastructure Finance Company is a non-banking finance company that deploys at least 75% of its total assets in infrastructure loans, has a minimum Net Owned Funds of Rs. 300 crore, maintains a minimum credit rating of “A” or equivalent with a Capital to Risk Asset Ratio of 15%.

5. Systemically Important Core Investment Company: Systemically Important Core Investment Company is an NBFC with an asset size of over 100 crores, accepts public funds, and is involved in the business of acquisition of shares and securities subject to fulfillment of certain conditions.

6. Infrastructure Debt Fund: Infrastructure Debt Fund is a company registered as NBFC to facilitate the flow of long-term debt into infrastructure projects. Infrastructure Debt Funds raise resources through the issue of Rupee or Dollar denominated bonds of minimum 5 years maturity. Only Infrastructure Finance Companies can sponsor such companies.

7. NBFC: Micro Finance Institution: Micro Finance Institution is a non-deposit-taking NBFC that is engaged in microfinance activities.

8. NBFC Factor: NBFC Factor is a non-deposit-taking NBFC engaged in the principal business of factoring.

Looking into the features of various NBFCs, ‘Non-Banking Financial Company – Micro Finance Institution (NBFC-MFI) will suit Mr. Rakesh as this 1 is for carrying business of providing microfinance in the rural areas.

Question 5.
What do you understand by ‘Housing Finance Company (HFC)’? What are the basic registration requirements of such companies?
Answer:
Housing Finance Company (HFC):
Meaning: The Housing Finance Company in the form of Non-Banking Financial Company which is registered under the Companies Act, 1956/2013 and engaged in the principal business of financing of acquisition or construction of houses that includes the development of plots of lands for the construction of new houses.

Registration: Apart from registration under the Companies Act, 2013, Housing Finance Company (HFC) also requires registration with the National Housing Bank Act, 1987 for commencing or carrying on the business of housing finance.

Conditions for Housing Finance Company- In terms of Section 29A of the National Housing Bank Act, 1987, no Housing Finance Company shall commence or carry on the business of a housing finance institution without
(a) Obtaining a certificate of registration from National Housing Bank issued under Chapter V of the said Act, and
(b) Having the net owned fund of ₹ 10 Crore or such other higher amount, as the National Housing Bank may, by notification, specify.

Housing Finance Company cannot conduct the business of housing finance without obtaining a Certificate of Registration from NHB. The conduct of business without obtaining a certificate of registration is an offense punishable under the provisions of the National Housing Bank Act, 1987. NHB can also file applications for winding up of such HFC, u/s 33B of the said Act.

Different categories of HFCs registered with NHB: HFCs are categorized in terms of the type of liabilities, by NHB, into Deposit and Non-Deposit accepting HFCs and are issued Certificate of Registration accordingly.

Question 6.
With reference to Asset Reconstruction Company, answer the following:
(i) Who regulates the Asset Reconstruction Companies in India?
(ii) What functions are performed by Asset Reconstruction Companies (ARCs)?
(iii) What are the objectives of such companies?
Answer:
Governing law: Asset Reconstruction Company (Securitization Company/Reconstruction Company) is a company registered u/s 3 of the Securitization and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest (SARFAESI) Act, 2002.

Regulator: It is regulated by RBI as a Non-Banking Financial Company (u/s 45-I(f)( iii of RBI Act, 1934).

Exemption to ARC: RBI has exempted ARCs from the compliances of sections 45-IA, 45-IB & 45-IC of the RBI Act, 1934. ARC functions like an AMC within the guidelines issued by RBI.

Functions of ARC: As per RBI Notification ARC performs the following functions:

  1. Acquisition of financial assets
  2. Change or takeover of management/sale or lease of business of the borrower
  3. Rescheduling of debt
  4. Enforcement of security interest
  5. Settlement of dues payable by the borrower

Objectives of Asset Reconstructions Companies:
(a) NPA management: Asset Reconstructions companies are created to manage and recover Non-Performing Assets acquired from the banking system.

(b) Separate Entity to recover bad debts: Banks and financial institutions with a large proportion of their bad loans or Non-Performing Assets can sell to a separate entity Le. Asset Reconstruction Company.

(c) Recovery of Dues: Then Asset Reconstruction Companies recover a sum through attachment, liquidation, etc.

(d) Clean Books: They help banks in making clean their books by reducing Non-Performing Assets.

(e) Profit Making: Asset Reconstruction Companies are also making a profit by buying Non-Performing Assets at a lower price.

Question 7.
‘Asset Reconstruction Companies are created to manage and recover Non-Performing Assets’ – Comment referring to the functions and benefits of Asset Reconstruction Companies. [Dec. 2019 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
As per RBI Notification No. DNBS.2/CGM(CSM)-2003, dated April 23,2003,
Asset Reconstruction Company (ARC) performs the following functions:

  1. Acquisition of financial assets
  2. Change or takeover of management/sale or lease of business of the borrower
  3. Rescheduling of debt
  4. Enforcement of security interest
  5. Settlement of dues payable by the borrower

The benefits of incorporating an ARC are as under:

  1. Banks can focus better on managing the core business including providing new business opportunities for the ARC.
  2. Restoration of depositor and investor confidence by ensuring the lender’s financial health.
  3. It will help in building industry expertise in loan resolution and re-structuring management besides serving as a catalyst for important legal reforms in bankruptcy procedures and loan collection.
  4. ARCs play an important role in developing capital markets through secondary asset instruments.

Question 8.
What are Micro Finance Institutions?
Answer:
MFIs are financial institutions working towards the upliftment of the needy and underprivileged section of society by providing short-term loans to set up their own venture. They take a minimum or very calculated risk and fund the interested borrowers to help them get trained, set up, and run a small-scale business. Microfinance institutions apart from giving financial help also educate people about the current market trends and help them compete in the present market.

These financial institutions usually do not make any guarantee or ask for any kind of collateral from the borrower to lend money. This is where these institutions stand out from the traditional banking organizations. While banks are quite reluctant about lending money to the poor unemployed crowd considering them as high-risk components, MFIs are specially dedicated to providing all the necessary financial help to this section of society.

These organizations not only take the risk of funding them but also work with them to ensure that the offered money gets utilized appropriately. They contribute in every possible way to uplift the underbanked section and make them financially independent.

Types of MFIs in India: MFIs operate in a number of forms and shapes § in India. Though each of them has a different formation and work nature, f they all provide financial help to the needy section of the society in the form of loans and other financial products.

Here are the details of the various types of MFIs in India:

  • JLG or Joint Liability Group
  • SHG or Self Help Group
  • The Grameen Bank Model
  • Rural Co-operatives

Question 9.
Write a short note on Characteristics of Micro Finance Institutions
Answer:
There are a number of features that make Micro Finance Institutions different from formal banking organizations.

Here are some of the key features of the MFIs in India:

  • Low Income Group: These institutions offer loans to individuals who belong to the low-income group.
  • The loans that are offered by these institutions are of small amounts and are known as microloans.
  • Security: No collateral for a loan is required.
  • Short Period: MFIs provide loans to the borrowers for a short period, once they repay the loan they can again opt for another one.
  • Transaction cost is low.
  • Loan for Business: MFIs give loans to people who want to start up a business of their own without any security or collateral.
  • The repayment frequency of the microloans offered by MFIs is high and the borrower needs to repay the amount at quick intervals.
  • Self Employment: In most cases, the loans are provided by these organizations for income-generation purposes.

Question 10.
“Concept of self-help group” is the most exciting discovery in the context of Microfinance. Explain the terms and features of microfinance [Dec. 2019 (4 Marks Each)]
Answer:
NABARD has defined microfinance as “provision of thrift, credit and other financial services and products of very small amounts to the poor in rural, semi-urban and urban areas provided to customers to meet their financial needs; with the only qualification that

  1. transactions value is small and
  2. customers are poor.”

The Indian microfinance scene is dominated by SHGs and their linkage with banks. This has helped in the empowerment of women and the eradication of property among people with low income.

Microfinance provides a greater menu of options whereby the small loan can be garnered not just from external sources but also through self-mobilization, by way of saving and sale of assets.

The biggest flexibility in the case of microfinance is the lack of any physical collateral, even in the case of a loan from the bank.

The characteristics of MFI’s may be summarised as under:

  • The size of the loan given by the MFI is small.
  • The repayment period is short.
  • MFI can mobilize resources both from internal and external sources.
  • No collateral for a loan is required.
  • The purpose of the end-use of loans is flexible.
  • Loans given are mostly group loans, trickling down to individuals.
  • Transaction cost is low, due to group lending.

Question 11.
Write a short note on Characteristics of a Nidhi Company
Answer:
NBFC: A Nidhi Company, is one that belongs to the non-banking finance sector and is recognized u/s 406 of the Companies Act, 2013. Core Business: Their core business is borrowing and lending money between their members.

Other Names: They are also known as Permanent Fund, Benefit Funds, Mutual Benefit Funds & Mutual Benefit Company.

Regulator: They are regulated by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs, Government of India, and are registered under the Companies Act, 2013.

Characteristics: Characteristics of a Nidhi Company may be summarized below:

  1. It is allowed to transact business only with its members and with nobody else. Hence, in case a person wishes to place a deposit with a Nidhi or borrow money from a Nidhi, he must first become a member (shareholder) of the Nidhi by subscribing to 10 equity shares or shares equivalent to ₹ 100.
  2. After the commencement of the Companies Act, 2013, no Nidhi shall issue preference shares.
  3. They are allowed to open branches subject to compliance with Rule 10 of the Nidhi Rules, 2014, but do not operate on a PAN India basis.
  4. They are incorporated as public companies with a minimum paid-up equity share capital of ₹ 5,00,000.
  5. Loans may be provided only to its members and should be fully secured.
  6. A director of a Nidhi shall be a member and shall hold office for a term up to 10 consecutive years on the Board of a Nidhi.
  7. Nidhi can declare dividends not exceeding 25% and any higher amount shall be specifically approved by the Regional Director.
  8. Nidhi shall adhere to the prudential norms for revenue recognition and classification of assets in respect of mortgage loans or jewel loans as provided in Rule 20 of the Nidhi Rules, 2014.

Question 12.
Explain the process of incorporation of Nidhi Companies.
Answer:
Incorporation of Company:- For incorporation, the normal procedure for incorporating a public company is required to be complied with, such as obtaining the availability of name, faffing of MOA and AOA, and other related documents.

Object Clause: Care must be taken to see that the Objects Clause of the Memorandum should restrict itself to the object of cultivating the habit of thrift and savings amongst its members, receiving deposits from and lending to its members only for their mutual benefit and for other permitted purposes. The name of the company should end with the words “Nidhi Limited”.

Criteria as per Rules: After incorporation as a Nidhi, according to Rule 5 of the Nidhi Rules, 2014, every Nidhi shall ensure that it has:
(a) Not less than 200 members;
(b) Net Owned Funds of ₹ 10 lakh or more;
(c) Unencumbered term deposits of not less than 10% of the outstanding deposits; and
(d) Ratio of Net Owned Funds to deposits of not more than 1: 20.

Net Owned Funds: As per Rule 9, every Nidhi shall maintain Net Owned Funds of not less than ₹ 10 lakh or such a higher amount as the Central Government may specify from time to time.

Question 13.
Razavi and her six more relatives and friends want to incorporate a Nidhi Company. They seek your advice on the following issues with respect to the formation of the company:
(i) Whether Nidhi Company can be formed as a private company? Is there any specific law for the Nidhi Companies?
Answer:
As per Rule 4 of the Nidhi Rules, 2014, a Nidhi to be incorporated under the Act shall be a public company, and hence Nidhi Company cannot be formed as a private company. Nidhi Companies are regulated by the Companies Act, 2013 read with Nidhi Rules, 2014.

Even though Nidhi Companies are regulated by the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013, they are exempted from certain provisions of the Act, as applicable to other companies, due to limiting their operations within members.

(ii) Whether the approval of the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) is required?
Answer:
No RBI approval is necessary to register the company, as RBI has specifically exempted this category of NBFC in India to comply with its core provisions such as registration with RBI.

(iii) Whether Nidhi is allowed to raise funds through the issue of equity shares and preference shares?
Answer:
As per Rule 6 of the Nidhi Rules, 2014, Nidhi shall not issue preference shares, debentures, or any other debt instrument by any name or in any form whatsoever. Thus, Nidhi Company can issue equity shares but cannot issue preference shares.

(iv) Whether Nidhi is allowed to carry on business other than the business of borrowing or lending in its own name?
As a practicing Company Secretary, advise with reference to the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013. [June 2019 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
As per Rule 6 of the Nidhi Rules, 2014, Nidhi shall not carry on the business of chit fund, hire purchase finance, leasing finance, insurance, or acquisition of securities issued by any body corporate.

Question 14.
How Payments Banks are different from regular Banks?
Answer:
(a) Loans: A payments bank aims to further financial inclusion, especially through savings accounts and payments services. Accordingly, a payments bank is not allowed to give any form of a loan or issue a credit card, which is also a form of unsecured personal loan.

(b) Deposit Restriction: Even in the case of savings accounts, a payments bank has certain restrictions. Customers can open a savings account with deposits of only up to ₹ 1 lakh, which is also the maximum balance allowed. These banks currently offer interest rates similar to that being offered by regular banks. As per RBI guidelines, payment banks can’t accept fixed or recurring deposits.

(c) Cheque Book Facility: Savings accounts customers also do not have the checkbook facility at present. Current account holders will have this facility, though.

(d) Mobile App: Payments Bank account holders can also use the mobile banking app for checking balance, statements, bill payments, and online transfers.

Question 15.
Write a short note on Registration & Licensing of Payment Banks
Answer:
The payments bank will be registered as a Public Limited Company under the Companies Act, 2013, and licensed u/s 22 of the Banking Regulation Act, 1949, with specific licensing conditions restricting its activities mainly to acceptance of demand deposits and provision of payments and remittance services.

It will be governed by the provisions of:

  • Banking Regulation Act, 1949
  • Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934
  • Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999
  • Payment & Settlement Systems Act, 2007
  • Deposit Insurance & Credit Guarantee Corporation Act, 1961
  • Other relevant Statutes and Directives, Prudential Regulations, and other Guidelines/Instructions issued by RBI and other regulators from time to time.

The payments bank will be given scheduled bank status once it commences operations and if it found suitable as per Section 42(6)(a) of the RBI Act, 1934.

Question 16.
Payment Bank is a new model of banks conceptualized by the Reserve Bank of India. Elucidate. [Dec. 2018 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
Payments banks is a new model of banks conceptualized by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI).
(a) Deposit Limit: These banks can accept a restricted deposit, which is currently limited to I lakh per customer and may be increased further.

(b) Interest: They can pay interest on these deposits just like a savings bank account. Both current accounts and savings accounts can be operated by such banks.

(c) Various Services: Payments banks can issue services like ATM cards, debit cards, net banking, third party transfers, and mobile banking and offer remittance services.

(d) Loans: These banks cannot grant loans or issue credit cards.

(e) Objective: The main objective to widen the spread of payment and financial services to small businesses, low-income households, migrant labor workforce in a secured technology-driven environment. With payments banks, RBI seeks to increase the penetration level of financial services to the remote areas of the country.

(f) Easy opening Account: To open a bank account and the application process of payments bank is made very easy as compared to other banks.

(g) Mobile App: These bank accounts can be opened instantly through their respective mobile apps just by providing details like the Aadhaar number with KYC verification.

(h) Most of the payment banks have a non-NBFC heritage and will use payment banks as a customer retention and acquisition mechanism.

Question 17.
Easy Finance Ltd. is willing to enter into the banking business via “Payment Bank”. The Board of directors of the Company seeks your advice with respect to the required criteria to be fulfilled by the company with respect to the following:
(i) Application for license
Answer:
Keeping in view the guideline issued by the RBI, the answer to the given case is as follows:
Application for license: An application has to be filed with RBI in Form III u/s 22 of the Banking Regulation Act, 1949 for a license to commence banking business by a company incorporated in India and desire to commence Payment Bank business.

(ii) Minimum capital requirement
Answer:
Minimum capital requirement: The minimum capital requirement is Rs. 100 Crore. For the first 5 years, the stake of the promoter should remain at least 40%.

(iii) Voting rights of shareholders
Answer:
Voting rights of shareholders: The voting rights will be regulated by the Banking Regulation Act, 1949. The voting right of any shareholder is capped at 10%, which can be raised to 26% by RBI. Any acquisition of more than 5% will require approval of the RBI.

(iv) Services that can be undertaken by the bank [Dec. 2018 (4Marks)]
Answer:
Services that can be undertaken by the bank: Payment Banks can accept a restricted deposit, which is currently limited to 1 Lakh per customer and may be increased further. They can pay interest on these deposits just like a savings bank account. Both current accounts and savings accounts can be operated by such banks. Payments banks can issue services like ATM cards, debit cards, net banking, third-party transfers, and mobile banking and offer remittance services. These banks cannot grant loans or issue credit cards.

Setting Up of Business Entities and Closure Questions and Answers

Analytical Procedures – CA Inter Audit Notes

Analytical Procedures – CA Inter Auditing Notes is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Analytical Procedures – CA Inter Auditing Notes

Question 1.
Routine checks cannot be depended upon to disclose all the mistakes or manipulation that may exist in accounts, certain other procedures also have to be applied like trend and ratio analysis. Analyse and Explain stating clearly the meaning of analytical procedures. [RTP-Nov. 19]
Answer:
Analytical Procedures:

  • Routine checks cannot be depended upon to disclose all the mistakes or manipulation that may exist in accounts, due to which, certain other procedures also have to be applied like trend and ratio analysis in addition to reasonable tests. These collectively are known as overall tests.
  • With the passage of time, analytical procedures have acquired lot of significance as substantive audit procedure.
  • SA-520 on Analytical Procedures discusses the application of analytical procedures during an audit.

Meaning of Analytical Procedures:
SA 520 “Analytical Procedures” deals with the auditor’s use of analytical procedures as substantive procedures.

Meaning of Analytical Procedures:
Analytical Procedures means evaluations of financial information through analysis of relationships among both financial and non-financial data.

It also encompasses such investigation as is necessary of identified fluctuations or relationships that are inconsistent with other relevant information or that differ from expected values by a significant amount.

Nature of Analytical Procedures:
(a) AP include the consideration of comparisons of the entity’s financial information with

  • Comparable information for prior periods.
  • Anticipated results of the entity, such as, budgets or forecasts, or expectations of the auditor (for example, estimation of depreciation).
  • Similar industry information (for example, comparison of entity’s ratio of sales to accounts receivable with industry averages or with other entities of comparable size in the same industry).

(b) AP also include consideration of relationships, among:

  • elements of financial information, such as gross margin percentages.
  • financial information and relevant non-financial information, such as payroll costs to number of employees.

Benefits of Analytical Procedures:
The analytical procedures may be used for following purposes:

  • To assist the auditor in planning the nature, timing and extent of audit procedures.
  • As a substantive procedure when their use can be more effective or efficient than tests of details in reducing detection risk for specific F.S. assertions; and
  • As an overall review of the F.S. in the final review, stage of the audit.

Question 2.
Define Analytical Procedures.
Or
Explain what do you mean by Analytical procedures. How such procedures are helpful in auditing?
Answer:
Analytical Procedures:
SA 520 “Analytical Procedures” deals with the auditor’s use of analytical procedures as substantive procedures.

Meaning of Analytical Procedures:
Analytical Procedures means evaluations of financial information through analysis of relationships among both financial and non-financial data.

It also encompasses such investigation as is necessary of identified fluctuations or relationships that are inconsistent with other relevant information or that differ from expected values by a significant amount.

Nature of Analytical Procedures:
(a) AP include the consideration of comparisons of the entity’s financial information with

  • Comparable information for prior periods.
  • Anticipated results of the entity, such as, budgets or forecasts, or expectations of the auditor (for example, estimation of depreciation).
  • Similar industry information (for example, comparison of entity’s ratio of sales to accounts receivable with industry averages or with other entities of comparable size in the same industry).

(b) AP also include consideration of relationships, among:

  • elements of financial information, such as gross margin percentages.
  • financial information and relevant non-financial information, such as payroll costs to number of employees.

Benefits of Analytical Procedures:
The analytical procedures may be used for following purposes:
1. To assist the auditor in planning the nature, timing and extent of audit procedures.
2. As a substantive procedure when their use can be more effective or efficient than tests of details in reducing detection risk for specific F.S. assertions; and
3. As an overall review of the F.S. in the final review, stage of the audit.

Analytical Procedures – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 3.
Analytical procedures use comparisons and relationships to assess whether account balances or other data appear reasonable. Explain stating the purpose of analytical procedures. [RTP-May 18]
Answer:
SA 520 “Analytical Procedures” deals with the auditor’s use of analytical procedures as substantive procedures.

Meaning of Analytical Procedures:
Analytical Procedures means evaluations of financial information through analysis of relationships among both financial and non-financial data.

It also encompasses such investigation as is necessary of identified fluctuations or relationships that are inconsistent with other relevant information or that differ from expected values by a significant amount.

Nature of Analytical Procedures:
(a) AP include the consideration of comparisons of the entity’s financial information with

  • Comparable information for prior periods.
  • Anticipated results of the entity, such as, budgets or forecasts, or expectations of the auditor (for example, estimation of depreciation).
  • Similar industry information (for example, comparison of entity’s ratio of sales to accounts receivable with industry averages or with other entities of comparable size in the same industry).

(b) AP also include consideration of relationships, among:

  • elements of financial information, such as gross margin percentages.
  • financial information and relevant non-financial information, such as payroll costs to number of employees.

Benefits of Analytical Procedures:
The analytical procedures may be used for following purposes:

  • 1. To assist the auditor in planning the nature, timing and extent of audit procedures.
  • 2. As a substantive procedure when their use can be more effective or efficient than tests of details in reducing detection risk for specific F.S. assertions; and
  • 3. As an overall review of the F.S. in the final review, stage of the audit.

Question 4.
Give examples of Analytical Procedures having consideration of comparisons of the entity’s financial information. [RTP-Nov, 19]
Answer:
Analytical Procedures:
SA 520 “Analytical Procedures” deals with the auditor’s use of analytical procedures as substantive procedures.

Meaning of Analytical Procedures:
Analytical Procedures means evaluations of financial information through analysis of relationships among both financial and non-financial data.

It also encompasses such investigation as is necessary of identified fluctuations or relationships that are inconsistent with other relevant information or that differ from expected values by a significant amount.

Nature of Analytical Procedures:
(a) AP include the consideration of comparisons of the entity’s financial information with

  • Comparable information for prior periods.
  • Anticipated results of the entity, such as, budgets or forecasts, or expectations of the auditor (for example, estimation of depreciation).
  • Similar industry information (for example, comparison of entity’s ratio of sales to accounts receivable with industry averages or with other entities of comparable size in the same industry).

(b) AP also include consideration of relationships, among:

  • elements of financial information, such as gross margin percentages.
  • financial information and relevant non-financial information, such as payroll costs to number of employees.

Benefits of Analytical Procedures:
The analytical procedures may be used for following purposes:

  • To assist the auditor in planning the nature, timing and extent of audit procedures.
  • As a substantive procedure when their use can be more effective or efficient than tests of details in reducing detection risk for specific F.S. assertions; and
  • As an overall review of the F.S. in the final review, stage of the audit.

Question 5.
In the planning stage, analytical procedures assist the auditor in understanding the client’s business and in identifying areas of potential risk. Explain. [RTP-Nov. 20]
Answer:
Use of Analytical Procedures in Planning Stage:

  • In the planning stage, analytical procedures assist the auditor in understanding the client’s business and in identifying areas of potential risk by indicating aspects of and developments in the entity’s business of which he was previously unaware.
  • This information will assist the auditor in determining the nature, timing and extent of his other audit procedures.

Analytical procedures in planning the audit use both financial data and non-financial information, such as number of employees, square feet of selling space, volume of goods produced and similar information.

Question 6.
Use of substantive Analytical Procedures requires consideration of many factors. Explain those factors.
Or
With respect to SA 520 “Analytical procedures”. Explain the following factors to be considered by the auditor for substantive audit procedures.
(i) Account type
(ii) Predictability
(iii) Nature of Assertion. [Nov. 20 (3 Marks)]
Answer:
Factors to be considered while using substantive analytical procedures:
Use of substantive Analytical Procedures requires consideration of following factors:
1. Availability of Data: The availability of reliable and relevant data will facilitate effective procedures.

2. Disaggregation: The degree of disaggregation in available data can directly affect the degree of its usefulness in detecting misstatements.

3. Account Type: Substantive analytical procedures are more useful for certain types of accounts than for others. Income statement accounts tend to be more predictable because they reflect accumulated transactions over a period, whereas balance sheet accounts represent the net effect of transactions at a point in time or are subject to greater management judgment.

4. Source: Some classes of transactions tend to be more predictable because they consist of numerous, similar transactions. Whereas the transactions recorded by non-routine and estimation are often subject to management judgment and therefore more difficult to predict.

5. Predictability: SAPs are more appropriate when an account balance or relationships between items of data are predictable. A predictable relationship is one that may reasonably be expected to exist and continue over time.

6. Nature of Assertion: SAP may be more effective in providing evidence for some assertions (e.g., completeness or valuation) than for others (e.g., rights and obligations).

Analytical Procedures – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 7.
Substantive analytical procedures are generally more applicable to large volumes of transactions that tend to be predictable over time. Explain. [RTP-Nov. 18, MTP-April 19]
Answer:
Predictability of Substantive Analytical Procedure:
1. SA 5 2 0 “Analytical Procedures” deals with the auditor’s use of analytical procedures as substantive procedures. As per SA 520, substantive analytical procedures are generally more applicable to large volumes of transactions that tend to be predictable over time.

2. The application of planned analytical procedures is based on the expectation that relationships among data exist and continue in the absence of known conditions to the contrary. However, the suitability of a particular analytical procedure will depend upon the auditor’s assessment of how effective it will be in detecting a misstatement that, individually or when aggregated with other misstatements, may cause the financial statements to be materially misstated.

3. In some cases, even an unsophisticated predictive model may be effective as an analytical procedure. For example, where an entity has a known number of employees at fixed rates of pay throughout the period, it may be possible for the auditor to use this data to estimate the total payroll costs for the period with a high degree of accuracy, thereby providing audit evidence for a significant item in the financial statements and reducing the need to perform tests of details on the payroll.

4. The use of widely recognised trade ratios (such as profit margins for different types of retail entities) can often be used effectively in substantive analytical procedures to provide evidence to support the reasonableness of recorded amounts.

Question 8.
What are the factors that determine the extent of reliance that the auditor places on results of analytical procedures? Explain with reference to SA-520 on “Analytical procedures”.
or
What are the considerations to be kept in mind while performing analytical procedures on data prepared by the client?
Or
The reliability of data is influenced by its source and nature and is dependent on the circumstances under which it is obtained. Accordingly, what are the relevant criteria which determine whether the data is reliable for the purposes of designing substantive analytical procedures?
Or
CA A, auditor of ABC Ltd. wants to design substantive analytical procedure and for that he wants to check whether the data is reliable or not. Mention the relevant points which he has to consider whether data is reliable for purpose of designing the substantive analytical procedures. [Nov. 19 (3 Marks)]
Answer:
Factors determining extent of reliance on analytical procedures (SA-520):
The application of analytical procedures is based on the expectation that relationships among data exist and continue in the absence of known conditions to the contrary. The presence of these relationships provides audit evidence as to the completeness, accuracy and validity of the data produced by the accounting system.

Factors affecting the Reliability of Data on which analytical procedures are to be performed:
As per SA 520 “Analytical Procedures” facts that may affect the reliability of data are:
1. Source of the information available. For example, information may be more reliable when it is obtained from independent sources outside the entity;

2. Comparability of the information available. For example, broad industry data may need to be supplemented to be comparable to that of an entity that produces and sells specialised products;

3. Nature and relevance of the information available. For example, whether budgets have been established as results to be expected rather than as goals to be achieved; and

4. Controls over the preparation of the information that are designed to ensure its completeness, accuracy and validity. For example, controls over the preparation, review and maintenance of budgets.

Question 9.
Explain the techniques available while applying SAP. [RTP-May 19]
Or
Ratio analysis is useful for analysing asset and liability accounts as well as revenue and expense accounts. An individual balance sheet account is difficult to predict on its own, but its relationship to another account is often more predictable (e.g., the trade receivables balance related to sales).
Explain stating the techniques available as substantive analytical procedures. [RTP-May 18, MTP-Oct. 19]
Or
Discuss the techniques available as substantive analytical procedures. [May 18 (5 Marks)]
Or
The design of a substantive analytical procedure is limited only by the availability of reliable data and the experience and creativity of the audit team. Explain clearly stating the techniques available as substantive analytical procedures. [MTP-Aug. 18]
Answer:
Techniques available while applying SAP:
(a) Trend analysis: Trend analysis is most commonly used technique which involves comparison of current data with the prior period balance or with a trend in two or more prior period balances.

(b) Ratio analysis: Ratio analysis involves analysing revenue and capital items forming part of balance sheet and profit and loss account. Ratios can also be compared over a period of time or to the ratios of other entities within the industry.

(c) Reasonableness tests: Unlike trend analysis, this analytical procedure does not rely on events of prior periods, but upon non-financial data for the audit period under consideration. These tests are generally more applicable to income statement accounts and certain accrual or prepayment accounts.

(d) Structural modelling: A modelling tool constructs a statistical model from financial and/or non-financial data of prior accounting periods to predict current account balances (e.g., linear regression).

Analytical Procedures – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 10.
Explain the commonly used technique in the comparison of current data with the prior period balance or with a trend in two or more prior period balances. [RTP-May 20]
Answer:
Commonly used technique in the comparison of current data with the prior period balance:

  • Trend Analysis is commonly used technique for the comparison of current data with the prior period balance or with a trend in two or more prior period balances.
  • With this technique, a person can evaluate whether the current balance of an account moves in line with the trend established with previous balances for that account, or based on an understanding of factors that may cause the account to change.

Question 11.
The decision about which audit procedures to perform, including whether to use substantive analytical procedures, is based on the auditor’s judgment. Explain. [RTP-Nov. 20]
Answer:
Use of Substantive Analytical Procedures:

  • The substantive procedures at the assertion level may be tests of details, substantive analytical procedures, or a combination of both.
  • The decision about which audit procedures to perform, including whether to use substantive analytical procedures, is based on the auditor’s judgment about the expected effectiveness and efficiency of the available audit procedures to reduce audit risk at the assertion level to an acceptably low level.
  • The auditor may inquire of management as to the availability and reliability of information needed to apply substantive analytical procedures, and the results of any such analytical procedures performed by the entity. It may be effective to use analytical data prepared by management, provided the auditor is satisfied that such data is properly prepared.

Question 12.
If analytical procedures performed in accordance with SA 520 identify fluctuations or relationships that are inconsistent with other relevant information or that differ from expected values by a significant amount, explain how would the auditor investigate such differences. [RTP-May 19]
Answer:
Investigation of Identified fluctuations:
If analytical procedures performed in accordance with SA 520 identify fluctuations or relationships that are inconsistent with other relevant information or that differ from expected values by a significant amount, the auditor shall investigate such differences by:
(a) Inquiring of management and obtaining appropriate audit evidence relevant to management’s responses; and
(b) Performing other audit procedures as necessary in the circumstances.

  • Audit evidence relevant to management’s responses may be obtained by evaluating those responses taking into account the auditor’s understanding of the entity and its environment, and with other audit evidence obtained during the course of the audit.
  • The need to perform other audit procedures may arise when, for example, management is unable to provide an explanation, or the explanation, together with the audit evidence obtained relevant to management’s response, is not considered adequate.

Question 13.
The relationships between individual financial statements items traditionally considered in the audit of business entities may not always be relevant in the audit of governments or other non-business public sector entities. Analyse and Explain. [RTP-Nov. 18]
Answer:
Considerations Specific to Public Sector Entities

  • The relationships between individual financial statement items traditionally considered in the audit of business entities may not always be relevant in the audit of governments or other nonbusiness public sector entities; for example, in many public-sector entities there may be little direct relationship between revenue and expenditure.
  • In addition, because expenditure on the acquisition of assets may not be capitalised, there may be no relationship between expenditures on, for example, inventories and fixed assets and the amount of those assets reported in the financial statements.
  • Also, industry data or statistics for comparative purposes may not be available in the public Analytical Procedures sector. However, other relationships may be relevant, for example, variations in the cost per kilometer of road construction or the number of vehicles acquired compared with vehicles retired.

Objective Type Questions (True/False, Correct/Incorrect)

Question 1.
As per SA 520 the term “analytical procedures” means evaluations of financial information through analysis of plausible relationships among financial data only.
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
SA 520 “Analytical Procedures” defines the term analytical procedures as evaluations of financial information through analysis of plausible relationships among both financial and non-financial data.

Question 2.
Auditor can depend on routine checks to disclose all the mistakes or manipulation that may exist in accounts.
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • Auditor cannot be depended on routine checks to disclose all the mistakes or manipulation that may exist in accounts.
  • Certain other procedures like trend and ratio analysis also have to be applied in addition to routine checks.

Question 3.
Only purpose of analytical procedures is to obtain relevant and reliable audit evidence when using substantive analytical procedures.
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
Analytical procedures are being applied:
(a) To obtain relevant & reliable audit evidence when using substantive analytical procedures; &
(b) To design and perform analytical procedures near the end of the audit that assist the auditor when forming an overall conclusion as to whether the F.S. are consistent with auditor’s understanding of the entity.

Analytical Procedures – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 4.
Analytical Procedures are required in the planning phase only.
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
Analytical Procedures are applied not only during planning phase but also applied

  • during the audit and
  • near the completion of audit.

Question 5.
Substantive analytical procedures are generally less applicable to large volumes of transactions that tend to be predictable over time.
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
Substantive analytical procedures are more appropriate when an account balance or relationships between items of data are predictable. A predictable relationship is one that may reasonably be expected to exist and continue over time.

Question 6.
Analytical procedures are unable to help the auditor in determining nature, timing and extent of other audit procedures at the planning stage. [Nov. 09 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
Analytical procedure are applied during planning stage and hence helps the auditor in determining nature, timing and extent of other audit procedures. Application of Analytical procedures during planning is governed by SA 315.

SA 520 “Analytical Procedures” deals with the auditor’s use of analytical procedures as substantive procedures (“substantive analytical procedures”), and as procedures near the end of the audit that assist the auditor when forming an overall conclusion on the financial statements.

Question 7.
Analytical procedure is a part of routine audit checking. [May 17 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • SA 5 2 0 “Analytical Procedures” defines the term analytical procedures as evaluations of financial information through analysis of plausible relationships among both financial and non-financial data.
  • Auditor cannot be depended on routine checks to disclose all the mistakes or manipulation that may exist in accounts. Certain other procedures like trend and ratio analysis also have to be applied in addition to routine checks.

Question 8.
A modelling tool constructs a statistical model from financial data only of prior accounting periods to predict current account balances. [MTP-March 18, March 19]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • A modelling tool constructs a statistical model from financial and/or non-financial data of prior accounting periods to predict current account balances

Question 9.
While designing audit procedures to address an inherent risk or “what can go wrong”, auditor should consider the nature of the risk of material misstatement in order to determine if a substantive analytical procedure can be used to obtain audit evidence. [MTP-March 18, Oct. 18, March 19]
Answer:
Statement is correct.

  • While designing audit procedures to address an inherent risk or “what can go wrong”, auditor should consider the nature of the risk of material misstatement in order to determine if a substantive analytical procedure can be used to obtain audit evidence.
  • When inherent risk is higher, auditor need to design tests of details to address the higher inherent risk. In case of higher inhered risk, audit evidence obtained solely from substantive analytical procedures is unlikely to be sufficient.

Analytical Procedures – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 10.
During the audit process, the auditor can easily identify all mistakes or manipulations that may exist in the accounts through routing checking processes. [May 18 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
Auditor cannot be depended on routine checks to disclose all the mistakes or manipulation that may exist in accounts. Certain other procedures like trend and ratio analysis also have to be applied in addition to routine checks.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

The Company Audit – CA Inter Auditing Notes is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Auditing Notes

Question 1.
Examine the following: “Section 139(1) of the Companies Act, 2013 provides that every company shall, at the first annual general meeting appoint an auditor who shall hold office till the conclusion of its sixth annual general meeting”. [RTP-May 18]
Answer:
Appointment of Subsequent Auditors in case of Non-Government Companies:
Section 139(1) of the Companies Act, 2013 provides that every company shall, at the first AGM appoint an individual or a firm as an auditor who shall hold office from the conclusion of that meeting till the conclusion of its 6th AGM and thereafter till the conclusion of every 6th meeting.

The following points need to be noted in this regard:

  • The company shall place the matter relating to such appointment of ratification by member at every Annual General Meeting.
  • Before such appointment is made, the written consent of the auditor to such appointment, and a certificate from him or it that the appointment, if made, shall be in accordance with the conditions as may be prescribed, shall be obtained from the auditor.
  • The certificate shall also indicate whether the auditor satisfies the criteria provided in section 141.
  • The company shall inform the auditor concerned of his or its appointment, and also file a notice of such appointment with the Registrar within 15 days of the meeting in which the auditor is appointed.

Question 2.
Managing Director of PQR Ltd. (Non-Government company) himself wants to appoint Shri Ganpa- ti, a practicing Chartered Accountant, as first auditor of the company. Comment on the proposed action of the Managing Director.
Answer:
Appointment of First Auditor of Non-Govt, Company:
Section 139(6} of the Companies Act, 2013 lays down that “the first auditor or auditors of a company shall be appointed by the Boardof directors within 30 days from the date of registration of the company”.

In the instant case, the appointment of Shri Ganpati, a practicing Chartered Accountant as first auditors by the Managing Director of PQR Ltd. by himself is in violation of Section 139(6} of the Companies Act, 2013, which authorizes the Board of Directors to appoint the first auditor of the company.

Conclusion: In view of the above, the Managing Director of PQR Ltd. should be advised not to appoint the first auditor of the company.

Question 3.
The first auditor of M/s Healthy Wealthy Ltd., a Government company, was appointed by the Board of Directors. [MTP-March 19, RTP-May 19]
Answer:
Appointment of First Auditor of Govt. Company

  • Section 139(7) of the Companies Act, 2013 lays down that in the case of a Government company or any other company owned or controlled, directly or indirectly, by the Central Government, or by any State Government, or State Governments, or partly by the Central Government and partly by one or more State Governments, the first auditor shall be appointed by the CAG of India within 60 days of registration of the company.
  • In case the CAG of India does not appoint such auditor within the said period, the BOD of the company shall appoint such auditor within the next 30 days.
  • In the case of failure of the Board to appoint such auditor within the next 30 days, it shall inform the members of the company who shall appoint such auditor within the 60 days at an EGM.
  • Hence in the case of M/s Healthy Wealthy Ltd., being a government company, the first auditors shall be appointed by the CAG of India.
    Conclusion: The appointment of first auditors made by the Board of Directors of M/s Healthy
    Wealthy Ltd., is null and void.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 4.
Nick Ltd. is a subsidiary of Ajanta Ltd., whose 20% shares have been held by Central Government, 25% by Uttar Pradesh Government and 10% by Madhya Pradesh Government. Nick Ltd. appointed Mr. P as statutory auditor for the year.
Answer:
Appointment of Auditor of Govt. Company:

  • As per Sec. 2 (45) of the Companies Act, 2 013, a Government company is defined “as any company in which not less than 51% of the paid-up share capital is held by the Central Government or by any State Government or Governments or partly by the Central Government and partly by one or more State Governments and includes a company which is a subsidiary of a Government Company as thus defined”.
  • Sec. 139(7) requires that the auditors of a government company shall be appointed or reappointed by the Comptroller and Auditor General of India.
  • In the given case Ajanta Ltd. is a government company as its 20% shares have been held by Central Govt., 25% by U.P. State Government and 10% by M.P. State Govt. Total 55% shares have been held by Central and State Governments.
  • Nick Ltd. will also be a government company, being subsidiary company of Ajanta Ltd. and hence the Auditor of Nick Ltd. can be appointed only by C & AG.

Conclusion: Appointment of ‘P’ is invalid and ‘P’ should not give acceptance to the Directors of Nick Ltd.

Question 5.
At the AGM of ICI Ltd., Mr. X was appointed as the statutory auditor. He, however, resigned after 3 months since he wanted to give up practice and join industry. State, how the new auditor will be appointed by ICI Ltd. and the conditions to be complied for.
Or
At the AGM of HDB Pvt. Ltd., Mr. R was appointed as the statutory auditor. He, however, resigned after 3 months since he wanted to purse his career in banking sector. The board of director has appointed Mr. L as the statutory auditor in board meeting within 30 days. Comment on the matter. With reference to the provisions of companies Act, 2013. [May 18 (5 Marks), RTP-Nov. 20]
Answer:
Filling of Casual vacancy:

  • As per Sec. 139(8) of the Companies Act, 2013, any casual vacancy in the office of an auditor may be filled by Board of Directors within thirty days.
  • However, if casual vacancy has been created by the resignation of the auditor, such appointment shall also be approved by the company at a general meeting convened within three months of the recommendation of the board.
  • The auditor so appointed shall hold office till the conclusion of the next annual general meeting.

Conclusion:
In this case the casual vacancy has been created on account of resignation. Therefore, Board of Directors will have to fill the vacancy within thirty days and such appointment shall be approved by the company at the general meeting within three months of the recommendations of the board. The new auditor so appointed shall hold office only till the conclusion of the next AGM.

Question 6.
Due to the resignation of the existing auditor(s), the Board of directors of X Ltd. appointed Mr. Hari as the auditor. Is the appointment of Hari as auditor valid₹
Answer:
Board’s Powers to Appoint an Auditor:

  • As per Sec. 139(8) of the Companies Act, 2013, any casual vacancy in the office of an auditor may be filled by Board of Directors within thirty days.
  • However, if casual vacancy has been created by the resignation of the auditor, such appointment shall also be approved by the company at a general meeting convened within three months of the recommendation of the board.
  • The auditor so appointed shall hold office till the conclusion of the next annual general meeting.

Conclusion: Appointment of auditor by Board of Directors will be Valid if it is made within 30 days of casual vacancy and such appointment is approved by the company at a general meeting within three months of the recommendations of the Board.

Question 7.
At an AGM of a listed company, Mr. R a retiring auditor after completing the tenure of 5 consecutive years of his service claims that he has been reappointed automatically, as the intended resolution of which a notice had been given to appoint Mr. P, could not be proceeded with, due to Mr. P’s death.
Answer:
Restrictions over tenure of Auditor (Rotation of Auditor)

  • As per Sec. 139(2) of the Companies Act, 2013, listed companies and other prescribed class of companies shall not appoint or reappoint an individual as auditor for more than one term of five consecutive years.
  • Sec. 139(10) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that if no auditor is appointed or reappointed at AGM, existing auditor will continue.
  • In the given case, notice has been given of an intended resolution to appoint some person or persons in the place of a retiring auditor, and by reason of the death, incapacity or disqualification of that person or of all those persons, as the case may be, the resolution cannot be proceeded with.
  • In the instant case, if Sec. 139(10) of the Companies Act, 2013 is invoked, it results into violation of Sec. 139(2). Hence, Mr. R cannot continue as auditor due to restrictions of Sec. 139(2).

Conclusion: Mr. R cannot continue as auditor of the company due to rotation provisions. Companies Act, 2013 does not provide any provision for such kind of situation, hence it can be concluded that vacancy arises in the office of auditor which need to be filled by company in EGM.

Question 8.
No AGM was held for the year ended 31st March, 2020, in XYZ Ltd., Mr. X is the auditor for the previous 5 years, whether he should continue to hold office for current year or not.
Answer:
Auditor’s position if no AGM is held:
Sec. 139(1) of the Companies Act, 2013 provides that every company shall, at the first AGM appoint an individual or a firm as an auditor who shall hold office from the conclusion of that meeting till the conclusion of its 6th AGM and thereafter till the conclusion of every 6th meeting.

In case the AGM is not held within the period prescribed, the auditor will continue in office till the AGM is actually held and concluded.
Conclusion: Mr. X shall continue to hold office till the conclusion of the AGM.

Question 9.
M/s Young & Co., a CA firm, and Statutory Auditors of Old Ltd., is dissolved on 1-4-2020 due to differ-ences of opinion among the partners. The Board of Directors of Old Ltd. in its meeting on 6-4-2020 appointed another firm M/s Sharp & Co. as their new auditors for one year.
Answer:
Filling of Casual Vacancy:

  • As per Sec. 139(8) of the Companies Act, 2013, any casual vacancy in the office of an auditor may be filled by Board of Directors within thirty days.
  • However, if casual vacancy has been created by the resignation of the auditor, such appointment shall also be approved by the company at a general meeting convened within three months of the recommendation of the board.
  • The auditor so appointed shall hold office till the conclusion of the next annual general meeting.

Conclusion: In the instant case the action of the board of directors in appointing M/s Sharp & Co. to fill up the casual vacancy due to dissolution of M/s Young & Co., is correct.
However, the board of directors are not correct in giving them appointment for one year. M/s Sharp & Co. can hold office until the conclusion of next AGM only.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 10.
ABC Pvt. Ltd. is having paid up share capital of ₹ 18 Cr. but having public borrowing from nationalized banks and financial institutions of ₹ 72 Cr. Comment whether, manner of rotation of auditor will be applicable over ABC Pvt. Ltd. [RTP-May 18]
Answer:
Statement is Incorrect.

  • Provisions related with rotation of auditors are applicable in case of private companies having paid up capital of ₹ 50 Crore or more and to companies having paid up capital below ₹ 50 Crore, but having public borrowings from financial institutions, banks or public deposits of ₹ 50 Crore or More.
  • In the instant case, as borrowings is of ₹ 50 Crore, provisions related with rotation of auditors are applicable.

Question 11.
Jolly Ltd., a listed company, appointed M/s Polly & Co., a Chartered Accountant firm, as the statutory auditor in its AGM held at the end of September, 2020 for 11 years. Comment whether the appointment is valid.
Answer:
Rotation of Auditor & Cooling Off Period Provisions:

  • As per Section 139(2) of the Companies Act, 2013, no listed company or a company belonging to such class or classes of companies as prescribed, shall appoint or re-appoint
    • an individual as auditor for more than one term of five consecutive years; and
    • an audit firm as auditor for more than two terms of five consecutive years.
  • In the given case, Jolly Limited is a listed company, the provisions relating to rotation of auditor will be applicable.

Conclusion: Jolly Ltd. cannot appoint the auditor for more than two terms of five consecutive years each, i.e. M/s Polly & Co. shall hold office from the conclusion of this meeting upto conclusion of 6th AGM to be held in the year 2025 and thereafter can be re-appointed as auditor for one more term of five years i.e. upto year 2030. The appointment shall be subject to ratification by members at every AGM of the company. As a result, the appointment made by Jolly Ltd. for 11 years is void.

Question 12.
M/s XYZ & Co., is an audit firm having partner Mrs. X, Mr. Y and Mr. Z, whose tenure has expired in the company immediately preceding the financial year. M/s ABZ & Co., another audit firm in which Mr. Z is a common partner, appointed as auditor for next five years. Comment whether the appointment is valid.
Answer:
To Examine validity of appointment;

  • Sec. 139[2] of Companies Act, 2013 provides that no listed company or other prescribed companies, shall appoint or re-appoint an audit firm as auditor for more than two terms of five consecutive years.
  • An audit firm which has completed its term, shall not be eligible for re-appointment as auditor in the same company for five years from the completion of such term.
  • It is also provided that as on the date of appointment no audit firm having a common partner or partners to the other audit firm, whose tenure has expired in a company immediately preceding the financial year, shall be appointed as auditor of the same company for a period of five years.
  • In the present case, assuming that company is covered under rotational provisions and two tenures of 5 year each of XYZ & Co. expired, M/S ABZ cannot be appointed as auditor as Mr. Z is common partner.

Conclusion: Appointment is not valid.

Question 13.
Discuss the following: Filling of Casual Vacancy in respect of a Company Audit. [Nov 12 (5 Marks) RTP-Mav 18]
Answer:
Filling of Casual Vacancy:
As per Section 139 (8) of the Companies Act, 2013, any casual vacancy in the office of an auditor shall-
(i) In the case of a non-government company, be filled by the Board of Directors within 30 days. But, if such casual vacancy is as a result of the resignation of an auditor, such appointment shall also be approved by the company at a general meeting convened within 3 months of the recommendation of the Board and the auditor so appointed shall hold the office till the conclusion of the next AGM.

(ii) In the case of a government company, the casual vacancy be filled by the CAG of India within 30 days. But if the CAG does not fill the vacancy within the said period the Board of Directors shall fill the vacancy within next 30 days.

Question 14.
Under what circumstances the retiring auditor cannot be reappointed. [Nov. 13 (6 Marks)]
Answer:
Circumstances in which retiring auditor cannot be reappointed:

  1. A specific resolution has not been passed to reappoint the retiring auditor.
  2. The auditor proposed to be reappointed does not possess the qualification prescribed under section 141 of the Companies Act, 2013.
  3. The proposed auditor suffers from the disqualifications under sections 141(3), 141(4) and 144 of the Companies Act, 2013.
  4. He has given to the company notice in writing of his unwillingness to be reappointed.
  5. A Special resolution has been passed in AGM appointing somebody else or providing expressly that the retiring auditor shall not be reappointed.
  6. A written certificate has not been obtained from the proposed auditor to the effect that the appointment or reappointment, if made, will be in accordance within the limits specified under section 141(3)(g) of the Companies Act, 2013.

Question 15.
State the manner of rotation of auditors on expiry of their term. [May 15 (4 Marks)]
Or
What are the provisions regarding appointment of auditors by rotation, after expiry of the term of the current auditor that a company should consider? [May 17 (5 Marks)]
Answer:
Manner of Rotation of Auditors:
Rule 6 of Companies (Audit & Auditors) Rules, 2014 prescribes the manner of rotation as below:
1. The Audit Committee shall recommend to the Board, the name of an individual auditor or of an audit firm who may replace the incumbent auditor on expiry of the term of such incumbent.

2. Where a company is required to constitute an Audit Committee, the Board shall consider the recommendation of such committee, and in other cases, the Board shall itself consider the matter of rotation of auditors and make its recommendation for appointment of the next auditor by the members in annual general meeting.

3. For the purpose of the rotation of auditors-
(i) in case of an auditor (whether an individual or audit firm), the period for which the individual or the firm has held office as auditor prior to the commencement of the Act shall be taken into account for calculating the period of five consecutive years or ten consecutive years, as the case may be;

(ii) the incoming auditor or audit firm shall not be eligible if such auditor or audit firm is associated with the outgoing auditor or audit firm under the same network of audit firms. The term “same network” includes the firms operating or functioning, hitherto or in future, under the same brand name, trade name or common control.

(iii) For the purpose of rotation of auditors:
(A) a break in the term for a continuous period of five years shall be considered as fulfilling the requirement of rotation;
(B) if a partner, who is in charge of an audit firm and also certifies the financial statements of the company, retires from the said firm and joins another firm of chartered accountants, such other firm shall also be ineligible to be appointed for a period of five years.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 16.
Provisions regarding rotation of auditors affect only specified class of companies. Discuss.
Or
Specify the class of companies to whom rotation of auditor applies, under the provisions of Companies Act, 2013. [May 17 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
Companies requiring rotation of auditors:
As per Section 139(2) of the Companies Act, 2013, no listed company or a company belonging to such class or classes of companies as prescribed, shall appoint or re-appoint-

  • an individual as auditor for more than one term of five consecutive years; and
  • an audit firm as auditor for more than two terms of five consecutive years.

Rule 5 of Companies (Audit and Auditors] Rules, 2014, prescribes the following classes of companies for the purpose of rotation:
a. all unlisted public companies having paid up share capital of ₹ 10 crore or more;
b. all private limited companies having paid up share capital of ₹ 20 crore or more;
c. all companies having paid up share capital of below threshold limit mentioned above, but having public borrowings from financial institutions, banks or public deposits of ₹ 50 crores or more.

Question 17.
Write short note on: Provisions regarding re-appointment of a retiring auditor at the Annual General Meeting, for a company not covered under auditor rotation provisions. [May 17 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
Re-appointment of Auditor – Sec. 139(9):
Subject to the provisions of sub-section (1) and the rules made thereunder, a retiring auditor may be re-appointed at an AGM, if:
(a) he is not disqualified for re-appointment;

(b) he has not given the company a notice in writing of his unwillingness to be re-appointed; and

(c) a special resolution has not been passed at that meeting appointing some other auditor or providing expressly that he shall not be re-appointed.
Sec. 139(10) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that where at any AGM no auditor is appointed or reappointed, the existing auditor shall continue to be the auditor of the company.

Question 18.
Explain the manner and procedure of selection and appointment of auditors as per Rule 3 of Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014. [RTP-May 19]
Answer:
Manner and Procedure of selection and appointment of auditors:
Manner and procedure of selection of auditors by the members of the company at AGM has been prescribed under Rule 3 of the Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014. Accordingly:

1. In case of a company that is required to constitute an Audit Committee u/s 177, the committee, and, in cases where such a committee is not required to be constituted, the Board, shall take into consideration the qualifications and experience of the individual or the firm proposed to be considered for appointment as auditor and whether such qualifications and experience are commensurate with the size and requirements of the company:

While considering the appointment, the Audit Committee or the Board, as the case may be, shall have regard to any order or pending proceeding relating to professional matters of conduct against the proposed auditor before the ICA1 or any competent authority or any Court.

2. The Audit Committee or the Board, as the case may be, may call for such other information from the proposed auditor as it may deem fit.

3. Subject to the provisions of sub-rule (1), where a company is required to constitute the Audit Committee, the committee shall recommend the name of an individual or a firm as auditor to the Board for consideration and in other cases, the Board shall consider and recommend an individual or a firm as auditor to the members in the AGM for appointment.

4. If the Board agrees with the recommendation of the Audit Committee, it shall further recommend the appointment of an individual or a firm as auditor to the members in the AGM.

5. If the Board disagrees with the recommendation of the Audit Committee, it shall refer back the recommendation to the committee for reconsideration citing reasons for such disagreement.

6. If the AuditCommittee, after considering the reasons given by the Board, decides not to reconsider its original recommendation, the Board shall record reasons for its disagreement with the committee and send its own recommendation for consideration of the members in the AGM; and if the Board agrees with the recommendations of the Audit Committee, it shall place the matter for consideration by members in the AGM.

Question 19.
Where a company is required to constitute an Audit Committee, all appointments of an auditor under this section shall be made after taking into account the recommendations of such committee. Explain stating also the class of companies required to constitute Audit Committee. [MTP-March 19, May 20]
Answer:
Consideration as to recommendation of Audit Committee:
Sec. 139(11) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that where a company is required to constitute an Audit Committee u/s 177, all appointments, including the filling of a casual vacancy of an auditor under this section shall be made after taking into account the recommendations of such committee.

Companies required to constitute Audit Committee: As per Sec. 177 of Companies Act, 2013, in addition to listed public companies, following classes of companies shall constitute an Audit Committee:

  • all public companies with a paid-up share capital of ₹ 10 Cr. or more;
  • all public companies having turnover of ₹ 100 Cr. or more;
  • all public companies, having in aggregate, outstanding loans, debentures and deposits exceeding ₹ 50 Cr.

Explanation: The paid-up share capital or turnover or outstanding loans, debentures and deposits, as the case may be, as existing on the last date of latest audited F.S. shall be taken into account for this purpose.

Question 20.
Clue Ltd. is a Public unlisted company having paid-up share capital of₹ 9 crores and public borrowings from the financial institutions of ₹ 51 crores. They appointed M/s Pray and Co., a Chartered Accountant firm as the statutory auditor in its annual general meeting for 11 years.
(a) Is the manner of rotation of auditor applicable in case of Clue Ltd.₹
(b) Whether the appointment of M/s Pray and Co. is valid₹ [Nov. 20 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
Appointment and Rotation of company auditor:
(i) Rotation of Auditor:

  • As per Rule 5 of Companies (Audit and Auditor’s) Rules, 2014, provisions related with rotation of auditors are applicable in case of public unlisted companies having paid up capital of ₹ 10 Crore or more and to companies having paid up capital below ₹ 10 Crore, but having public borrowings from financial institutions, banks or public deposits of ₹ 50 Crore or more.
  • In the instant case, as borrowings is of ₹ 50 Crore, provisions related with rotation of auditors are applicable.

(ii) Appointment of Auditor:
As per Section 139(2) of the Companies Act, 2013, no listed company or a company belonging to such class or classes of companies as prescribed, shall appoint or re-appoint-

  • an individual as auditor for more than one term of five consecutive years; and
  • an audit firm as auditor for more than two terms of five consecutive years.
    Clue Ltd. cannot appoint the auditor for more than two terms of five consecutive years each, i.e. M/s Pray & Co. shall hold office from the conclusion of this meeting upto conclusion of 6th AGM and thereafter can be re-appointed as auditor for one more term of five years. The appointment shall be subject to ratification by members at every AGM of the company. As a result, the appointment made by Clue Ltd. for 11 years is not valid.

Question 21.
Why Central Government permission is required, when the auditor is to be removed before expiry of their term, but the same is not needed when the auditors are changed after expiry of their term.
Answer:
Removal of an auditor before expiry of term:

  • Sec. 140(1) of Companies Act, 2013 requires prior approval of Central Government in case of removal of an auditor before the expiry of his term. This is a very stringent provision to ensure that any auditor who is inconvenient to the management cannot be removed so easily. Such a provision goes a long way to ensure independence of auditor.
  • Therefore, law has provided this safeguard so that Central Govt, can know the real reason of auditor’s removal before expiry of his term and if not satisfied with the reason, may not accord approval.
  • On the other hand, if the auditor has completed his term, i.e. has submitted his report and thereafter he is not re-appointed, then the matter is not serious enough for Central Govt, to call for its intervention.
  • In view of the above, Central Govt, permission is required when auditors are removed before expiry of their term and the same is not required when they are not re-appointed after the expiry of their term.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 22.
PQR Company Ltd. removed their first auditor by passing a resolution in the meeting of the Board of Directors for his removal without obtaining prior approval from the Central Government. Offer your comments in this regard. [Nov. 10(4 Marks)]
Answer:
Removal of first Auditor:

  • As per Sec. 140(1) of the Companies Act, 2013, an auditor appointed u/s 139 may be removed from his office before the expiry of his term only by a special resolution of the company, after obtaining the prior approval of the Central Government.
  • For this purpose, an application to the Central Government for removal of auditor shall be made in Form ADT-2 and shall be accompanied with prescribed fees.
  • The application shall be made to the Central Government within thirty days of the resolution passed by the Board.
  • The company shall hold the general meeting within sixty days of receipt of approval of the Central Government for passing the special resolution.
  • In the instant case the first auditor appointed by the Board of Directors was removed by a resolution in the meeting of the Board of Directors inspite of the Special resolution of the Company and without the prior approval of the Central Government in that behalf.

Conclusion: Removal of Auditor is Invalid as Special Resolution has not been passed and approval of Central Govt, not obtained.

Question 23.
Comment on the following: Removal of auditor before expiry of term. [Nov. 11 (6 Marks)]
Or
Discuss about the provisions for removal of auditor before expiry of term. [Nov. 15 (6 Marks)]
Or
The auditor CA Z appointed under section 139 was removed from his office before the expiry of his term by an ordinary resolution of the company. Comment explaining clearly the procedure of removal of auditor before expiry of term. [MTP-Oct. 18]
Or
Board of Directors of “XYZ Ltd.” found the auditors of the Company acted in a fraudulent manner, and decided to remove the auditors in board’s meeting. Comment on the action of Board of Directors and describe correct procedure to be followed for removal of auditors before expiry of their term. [May 19 (4 Marks}]
Answer:
Removal of Auditor before expiry of term:
Sec. 140(1} of Companies Act, 2013 governs the provisions relating to removal of auditor before expiry of term. The salient features of Sec. 140(1} in reading with Rule 7 of Companies (Audit and Auditors} Rules, 2014 are:

  • The auditor appointed under section 139 may be removed from his office before the expiry of his term only by a special resolution of the company and after obtaining the previous approval of the Central Government by making an application in Form ADT-2 and shall be accompanied with the prescribed fees.
  • The application shall be made to the Central Government within 30 days of the resolution passed by the Board.
  • The Company shall hold the general meeting within 60 days of receipt of approval of the Central Government for passing the special resolution.
  • Before taking any action for removal of auditor before the expiry of his term, the auditor concerned shall be given a reasonable opportunity of being heard.

Conclusion:
Removal of auditor before expiry of tenure by ordinary resolution or Board resolution is not valid.

Question 24.
As one of the Joint auditors of X Ltd. a non listed company not covered u/s 139(2) for the immediately preceding five financial years, you have been considered for re-appointment by the members in the AGM as the sole auditor, while the said Joint auditors are not re-appointed. Comment. [Nov. 16 (6 Marks)]
Answer:
Appointment of Sole Auditor:
When one of the joint auditors of the previous years is considered for re-appointment by the members as the sole auditor for the next tenure, it is similar to non-re-appointment of one of the retiring joint auditors. As per Sec. 140(4} of the Companies Act, 2013, special notice shall be required for a resolution at an AGM appointing as auditor a person other than a retiring auditor, or providing expressly that a retiring auditor shall not be re-appointed, except where the retiring auditor has completed a consecutive tenure of five years or, as the case maybe, ten years, as provided u/s 139(2}.

Accordingly, provisions of the Companies Act, 2013 to be complied with are as under:
(a) Special Notice: Ascertain that special notice u/s 140 (4} of the Companies Act, 2013 was received by the company from requisite number of members (1% of total voting power or paid up capital not less than ₹ 5 Lacs} at least 14 days before the AGM date.

(b) Sending copy of notice: Check whether the said notice has been sent to all the members at least 7 days before the date of the AGM.

(c) Contents of Notice: Verify that the notice contains an express intention of a member for proposing the resolution for appointing a sole auditor in place of both the joint auditors who retire at the meeting but are eligible for re-appointment.

(d) Notice to Auditor: Ensure that the notice has also been sent to the retiring auditor.

(e) Sending the Representation: Verify whether any representation, received from the retiring auditor was sent to the members of the company.

(f) Consideration of representation: Verify from the minutes book whether the representation received from the retiring joint auditor was considered at the AGM.

Question 25.
CA. Donald was appointed as the auditor of PS Ltd. at the remuneration of ₹ 30,000. However, after 4 months of continuing his services, he could not continue to hold his office of the auditor as his wife got a government job at a distant place and he needs to shift along with her to the new place. Thus, he resigned from the company and did not perform his responsibilities relating to filing of statement to the company and the registrar indicating the reasons and other facts as may be relevant with regard to his resignation.
How much fine may he be punishable with under section 140(3) for non-compliance of section 140(2) of the Companies Act, 2013₹ [RTP-May 19, MTP-Oct. 19]
Answer:
Fine prescribed u/s 140(3) for non-compliance of Sec. 140(2):

  • Sec. 140(2) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that the auditor who has resigned from the company shall file within a period of 30 days from the date of resignation, a statement in the Form ADT-3 with the company and the Registrar.
  • In case of Govt, companies or Govt, owned/controlled companies, the auditor shall also file such statement with the CAG, indicating the reasons and other facts as may be relevant with regard to his resignation.
  • As per Sec. 140(3) of Companies Act, 2013, if the auditor does not comply with the provisions of Sec. 140(2), he or it shall be liable to a penalty of ₹ 50,000 or an amount equal to the remuneration of the auditor, whichever is less, and in case of continuing failure, with further penalty of ₹ 500 for each day after the first during which such failure continues, subject to a maximum of ₹ 5 lakh.

Question 26.
“Mr. A”, a practicing Chartered Accountant, is holding securities of “XYZ Ltd.” having face value of ₹ 900. Whether Mr. A is qualified for appointment as an Auditor of “XYZ Ltd.”₹ Would your answer will be changed if the securities are being hold by relative of Mr. A.
Answer:
Disqualification as to Security:
As per section 141(3) (d) (i) an auditor is disqualified to be appointed as an auditor if he, or his relative or partner holding any security of or interest in the company or its subsidiary, or of its holding or associate company or a subsidiary of such holding company.

Conclusion: In the present case, Mr. A is holding security of ₹ 900 in the XYZ Ltd., therefore he is not eligible for appointment as an Auditor of “XYZ Ltd”.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 27.
“Mr. P” is a practicing Chartered Accountant and “Mr. Q”, the relative of “Mr. P”, is holding securities of “ABC Ltd.” having face value of ₹ 90,000. Whether “Mr. P” is Qualified from being appointed as an Auditor of “ABC Ltd”₹
Answer:
Disqualifications as to Securities:
As per section 141(3)(d) (i) an auditor is disqualified to be appointed as an auditor if he, or his relative or partner holding any security of or interest in the company or its subsidiary, or of its holding or associate company or a subsidiary of such holding company.

However, the relative of the auditor may hold the securities or interest in the company of face value not exceeding ₹ 1,00,000.

Conclusion: In the present case, Mr. Q (relative of Mr. P, an auditor), is having securities of ₹ 90,000 face Value in the ABC Pvt. Ltd., which is as per requirement of proviso to section 141 (3) (d) (i), Therefore, Mr. P will not be disqualified to be appointed as an auditor of ABC Ltd.

Question 28.
“BC & Co.” is an Audit Firm having partners “Mr. B” and “Mr. C”, and “Mr. A” the relative of “Mr. C”, is holding securities of “MWF Ltd.” having face value of ₹ 1,01,000. Whether “BC & Co.” is qualified from being appointed as an Auditor of “MWF Ltd”₹
Would you answer will be changed if Mr. A hold 5000 shares (face value of ₹ 10 each) in MWF Ltd. Having market value of ₹ 1,50,000.
Answer:
Disqualifications as to security:
As per section 141(3) (d) (i) an auditor is disqualified to be appointed as an auditor if he, or his relative or partner holding any security of or interest in the company or its subsidiary, or of its holding or associate company or a subsidiary of such holding company.
However, the relative of the auditor may hold the securities or interest in the company of face value not exceeding of ₹ 1,00,000.

Conclusion: In the instant case BC & Co, will be disqualified for appointment as an auditor of MWF Ltd. as the relative of Mr. C i.e. partner of BC & Co., is holding the securities in MWF Ltd. which is exceeding the limit mentioned in provison to section 141(3)(d)(i).
However, in the second case, BC & Co. is eligible to be appointed as auditor, as relative may hold securities of face value upto ₹ 1 Lac.

Question 29.
M/s. ABC & Co. is an audit firm, having patterns CA. A, CA. B and CA. C. The firm has been offered the appointment as an auditor of XYZ Ltd. for the financial year 2020-21.
Mr. D, the relative of CA. A, is holding 25,000 shares (face value of ₹ 10 each) in XYZ Ltd. having market value of₹ Rs. 90,000. Are M/s. ABC & Co. qualified to be appointed as auditors of XYZ Ltd. (May 18 (4 Marks), MTP-May 20, RTP-Nov. 20]
Answer:
Disqualifications as to security:

  • As per section 141 (3) (d) (i) an auditor is disqualified to be appointed as an auditor if he, or his relative or partner holding any security of or interest in the company or its subsidiary, or of its holding or associate company or a subsidiary of such holding company.
  • However, the relative of the auditor may hold the securities or interest in the company of face value not exceeding of ₹ 1,00,000.

Conclusion: In the instant case ABC & Co, will be disqualified for appointment as an auditor of XYZ Ltd. as the relative of Mr. C i.e. partner of BC & Co., is holding the securities in XYZ Ltd. of face value of ₹ 2,50,000 which is exceeding the limit mentioned in proviso to section 141(3)(d)(i).

Question 30.
A, a chartered accountant has been appointed as auditor of Laxman Ltd. in the AGM of the company held in Sep. 2019, which assignment he accepted. Subsequently in January, 2018 he joined B, another chartered accountant, who is the Manager Finance of Laxman Ltd., as partner. [RTP-May 19]
Answer:
Disqualification as to partner of employee:

  • Section 141(3)(c) of the Companies Act, 2013 prescribes that any person who is a partner or in employment of an officer or employee of the company will be disqualified to act as an auditor of a company.
  • Sec. 141(4) provides that an auditor who becomes subject, after his appointment, to any of the disqualifications specified in Sec. 141 (3), he shall be deemed to have vacated his office as an auditor.

Conclusion: In the present case, A, an auditor of M/s Laxman Ltd., joined as partner with B, who is Manager Finance of M/s Laxman Limited, will be disqualified by Sec. 141 (3)(c) and, therefore, he shall be deemed to have vacated office of the auditor of M/s Laxman Limited.

Question 31.
An auditor purchased goods worth ₹ 501,500 on credit from a company being audited by him. The company allowed him one month’s credit, which it normally allowed to all known customers.
Answer:
Disqualification as to indebtedness:

  • Section 141(3)(d) of the Companies Act, 2013 specifies that a person shall be disqualified to act as an auditor if he is indebted to the company for an amount exceeding ₹ 5 Lacs.
  • Sec. 141(4) provides that a person appointed as auditor incurs any of the disqualification mentioned u/s 141(3) after his appointment, he shall vacate the office immediately and it will be treated a casual vacancy.
  • Where an auditor purchases goods or services from a company audited by him on credit, he is considered to be indebted to the company and in case the outstanding amount exceeds ₹ 5 Lacs, he is disqualified to be appointed as auditor of the company.
  • It does not make any difference if the company allows him the same credit period as it allows to other customers.

Conclusion: In instant case, auditor has become indebted to the company and consequently he has
deemed to have vacated his office.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 32.
Ram and Hanuman Associates, Chartered Accountants in practice have been appointed as Statutory Auditor of Krishna Ltd. for the accounting year 2019-2020. Mr. Hanuman holds 100 equity shares of Shiva Ltd., a subsidiary company of Krishna Ltd.
Answer:
Auditor holding securities of a company:

  • As per Sec. 141 (3) (d) of the Companies Act, 2013, a person shall not be eligible for appointment as an auditor of a company, who, or his relative or partner is holding any security of or interest in the company or its subsidiary, or of its holding or associate company or a subsidiary of such holding company.
  • In the present case, Mr. Hanuman, Chartered Accountant, a partner of M/s Ram and Hanuman Associates, holds 100 equity shares of Shiva Ltd. which is a subsidiary of Krishna Ltd.

Conclusion: The firm, M/s Ram and Hanuman Associates would be disqualified to be appointed as statutory auditor of Krishna Ltd., which is the holding company of Shiva Ltd., because one of the partner Mr. Hanuman is holding equity shares of its subsidiary.

Question 33.
Mr. Amar, a Chartered Accountant, bought a car financed at ₹ 7,00,000 by Chaudhary Finance Ltd., which is a holding company of Charan Ltd. and Das Ltd. He has been the statutory auditor of Das Ltd. and continues to be even after taking the loan.
Answer:
Disqualification as to indebtedness:

  • As per Sec. 141(3)(cf)(;7) of the Companies Act, 2013, a person is not eligible for appointment as auditor of any company, If he is indebted to the company, or its subsidiary, or its holding or associate company or a subsidiary of such holding company, in excess of ₹ 5 Lacs.
  • In the given case Mr. Amar is disqualified to act as an auditor u/s 141(3)(d)(;7) as he is indebted to M/s Chaudhary Finance Ltd. for more than ₹ 5 Lacs.
  • Further he cannot act as an auditor of any subsidiary of Chaudhary Finance Ltd. i.e. he is also disqualified to work in Charan Ltd. & Das Ltd.
  • Further Sec. 141 (4) provides that a person appointed as auditor incurs any of the disqualification mentioned u/s 141(3) after his appointment, he shall vacate the office immediately and it will be treated a casual vacancy.

Conclusion: Mr. Amar should vacate his office immediately and Das Ltd. must have to appoint any other CA as an auditor of the company.

Question 34.
Praveen, a member of the ICAI, does not hold a Certificate of practice. Is his appointment as an auditor valid₹
Answer:
Qualifications of an Auditor:

  • As per Sec. 141(1) a person shall be qualified for appointment as an auditor of a company, only if he is a Chartered Accountant within the meaning of the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949.
  • Under the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949, only a Chartered Accountant holding the certificate of practice can engage in public practice.

Conclusion: Mr. Praveen does not hold a certificate of practice and hence cannot be appointed as an auditor of a company.

Question 35.
‘B’ owes ₹ 5,01,000 to ‘C’ Ltd., of which he is an auditor. Is his appointment valid₹ Will it make any difference, if the advance is taken for meeting-out travelling expenses₹
Answer:
Indebtedness to the Company:
As per Section 141 (3) (d) (ii) of the Companies Act, 2013, a person who, or his relative or partner is indebted to the company, or its subsidiary, or its holding or associate company, or a subsidiary of its holding company, for an amount exceeding ₹ 5 Lacs, then he is not qualified for appointment as an auditor of a company.

Even if the advance was taken for meeting out travelling expenses particularly before commencement of audit work, his appointment is not valid because in such a case also the auditor shall be indebted to the company. The auditor is entitled to recover fees on a progressive basis only.

Conclusion: B’s appointment is not valid and he is disqualified as the amount of debt exceeds ₹ 5,00,000.

Question 36.
Mr. Aditya, a practising chartered accountant is appointed as a “Tax Consultant” of ABC Ltd., in which his father Mr. Singhvi is the Managing Director.
Answer:
Appointment of relative as tax consultant:

  • Sec. 141(3)(f) of Companies Act, 2013 disqualifies a person to be appointed as auditor whose relative is a director or is in employment of the company as director or key managerial personnel.
  • However, no such disqualification is prescribed under the law for appointing a person as a tax consultant therefore sec. 141(3)(f) will not be attracted.

Conclusion: Mr. Aditya can be appointed as a tax consultant irrespective that his father is the managing director of the company.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 37.
CA. P is providing the services of investment banking to C Ltd. Later on, he was also offered to be appointed as an auditor of the company for the current financial year. Advise. [RTP-May 18]
Answer:
Services not to be Rendered by the Auditor:
Section 144 of the Companies Act, 2013 prescribes certain services not to be rendered by the auditor. ‘ An auditor appointed under this Act shall provide to the company only such other services as are approved by the Board of Directors or the audit committee, as the case may be, but which shall not include any of the following services (whether such services are rendered directly or indirectly to the company or its holding company or subsidiary company), namely:

  1. accounting and book keeping services;
  2. internal audit;
  3. design and implementation of any financial information system;
  4. actuarial services;
  5. investment advisory services;
  6. investment banking services;
  7. rendering of outsourced financial services;
  8. management services; and
  9. any other kind of services as may be prescribed.

Further section 141(3)(i) of the Companies Act, 2013 also disqualify a person for appointment as an auditor of a company who is engaged as on the date of appointment in consulting and specialized services as provided in section 144.

In the given case, CA Innocent was appointed as an auditor of Contravene Ltd. He was offered additional services of actuarial, investment advisory and investment banking which was also approved by the Board of Directors.

Conclusion: The auditor is advised not to accept the services as these services are specifically notified in the services not to be rendered by him as an auditor as per section 144 of the Act.

Question 38.
Mr. Y was appointed as an auditor of PQR Ltd. for the year ended 31-3-2021 at the AGM held on 16-8-2020. Mr. Y has been indebted to the company for sum of ₹ 5,10,000 as on 1-4-2020, the opening date of accounting year which has been subject to his audit. However, Mr. Y having come to know that he might be appointed as auditor, he repaid the amount on 10-8-2020. One of the shareholders, complains that the appointment of Mr. Y as an auditor was invalid because he incurred disqualification u/s 141 of the Companies Act, 2013. Comment. [May 10 (6 Marks)]
Answer:
Relevant Date for determining Disqualification:

  • As per Sec. 141(3) (d) of the Companies Act, 2013, a person who is indebted to the company for an amount exceeding ₹ 5,00,000 shall be disqualified to act as an auditor of such company.
  • The relevant date for determining whether a person is disqualified or not is the date of appointment. Hence, if a person has liquidated his debt before the appointment date, there is no disqualification to be construed for such appointment.
  • In the given case, Mr. Y was appointment as an auditor of PQR Ltd. for the year ended 31-3-2021 at the AGM held on 16-8-2020. He repaid the loan amount fully to the company on 10-8-2020 i.e. before the date of his appointment.

Conclusion:
The appointment of Mr. Y as an auditor is valid and the shareholder’s complaint is not acceptable.

Question 39.
Comment on the following: Sri & Company, a firm of Chartered Accountants was appointed as statutory auditors of Aaradhana Company Ltd. Aaradhana Company Ltd. holds 51% shares in Sarang Company Ltd. Mr. Sri, one of the partners of Sri & Company, owed ₹ 1,500 as on the date of appointment to Sarang Company Ltd. for goods purchased in normal course of business. [Nov. 10 (5 Marks)]
Answer:
Disqualification as to indebtedness:
As per Section 141[3](d)(ii) of the Companies Act, 2013, a person who, or his relative or partner is indebted to the company, or its subsidiary, or its holding or associate company, or a subsidiary of its holding company, for an amount exceeding ₹ 5,00,000 then he is not qualified for appointment as an auditor of a company.

Conclusion: Mr Sri is not disqualified to be appointed as auditor of the company as he is indebted to the company for an amount not exceeding ₹ 5,00,000, consequently, Sri & Co., is not disqualified to be appointed as an auditor of Aaradhana Company Ltd.

Question 40.
M/s RM & Co. is an audit firm having partners CA. R and CA. M. The firm has been offered the ap-pointment as an auditor of Enn Ltd. for the Financial Year 2020-21. Mr. Bee, the relative of CA. R, is holding 5,000 shares (face value of₹ 10 each) in Enn Ltd. having market value of₹ 1,50,000. One of the shareholders, complains that the appointment of RM & Co. as an auditor is invalid because it incurred disqualification u/s 141 of the Companies Act, 2013. Analyse and advise. [MTP-March 18, RTP-May 18]
Answer:
Disqualification u/s 141(3)(d):
1. Section 141(3)(d)(i) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that a person shall not be eligible for appointment as an auditor of a company, who, or his relative or partner is holding any security of or interest in the company or its subsidiary, or of its holding or associate company or a subsidiary of such holding company. However, as per proviso to this section, the relative of the person may hold the securities or interest in the company of face value not exceeding of ₹ 1,00,000.

2. In the instant case, M/s RM & Co. is an audit firm having partners CA. R and CA. M. Mr. Bee is a relative of CA. Rand he is holding shares of Enn Ltd. of face value of₹ 50,000 only (5,000 shares × ₹ 10 per share).

Conclusion: M/s RM & Co. is not disqualified for appointment as an auditor of Enn Ltd. as the relative of CA. R (i.e. partner of M/s RM & Co.) is holding the securities in Enn Ltd. which is within the limit mentioned in proviso to section 141(3)(d)(i) of the Companies Act, 2013.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 41.
RGS & Co. a firm of Chartered Accountants has three partners, namely, R, G & S. The firm is allotted the audit of BY Ltd. R, partner in the firm subsequently holds 100 shares in BY Ltd. Comment. [MTP-Oct. 18]
Answer:
Disqualification u/s 141(3)(d):
1. As per Sec. 141(3)(d) of Companies Act, 2013 read with Rule 10 of the Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014, a person who, or his relative or partner is holding any security of or interest in the company or its subsidiary, or of its holding or associate company or a subsidiary of such holding company, shall not be eligible for appointment as an auditor of a company However, a relative may hold security or interest in the company of face value not exceeding ₹1 lakh.

2. Sec. 141(4) provides that where a person appointed as an auditor of a company incurs any of the disqualifications mentioned in Sec. 141(3) after his appointment, he shall vacate his office as such auditor and such vacation shall be deemed to be a casual vacancy in the office of the auditor.

3. In the instant case, RGS & Co. a firm of Chartered Accountants has three partners, namely, R, G & S. The firm is allotted the audit of BY Ltd. R, partner in the firm subsequently holds 100 shares in BY Ltd.

Conclusion: Applying the provisions of Sec. 141(3)(GQ and Sec. 141(4), it may be concluded that Firm of RGS, Chartered Accountants is not eligible to continue as auditors. Firm shall vacate its office as auditor and such vacation shall be treated as casual vacancy.

Question 42.
“CA. NM who is rendering management consultancy service to LA Ltd. wants to accept offer letter for appointment as an auditor of the LA Ltd. for the next financial year.” Discuss with reference to the provision of the Companies Act, 2013. [Nov. 18 (5 Marks)]
Answer:
Disqualification u/s 141(3)(i):

  • Section 141 (3)(i) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that a person who directly or indirectly renders any service referred to in Sec. 144 to the company or its holding company or its subsidiary company shall not be eligible for appointment as an auditor of that company.
  • Sec. 144 of Companies Act, 2013 provides the list of services which an auditor of the company cannot render, directly or indirectly to the company, its holding or subsidiary company. Management services is included in the list of services prescribed under section 144.
  • In the instant case, CA. NM who is rendering management consultancy service to LA Ltd. wants to accept offer letter for appointment as an auditor of the LA Ltd. for the next financial year.

Conclusion:
CANM is disqualified by virtue of provisions of Sec. 141(3)(z) of Companies Act, 2013. Hence, he is advised not to accept the appointment as auditor as long as he is rendering management consultancy services to the company.

Question 43.
“ABC & Co.” is an Audit Firm having partners “Mr. A”, “Mr. B” and “Mr. C”, Chartered Accountants. “Mr. A”, “Mr. B” and “Mr. C” are holding appointment as an Auditor in 4,6 and 10 Companies respectively.
(i) Provide the maximum number of Audits remaining in the name of “ABC & Co.”
(ii) Provide the maximum number of Audits remaining in the name of individual partner i.e. Mr. A, Mr. B and Mr. C.
(iii) Can ABC & Co. accept the appointment as an auditor in 60 private companies having paid-up share capital less than ₹ 100 Cr., which has not committed default in filing its financial statements u/s 137 or annual return u/s 92 of Companies Act with the Registrar, 2 small companies and 1 dormant company?
(iv) Would your answer be different, if out of those 60 private companies, 45 companies are having paid-up share capital of ₹ 110 crore each? [MTP-Oct. 20]
Answer:
Ceiling on Number of Audit:
As per section 141(3) (g) of the Companies Act, 2013, a person shall not be eligible for appointment as an auditor if he is in full time employment elsewhere or a person or a partner of a firm holding appointment as its auditor, if such person or partner is at the date of such appointment or reappointment holding appointment as auditor of more than twenty companies;

As per section 141(3)(g), this limit of 20 company audits is per person. In the case of an audit firm having 3 partners, the overall ceiling will be 3 × 20 = 60 company audits. Sometimes, a chartered accountant is a partner in a number of auditing firms. In such a case, all the firms in which he is partner or proprietor will be together entitled to 20 company audits on his account.

Conclusion:
(i) ABC & Co. can hold appointment as an auditor of 40 more companies as computed below:
Total Number of Audits available to the Firm = 20 × 3 = 60
Number of Audits already taken by all the partners in their individual capacity = 4 + 6 + 10 = 20
Remaining number of Audits available to the Firm = 40

(ii) Mr. A can hold: 20 – 4 = 16 more audits.
Mr. B can hold 20 – 6 = 14 more audits and
Mr. C can hold 20 – 10 = 10 more audits.

(iii) ABC & Co. can hold appointment as an auditor in all the 60 private companies having paid-up share capital less than ₹ 100 crore, 2 small companies and 1 dormant company as these are excluded from the ceiling limit of company audits given under section 141 (3) (g) of the Companies Act, 2013.

(iv) ABC & Co. can accept the appointment as an auditor for 2 small companies, 1 dormant company, 15 private companies having paid-up share capital less than ₹ 100 crore, and 40 private companies having paid-up share capital of ₹ 110 crore each in addition to above 20 company audits already holding.

Question 44.
K8C & Co. a firm of Chartered Accountants has three partners, K, B & C; K is also in whole time employment elsewhere. The firm is offered the audit of ABC Ltd. and is already holding audit of 40 companies. Comment
Answer:
Ceiling on Number of Company Audits:

  • As per section 141(3) (g) of the Companies Act, 2013, a person shall not be eligible for appointment as an auditor if he is in full time employment elsewhere or a person or a partner of a firm holding appointment as its auditor, if such person or partner is at the date of such appointment or reappointment holding appointment as auditor of more than twenty companies, other than one person company, dormant companies, small companies and private companies having paid up capital less then 100 Crores.
  • In the firm of KBC & Co., K is in whole-time employment elsewhere, therefore, he will be excluded in determining the number of company audits that the firm can hold.
  • If B and C do not hold any audits in their personal capacity or as partners of other firms, the total number of company audits that can be accepted by KBC & Co., is forty, and in the given case company is already holding forty audits.

Conclusion: KBC & Co. can’t accept the offer for audit of ABC Ltd.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 45.
PBS & Associates, a firm of Chartered Accountants, has three partners P, B and S. The firm is already having audit of 45 companies. The firm is offered 20 company audits. Decide and advise whether PBS & Associates will exceed the ceiling prescribed under Section 141(3)(g) of the Companies Act, 2013 by accepting the above audit assignments?
Answer:
Ceiling on Number of Company Audits:

  • As per section 141(3)(g) of the Companies Act, 2013, a person shall not be eligible for appointment as an auditor if he is in full time employment elsewhere or a person or a partner of a firm holding appointment as its auditor, if such person or partner is at the date of such appointment or reappointment holding appointment as auditor of more than twenty companies, other than one person company, dormant companies, small companies and private companies having paid up capital less than 100 Crores. which has not committed default in filing its financial statements u/s 137 or annual return u/s92 of Companies Act with the Registrar.
  • In the case of firm of auditors, it has been further provided that specified number of companies shall be construed as the number of companies specified for every partner of the firm who is not in full time employment elsewhere.
  • In the firm of PBS & Associates, the overall ceiling will be 3 × 20 = 60 company audits.
  • Assuming that the partners, P, B & S do not hold any audits in their personal capacity or as partners of other firms, the total number of company audits that can be accepted by PBS & Associates is sixty, and in the given case company is already holding forty five audits.

Conclusion: PBS & Associates can accept offer of audit of 15 Companies.

Question 46.
Discuss on the following: Ceiling on number of audit in a company to be accepted by an auditor. [Nov. 12 (5 Marks)]
Or
What are the provisions prescribed under Companies Act, 2013 in respect of ceiling on number of audits in a company to be accepted by an auditor? [MTP-April 19]
Or
What are the provisions prescribed under companies Act, 2013 in respect of ceiling on number of audits in a company to be accepted by an auditor? [MTP-April 19]
Answer:
Ceiling on number of audit;
1. Section 141(3)(g) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that a person is not eligible to be appointed as auditor of a company if he is in full time employment elsewhere or a person or a partner of a firm holding appointment as its auditor, if such persons or partner is at the date of such appointment or reappointment holding appointment as auditor of more than 20 Companies other than one person company, dormant companies, small companies and private companies having paid up share capital less than 100 Crores, which has not committed default in filing its financial statements u/s 13 7 or annual return u/s 92 of Companies Act with the Registrar.

2. In the case of firm of auditors, it has been further provided that specified number of companies shall be construed as the number of companies specified for every partner of the firm who is not in full time employment elsewhere.

3. Where any partner of the firm is also a partner of any other firm or firms of auditors, the number of companies which may be taken into account, by all the firms together, in relation to such partner shall not exceed the specified number, in the aggregate.

4. Where any partner of a firm of auditors is also holding office, in his individual capacity, as the auditor of one or more companies, the number of companies which may be taken into account in his case shall not exceed the specified number, in the aggregate.

Question 47.
“The remuneration of the auditor of a company shall be fixed in its general meeting or in such manner as may be determined therein.” Explain with reference to provisions of the Companies Act, 2013. [MTP-Oct. 19]
Answer:
Remuneration of Auditors:
As per Sec. 142 of the Act, the remuneration of the auditor of a company shall be fixed in its general meeting or in such manner as may be determined therein. However, board may fix remuneration of the first auditor appointed by it.

Further, the remuneration, in addition to the fee payable to an auditor, includes the expenses, if any, incurred by the auditor in connection with the audit of the company and any facility extended to him but does not include any remuneration paid to him for any other service rendered by him at the request of the company.

Hence, it may be concluded that the remuneration to auditor shall also include any facility provided to him.

Question 48.
“Auditor of a company shall have a right of access to the books of account and vouchers of the company” Explain.
Answer:
Auditor’s Right of Access to Books of account and vouchers of the company:
Sec. 143(1)of Companies Act, 2013 provides that every auditor of a company shall have aright of access at all times to the books of account and vouchers of the company, whether kept at the registered office of the company or at any other place.

The term ‘books of account and vouchers’ includes all books which have any bearing or are likely to have any bearing on the accounts, whether these be the usual financial books or the statutory or statistical books. Similarly, the term ‘voucher’ includes all or any of the correspondence which may in any way serve to vouch for the accuracy of the accounts.

When the auditor is denied access to books, etc., his only remedy would be to report to the members that he could not obtain all the information and explanations he had required or considered necessary for the performance of his duties as auditors.

Question 49.
Explain Auditor’s right and duties in relation to-
(a) Report to the members of the company on the accounts examined by him [RTP-Nov. 19]
(b) Obtain information and explanation from officers. [RTP-Nov. 18]
Answer:
Auditor’s Right and Duties in relation to report on the accounts examined:
Sec. 143(2] of the Companies Act, 2013 provides that the auditor shall make a report to the members of the company on the following:

  • accounts examined by him and
  • on every financial statement which are required by or under this Act to be laid before the company in general meeting and

The Auditor’s Report shall state that to the best of his information and knowledge, the said accounts, financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the company’s affairs as at the end of its financial year and profit or loss and cash flow for the year and such other matters as may be prescribed.

Auditor’s Right and Duties to Obtain information and explanation from officers:

  • Sec. 143(1] of the Companies Act, 2013 provides that every Auditor shall be entitled to require from the officers of the company such information and explanation as he may consider necessary for the performance of his duties as auditor.
  • As per Sec. 2(59] of Companies Act, 2013, the term ‘officer’ includes any director, manager or key managerial personnel or any person in accordance with whose directions or instructions the BOD or any one or more of the directors is or are accustomed to act.
  • When the auditor is not provided the information required by him or is denied access to books, etc., his only remedy would be to report to the members that he could not obtain all the information and explanations he had required or considered necessary for the performance of his duties as auditors.

Question 50.
State the matters to be specified in Auditor’s Report in terms of provisions of Section 143(3) of the Companies Act, 2013.
Answer:
Matters to be specified in Auditor’s report in terms of provisions of Section 143(3):
Sec. 143(3) of Companies Act, 2013 requires that he auditor’s report shall also state the following:
(a) whether he has sought and obtained all the information and explanations which to the best of his knowledge and belief were necessary for the purpose of his audit and if not, the details thereof and the effect of such information on the financial statements;

(b) whether, in his opinion, proper books of account as required by law have been kept by the company so far as appears from his examination of those books and proper returns adequate for the purposes of his audit have been received from branches not visited by him;

(c) whether the report on the accounts of any branch office of the company audited u/s 143(8] by a person other than the company’s auditor has been sent to him under the proviso to that sub-section and the manner in which he has dealt with it in preparing his report;

(d) whether the company’s balance sheet and profit and loss account dealt with in the report are in agreement with the books of account and returns;

(e) whether, in his opinion, the financial statements comply with the accounting standards;

(f) the observations or comments of the auditors on financial transactions or matters which have any adverse effect on the functioning of the company;

(g) whether any director is disqualified from being appointed as a director under sub-section (2) of section 164;

(h) any qualification, reservation or adverse remark relating to the maintenance of accounts and other matters connected therewith;

(i) whether the company has adequate internal financial controls with reference to financial statements in place and the operating effectiveness of such controls;

(j) such other matters as may be prescribed.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 51.
While conducting the audit of a limited company for the year ended 31st March, 2021, the auditor wanted to refer to the Minute Books. The Board of Directors refused to show the Minute Books to the auditor.
Or
During the audit of PQR Ltd. you as an auditor requested officers of the company to have access to secretarial records and correspondence which they refused to provide. Comment. [MTP-April 19]
Answer:
Right of Access to Books of Account:

  • Sec. 143(1) of the Companies Act, 2013 grants powers to the auditor that every auditor has a right of access, at all times, to the books of account and vouchers of the company.
  • The term books of account include all books which have any bearing or are likely to have any bearing on the accounts, whether these be the usual financial books or the statutory or statistical books.
  • In order to verify actions of the company and to vouch and verify some of the transactions of the company, it is necessary for the auditor to refer to the decisions of the shareholders and/ or the directors of the company.
  • It is, therefore, essential for the auditor to refer to the Minute Books. In the absence of the Minute Books, the auditor may not be able to vouch/verify certain transactions of the company.

Conclusion: In case the directors have refused to produce the Minute Books, the auditor may consider
extending the audit procedure as also consider qualifying his report in any appropriate manner.

Question 52.
The auditor of X Ltd. did not report on the matters, specified u/s 143(1) of the Companies Act, 2013, on which he inquired into, because of the reason that he was satisfied. But the management of the company wanted the auditor to report on those matters so that the members can also be aware of the true position of the company. Comment as to whether the auditor is required to report the matters, specified under the Act, he inquired into and whether the contention of the management is sustainable.
Answer:
Reporting of Matters contained under Section 143(1) of the Companies Act, 2013:
1. Sec. 143(1) of the Act deals with the duties of an auditor requiring him to make an inquiry in respect of specified propriety matters.

2. The matters in respect of which the inquiry has to be made by the auditor are relating to loans and advances on the basis of security, transactions represented merely by book entries, investments sold at less than cost price, loans and advances shown as deposits, personal expenses charged to revenue account etc.

3. The law requires the auditor to make an inquiry, the Research Committee of the Institute opined that the auditor is not required to report on these matters unless he has any special comments to make on any of the items referred to therein. If the auditor is satisfied as a result of the inquiries, he has no further duty to report that he is so satisfied.

4. Therefore, it could be said that the auditor should make a report to the members in case he finds answer to any of these matters in adverse,

Conclusion: The auditor of X Ltd. is correct in non-reporting on the matters specified in Sec. 143(1) of the Act and hence, the contention of the management is not sustainable.

Question 53.
“Travelling expenses of ₹ 2.25 lakhs shown in Statement of Profit and Loss of X Ltd., including a sum of₹ 1.10 lakhs spent by a Director on his foreign travel for company’s business accompanied by his mother for her medical treatment”. Comment.
Answer:
Personal Expenses of Directors

  • All payments to Directors as remuneration or perquisites whether in the case of a public or private company need to be authorised in accordance with the Companies Act as well as Articles of Association of the company.
  • If the terms of appointment of a Director include payment of expenses of a personal nature, then such expenses can be incurred by the company; otherwise, no such expense can be incurred or reimbursed by the company.
  • In the instant case the auditor has to ensure that the payment made by the company towards foreign travel of Director’s mother is covered by terms of appointment or approved by the company in general meeting.
  • This payment is also covered u/s 143(1), and hence auditor is required to inquire into the matter and make a disclosure in his report accordingly.

Question 54.
M/s XYZ & Co., auditors of Goodwill Education Foundation, a recognised non-profit organisation feels that the standards on auditing need not to be applied as Goodwill Education Foundation is a non-profit making concern.
Answer:
Compliance with Standards on Auditing;

  • As per Sec. 143(9) of the Companies Act, 2013, every auditor shall comply with the auditing standards. Further as per Sec. 143(10), the Central Government may prescribe the standards of auditing or any addendum thereto, as recommended by the ICAI, in consultation with and after examination of the recommendations made by the NFRA.
  • However, until any auditing standards are notified, standards of auditing specified by the ICAI shall be deemed to be the auditing standards.
  • Further, the Preface to Standards on Auditing requires that while discharging their attest function; it is the duty of the Chartered Accountant to ensure that SAs are followed in the audit of financial information covered by their audit reports.

Conclusion: In the given case, even though the client is a non-profit oriented entity the SAs shall apply and the auditor is required to ensure their compliance. In case he fails to discharge his duty he shall be guilty of professional misconduct.

Question 55.
An auditor became aware of a matter regarding a company, only after he had issued his audit opinion. Had he become aware of the same prior to his issuing the audit report, he would have issued a different opinion.
Answer:
Auditor’s duties w.r.t. subsequent events:

  • Sec. 146 of the Companies Act, 2013 requires the auditors of a company to attend the general meeting of the company unless otherwise exempted by the company.
  • Auditor shall have the right to be heard at such meeting on any part of the business which concerns him as auditors.
  • The discovery of a fact after issuance of the financial statements that existed at the date of the audit report which would have caused the revision of the audit report, requires the auditor to bring this to the notice of shareholders.
  • Further SA 560 “Subsequent Event” also prescribes the procedures which the auditor is required to perform.

Conclusion: It will be advisable for the auditor to attend the meeting with a view to bringing to the notice of the shareholders the matter which came to his knowledge subsequent to his signing the report and perform procedures are per the requirement of SA 560.

Question 56.
Y, is the auditor of X Pvt. Ltd. In which there are four shareholders only, who are also the Directors of the company. On account of bad trade and for reducing the expenses in all directions, the directors asked Y to accept a reduced fee and for that he has been offered not to carry out such full audit as he has done in the past. Y accepted the suggestions of the directors.
Answer:
Restricting Scope of Audit:

  • Auditor’s duties are governed by the provisions of Sec. 143 of Companies Act, 2013, which can not be restricted either by the director or even by the entire body of shareholders.
  • Further, remuneration is a matter of arrangement between the auditor and the shareholders. Section 142 specifies the remuneration of an auditor, shall be fixed by the company in general meeting or in such manner as the company in general meeting may determine.
  • Duties of auditor may not necessarily commensurate with his remuneration.

Conclusion: Y, should not accept the suggestions of the directors regarding the scope of the work to be done. If he accepts the suggestions of the directors regarding the scope of work to be done, it would not reduce his responsibility as an auditor under the law and he will be violating the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013.

Question 57.
At the Annual General Meeting of the Company, a resolution was passed by the entire body of shareholders restricting some of the powers of the Statutory Auditors. Whether powers of the Statutory Auditors can be restricted₹
Answer:
Restrictions on Powers of Statutory Auditors:
Section 143 of the Companies Act, 2013 provides that an auditor of a company shall have right of access at all times to the books and account and vouchers of the company whether kept at the Head Office or other places and shall be entitled to require from the offices of the company such information and explanations as the auditor may think necessary for the purpose of his audit.

These specific rights have been conferred by the statute on the auditor to enable him to carry out his duties and responsibilities prescribed under the Act, which cannot be restricted or abridged in any manner.

Further it was held in the case of Newton v. Birmingham Small Arms Co. that any resolution even if passed by entire body of shareholders which preclude the auditors from availing themselves of all the information for which they are entitled to under the Company Law are inconsistent with the Act and therefore null and void.

Conclusion: Any resolution restricting the scope of statutory right of auditor even if passed by entire body of shareholders is ultra virus and therefore void.

Question 58.
Mr. Rajendra, a fellow member of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India, working as Manager of Shrivastav and Co., a Chartered Accountant firm, signed the audit report of Ora Ltd. on behalf of Shrivastav & Co.
Answer:
Signature on Audit Report:
Section 145 of the Companies Act, 2013 requires that the person appointed as an auditor of the company shall sign the auditor’s report or sign or certify any other document of the company in accordance with the provisions of Sec. 141(2), i.e. where a firm including a LLP is appointed as an auditor of a company, only the partners who are CAs shall be authorized to act and sign on behalf of the firm.

In the present case, Mr. Rajendra, a fellow member of the Institute and a manager of M/s Shrivastav & Co., Chartered Accountants, cannot sign on behalf of the firm in view of the specific requirements of the Companies Act, 2013. If any auditor’s report or any document of the company is signed or authenticated otherwise than in conformity with the requirements of Section 145, the auditor concerned and the person, if any, other than the auditor who signs the report or signs or authenticates the document shall, if the default is will ful, be punishable with a fine.

Question 59.
The members of C. Ltd. preferred a complaint against the auditor stating that he has failed to send the auditors report to them.
Answer:
Dispatch of Auditor’s Report to Shareholders:

  • Section 143 of the Companies Act, 2013 lays down the powers and duties of auditor. As per provisions of the law, it is no part of the auditor’s duty to send a copy of his report to members of the company.
  • The auditor’s duty concludes once he forwards his report to the company. It is the responsibility of company to send the report to every member of the company.
  • In case of Allen Graig and Company (London) Ltd., it was held that duty of the auditor after having signed the report to be annexed to a balance sheet is confined only to forwarding that report to the secretary of the company. It will be for the secretary or the director to convene a general meeting and send the balance sheet and report to the members (or other person) entitled to receive it.

Conclusion: Auditor cannot be held liable for the failure to send the report to the shareholders.

Question 60.
One of the directors of Hitech Ltd. is attracted by the disqualification under Section 164(2) of the Companies Act, 2013.
Answer:
Disqualification of a Director under section 164(2) of the Companies Act, 2013:

  • Section 143(3)(g) of the Companies Act, 2013 imposes a specific duty on the auditor to report whether any director is disqualified from being appointed as directors under section 164(2) of the Companies Act, 2013.
  • The auditor has to ensure that written representation have been obtained by the Board from each director that one is not hit by Section 164(2).

Conclusion: In this case, one of the director is attracted by disqualification u/s 164(2) of the Act, the auditor shall state in his report as per Sec. 143 about the disqualification of the particular director.

Question 61.
The Board of Directors of a company have filed a complaint with the 1CA1 against their statutory auditors for their failing to attend the AGM of the Shareholders in which audited accounts were considered.
Answer:
Auditor’s Attendance at Annual General Meeting:
♦ Section 146 of the Companies Act, 2013 requires the auditor of a company to attend either by himself or through his qualified authorised representative to attend the general meeting, unless exempted.

♦ The said section provides that all notices and other communications relating to any general meeting of a company shall also be forwarded to the auditor.

♦ Further, it has been provided that the auditor shall have right to be heard at such meeting on any part of the business which concerns him as an auditor.

Conclusion:
Complaint filed by the Board of Directors is valid if the auditor was not being exempted by the company.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 62.
Mr. X, a Director of M/s KP Private Ltd., is also a Director of another company viz., M/s GP Private Ltd., which has not filed the financial statements and annual return for last three years 2018-19 to 2020-21. Mr. X is of the opinion that he is not disqualified u/s 164(2) of the Companies Act, 2013, and auditor should not mention disqualification remark in his audit report.
Answer:
Disqualification of a Director under section 164(2) of the Companies Act, 2013:
1. Section 143(3)(g) of the Companies Act, 2013 imposes a specific duty on the auditor to report whether any director is disqualified from being appointed as director u/s 164(2) of the Companies Act, 2013.

2. As per provisions of Section 164(2), if a director is already holding a directorship of a company which has not filed the financial statements or annual returns for any continuous period of 3 financial years shall not be eligible to be reappointed as a director of that company or appointed in other company for a period of five years from the date on which the said company fails to do so.

Conclusion: In this case, Mr. X is a director of M/s KP Private Ltd. as well as of M/s GP Private Ltd., And, M/s GP Private Ltd., has not filed the financial statements and annual return for last three years. Hence the provisions of section 164(2) are applicable to him and as such he is disqualified from directorship of both the companies. Therefore, the auditor shall report about the disqualification u/s 143(3)(g) of the Companies Act, 2013.

Question 63.
Comment: Contravene Ltd. appointed CA Innocent as an auditor for the company for the current financial year. Further the company offered him the services of actuarial, investment advisory and investment banking which was also approved by the Board of Directors.
Answer:
Services not to be Rendered by the Auditor:
Section 144 of the Companies Act, 2013 prescribes certain services not to be rendered by the auditor. An auditor appointed under this Act shall provide to the company only such other services as are approved by the Board of Directors or the audit committee, as the case may be, but which shall not include any of the following services (whether such services are rendered directly or indirectly to the company or its holding company or subsidiary company), namely:

  • accounting and book keeping services;
  • internal audit;
  • design and implementation of any financial information system;
  • actuarial services;
  • investment advisory services;
  • investment banking services;
  • rendering of outsourced financial services;
  • management services; and
  • any other kind of services as may be prescribed.

Further section 141(3)(i) of the Companies Act, 2013 also disqualify a person for appointment as an auditor of a company who is engaged as on the date of appointment in consulting and specialized services as provided in section 144.

In the given case, CA Innocent was appointed as an auditor of Contravene Ltd. H e was offered additional services of actuarial, investment advisory and investment banking which was also approved by the Board of Directors.

Conclusion: The auditor is advised not to accept the services as these services are specifically notified in the services not to be rendered by him as an auditor as per section 144 of the Act.

Question 64.
Mr. Budiha, Statutory AuiJitors of Secret Ltd. was not permitted by the Board of Directors to attend general meeting of the company on the ground that his right to attend general meetings is restricted only to those meetings at which the accounts audited by him are to be presented and discussed.
Answer:
Auditor’s Attendance at Annual General Meeting:

  • Section 146 of the Companies Act, 2013 requires the auditor of a company to attend either by himself or through his qualified authorised representative to attend the general meeting, unless exempted.
  • The said section provides that all notices and other communications relating to any general meeting of a company shall also be forwarded to the auditor.
  • Further, it has been provided that the auditor shall, have right to be heard at such meeting on any part of the business which concerns him as an auditor.
  • In the present case Mr. Budha, Statutory Auditors of Secret Ltd. was not permitted by the Board of Directors to attend general meeting of the company on the ground that his right to attend general meetings is restricted only to those meetings at which the accounts audited by him are to be presented and discussed.

Conclusion: Action of Board of Directors is contrary to the provisions of Section 146 as auditor’s
duties and rights with respect of general meetings are extended to ali general meetings.

Question 65.
Explain the auditor’s duties with respect to reporting over fraud under Companies Act, 2013.
Or
Mr. A is appointed as statutory auditor of a company for the financial year ended 31st March, 2019. During the course of audit, it was found that few doubtful transactions had been committed by finance manager who retired in March, 2019. The fraud was going on since last 3 years and the total amount misappropriated exceeding ₹ 100 lakhs. As a statutory auditor, what would be reporting responsibilities of Mr. A? [May 18 (5 Marks}]
Answer:
Auditor’s duties to report fraud to the Central Government:
Section 143(12] of Companies Act, 2013 requires that if an auditor of a company in the course of the performance of his duties as auditor, has reason to believe that an offence of fraud involving such amount or amounts as may be prescribed, is being or has been committed in the company by its officers or employees, the auditor shall report the matter to the Central Government within such time and in such manner as may be prescribed. For this purpose, Rule 13 prescribes the amount of ₹ 1 Cr. or more.

However, in case of a fraud involving lesser than the specified amount, i.e. below ₹ 1 Cr., the auditor shall report the matter to the audit committee constituted u/s 177 or to the Board in other cases within such time and in such manner as may be prescribed:

The companies, whose auditors have reported frauds to the audit committee or the Board but not reported to the Central Government, shall disclose the details about such frauds in the Board’s report in such manner as may be prescribed.

Rulel3 of Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014 prescribes the manner of Reporting of Frauds in various cases.

Question 66.
Explain the manner of Reporting of fraud under Companies Act, 2013
Answer:
Manner of Reporting of Fraud:
Rulel3 of Companies (Audit and Auditors] Rules, 2014 prescribes the manner of Reporting of Frauds as below:
1. If an auditor of a company, in the course of the performance of his duties as statutory auditor, has reason to believe that an offence of fraud, which involves or is expected to involve individually an amount of ₹ 1 Cr. or above, is being or has been committed against the company by its officers or employees, the auditor shall report the matter to the CG.

2. The auditor shall report the matter to the CG as under:
(a) the auditor shall report the matter to the Board or the Audit Committee, as the case may be, immediately but not later than 2 days of his knowledge of the fraud, seeking their reply or observations within 45 days;

(b) on receipt of such reply or observations, the auditor shall forward his report and the reply or observations of the Board or the Audit Committee along with his comments (on such reply or observations of the Board or the Audit Committee) to the CG within 15 days from the date of receipt of such reply or observations;

(c) in case the auditor fails to getany reply or observations from the Board or the Audit Committee within the stipulated period of 45 days, he shall forward his report to the CG along with a note containing the details of his report that was earlier forwarded to the Board or the Audit Committee for which he has not received any reply or observations;

(d) the report shall be sent to the Secretary, Ministry of Corporate Affairs in a sealed cover by Registered Post with Acknowledgement Due or by Speed Post followed by an e-mail in confirmation of the same;

(e) the report shall be on the letter-head of the auditor containing postal address, e-mail address and contact telephone number or mobile number and be signed by the auditor with his seal and shall indicate his Membership Number; and

[f] the report shall be in the form of a statement as specified in Form ADT-4.

3. In case of a fraud involving amount less than ₹ 1 Cr., the auditor shall report the matter to Audit Committee constituted u/s 177 or to the Board immediately but not later than 2 days of his knowledge of the fraud and he shall report the matter specifying the following:
(a) Nature of Fraud with description;
(b) Approximate amount involved; and
(c) Parties involved.

4. The following details of each of the fraud reported to the Audit Committee or the Board under sub-rule (3) during the year shall be disclosed in the Board’s Report:
(a) Nature of Fraud with description;
(b) Approximate Amount involved;
(c) Parties involved, if remedial action not taken; and
(d) Remedial actions taken.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 67.
Explain the term “Auditor’s Lien”. [Nov. 12 (4 Marks)]
Or
Though legally auditor may exercise right of Lien in case of companies, it is mostly impracticable for legal and practicable constraints. Do you agree₹ [May 19 (3 Marks)]
Answer:
Auditor’s Lien:

  • Lien refers to the right of a person for lawful possession of somebody’s else property on which he has worked. Right of lien is exercised for non-payment of his dues for the work done.
  • The auditor can exercise right of lien on the client’s books and documents in his possession for non-payment of fees by the client, for the work done on the books and documents.
  • In respect of auditor exercising the lien, The institute of Chartered Accountants of England and Wales has expressed a similar view subject to the following conditions:
    • Documents must belong to the client who owes the money,
    • These documents must come to the possession of the auditor on the client’s authority.
    • The auditor can retain such documents, only if he has done work on such documents, on which fees have not been paid.

In view of the conditions as stated above, it appears that though legally auditor may exercise right of Lien in case of companies, it is mostly impracticable for legal and practicable constraints.

It is to be noted in this regard that Ethical Standard Board of ICAI held that a chartered accountant cannot exercise lien over the client documents/records for non-payment of his fees.

Question 68.
State the services which are not to be rendered by an auditor as per the provisions of Companies Act, 2013. [Nov. 16 (6 Marks)]
Answer:
Services not to be Rendered by the Auditor:
Section 144 of the Companies Act, 2013 prescribes certain services not to be rendered by the auditor. An auditor appointed under this Act shall provide to the company only such other services as are approved by the Board of Directors or the audit committee, as the case may be, but which shall not include any of the following services (whether such services are rendered directly or indirectly to the company or its holding company or subsidiary company), namely:

  • accounting and book keeping services;
  • internal audit;
  • design and implementation of any financial information system;
  • actuarial services;
  • investment advisory services;
  • investment banking services;
  • rendering of outsourced financial services;
  • management services; and
  • any other kind of services as may be prescribed.

Question 69.
Write short note on: Audit enquiry w.r.t. Companies Act, 2013. [Nov. 16 (4 Marks)]
Or
The auditor is not required to report on the matters specified in sub-section (1) of Section 143 unless he has any special comments to make on any of the items referred to therein. If he is satisfied as a result of the inquiries, he has no further duty to report that he is so satisfied. Explain clearly stating the matters for which the auditor has to perform his duty of inquiry under this section. [MTP-Aug. 18]
Or
Explain the duties of Auditor to inquire under Section 143(1) of the Companies Act, 2013. [RTP-Nov. 18]
Or
The auditor has to make inquires on certain matters under section 143(1) of Companies Act, 2013. Discuss those matters. [MTP-Oct, 20]
Answer:
Audit Inquiry u/s 143(1):
Section 143(1) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that amongst other matters, auditor is required to
inquire into the following matters, namely:
(a) whether loans and advances made by the company on the basis of security have been properly secured and whether the terms on which they have been made are prejudicial to the interests of the company or its members;
(b) whether transactions of the company which are represented merely by book entries are prejudicial to the interests of the company;
(c) where the company not being an investment company or a banking company, whether so much of the assets of the company as consist of shares, debentures and other securities have been sold at a price less than that at which they were purchased by the company;
(d) whether loans and advances made by the company have been shown as deposits;
(e) whether personal expenses have been charged to revenue account;
(f) where it is stated in the books and documents of the company that any shares have been allotted for cash, whether cash has actually been received in respect of such allotment, and if no cash has actually been so received, whether the position as stated in the account books and the balance sheet is correct, regular and not misleading.

Note: In the opinion of Research Committee of the ICAI, reporting in these matters is required only if the auditor finds answer to any of these matters in adverse.

Question 70.
Auditors have right to attend only those general meeting at which the accounts audited by them are to be discussed. Comment. [May 19 (3 Marks)]
Answer: Auditor’s right as to attend general meetings:
1. Sec. 146 of Companies Act, 2013 provides that all notices of, and other communications relating to, any general meeting shall be forwarded to the auditor of the company, and the auditor shall, unless otherwise exempted by the company, attend either by himself or through his authorised representative, who shall also be qualified to be an auditor, any general meeting and shall have right to be heard at such meeting on any part of the business which concerns him as the auditor.

2. Sec. 146 states that auditor is required to attend, either by himself or through his authorised representative any general meeting of the company. Hence the statement that auditors have right to attend only those general meeting at which the accounts audited by them are to be discussed does not seems to be correct.

Note: From the language of the provisions of Sec. 146, it appears thatto attend general meeting is auditor’s duty, not his right. Auditor has a right to be heard at such meeting on any part of the business which concerns him as the auditor.

Question 71.
According to Companies Act, 2013, the person appointed as an auditor of the company shall sign the auditor’s report in accordance with the relevant provisions of the Act. Explain clearly the relevant provisions relating to signing of report. [RTP-Nov. 19]
Answer:
Signing of Audit Report:

  • As per section 145 of the Companies Act, 2013, the person appointed as an auditor of the company shall sign the auditor’s report or sign or certify any other document of the company, in accordance with the provisions of section 141(2).
  • Section 141(2) of the Companies Act, 2013 states that where a firm including a limited liability partnership is appointed as an auditor of a company, only the partners who are chartered accountants shall be authorised to act and sign on behalf of the firm.
  • The qualifications, observations or comments on financial transactions or matters, which have any adverse effect on the functioning of the company mentioned in the auditor’s report shai! be read before the company in general meeting,

Question 72.
The head accountant of a company entered fake invoices of credit purchases in the books of account i aggregate of ₹ 50 lakh and cleared all the payments to such bogus creditor. How will you deal as an auditor? [RTP-May 20]
Answer:
Reporting of Fraud:

  • As per requirement of Sec. 143[12] of Companies Act, 2013 read with Rule 13 of Companies (Audit and Auditor’s] Rules, 2 014, the auditor of the company is required to report the fraudulent activity to the Board or Audit Committee (as the case may be] within 2 days of his knowledge of fraud.
  • Company is also required to disclose the same in Board’s Report.
  • It may be noted that the auditor need not to report the Central Government as the amount of fraud involved is less than ₹ 1 crore, however, reporting under CARO, 2016 is required.

Question 73.
Examine the applicability of CARO, 2020 in the below mentioned cases:
(a) Educating Child is a limited company registered under section 8 of the Companies Act, 2013.
(b) Ashu Pvt. Ltd. having paid capital and reserves of ₹ 50 lakh. During the year, the company had borrowed ₹ 70 lakh each from a bank and a financial institution independently. Turnover for the year was ₹ 900 lakh.
Answer:
Applicability of CARO, 2020
CARO, 2020 shall apply to every company including a foreign company as defined in Sec. 2(42] of the Companies Act, 2013, except:

  • a banking company;
  • n insurance company;
  • a company licensed to operate u/s 8 of the Companies Act;
  • a One Person Company as defined in Sec. 2(62) of the Companies Act and a Small Company as defined in Sec. 2(85) of the Companies Act; and
  • a private limited company, not being a subsidiary or holding of a public company,
    • having a Paid up capital & Reserves & Surplus not more than ₹ 1 Cr. as on the balance sheet date, and
    • which does not have total borrowings exceeding ₹ 1 Cr. from any bank or financial institution at any point of time during the financial year, and
    • which does not have a total revenue as disclosed in Schedule III to the Companies Act, 2013 (including revenue from discontinuing operations) exceeding ₹ 10 Cr. during the financial year as per the financial statements.

Conclusion: (a] CARO, 2020 is not applicable in case of Educating Child as it is registered under section 8 of the Companies Act, 2013 (b] In case of Ashu Pvt. Ltd., CARO, 2020 is applicable as borrowings in aggregate exceeds ₹ lCr.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 74.
Write short note on: Reporting requirement under CARO, 2020 w.r.t. physical verification of Property, Plant and Equipment.
Answer:
Reporting requirement under CARO w.r.t. Physical Verification of Property, Plant and Equipment:
1. Para 3 of CARO 2020 requires the auditor to comment “Whether the Property, Plant and Equipment have been physically verified by the management at reasonable intervals; whether any material discrepancies were noticed on such verification and if so, whether the same have been properly dealt with in the books of account.

2. The term “Reasonable Intervals” has not been defined and hence depends upon the circumstances of each case considering the number of assets, nature of assets, relative value of assets, difficulty in verifications, situation of the assets etc.

3. The management may decide about the periodicity of physical verification of fixed assets, While an annual verification may be reasonable; it may be impracticable to carry out the same in some cases. In such cases the verification should be programmed in such manner that all assets are verified at least once in every three years.

4. Auditor is also required to obtain a written representation from management confirming that the fixed assets are physically verified by the management in accordance with the policy of the company. The representation should mention the periodicity of the physical verification, details of the material discrepancies noticed during the physical verification. If no discrepancies were noticed during the physical verification, the representation should also mention this fact clearly.

Question 75.
The company has dispensed with the practice of taking inventory of their inventories at the year- end as in their opinion the exercise is redundant, time consuming and intrusion to normal functioning of the operations. Explain reporting requirement under CARO, 2020.
Answer:
Reporting Requirements w.r.t. Inventory:
Para 3[ii] of CARO, 2020 requires the auditor to comment on the following:
(a) whether physical verification of inventory has been conducted at reasonable intervals by the management; and
(b) whether, in the opinion of the auditor, the coverage and procedure of such verification by the management is appropriate;
(c) whether any discrepancies of 10% or more in the aggregate for each class of inventory were noticed and if so, whether they have been properly dealt with in the books of account;

Question 76.
Comment: No cost accounting records are maintained though the company is required to maintain the same.
Answer:
Non-maintenance of Cost Records;

  • As per the CARO, 2020, where maintenance of cost records has been prescribed by the C. G., auditor of the company is specifically required to state whether such accounts and records as prescribed have been made and maintained.
  • Though the auditor is not required to conduct detailed audit but the auditor is expected to conduct a general review of the cost records to determine whether the prescribed accounts and records are prima facie complete.
  • Therefore, whether cost audit is ordered or not the auditor should report upon the non maintenance of the cost records.

Question 77.
Comment on the following: ABC Ltd. Has not deposited provident fund contributions of ₹ 20 lakhs to the authorities, but accounted in the books.
Answer:
Non-Deposit of Provident Fund Dues:

  • The auditor’s report under CARO, 2020 has to specifically state whether the company is regular in depositing undisputed statutory dues including PF with the appropriate authority and, if not, the extent of the arrears of outstanding statutory dues as at the last day of the FY year concerned for a period of more than six months from the date they became payable, shall be indicated by the auditor.
  • In this case, the failure of ABC Ltd. To deposit provident fund of ₹ 20 lakhs will be reported by the auditor as per CARO, 2020 issued u/s 143(11) of the Companies Act, 2013.
  • In indicating the arrears, the period to which the arrears relate should preferably be also given.

Question 78.
Comment on the following: XYZ (Pvt.) Ltd. has paid up capital and Reserves of ₹ 110 lacs and secured Loans of Nationalized Banks having sanctioned limit of ₹ 28 lacs and outstanding balance of₹ 23 lacs. The turnover of the company is 10.10 crores for the year ended 31-3-2021. Customer returns goods worth 40 lacs on 2-4-2021, out of sales made during the year ended 31-3-2021. The management is of the opinion that CARO is not applicable to the company. [May 10 (6 Marks)]
Answer:
Applicability of CARO:
CARO is not applicable to a private limited company:

  • having a paid up capital & Reserves & Surplus not more than ₹ 1 Cr. as on the balance sheet date, and
  • which does not have total borrowings exceeding ₹ 1 Cr. from any bank or financial institution at any point of time during the financial year, and
  • which does not have a total revenue as disclosed in Schedule III to the Companies Act, 2013 (including revenue from discontinuing operations) exceeding ₹ 10 Cr. during the financial year as per the financial statements.

In the given case, the paid up capital and reserves of XYZ (Private) Ltd. is ₹ 110 lacs. Outstanding loan amount is ₹ 23 lacs although sanction limit is ₹ 28 lacs. Company’s turnover is ₹ 10.10 crores.
Sales return are deducted from the turnover in the year in which return takes place.

Conclusion: Contention of the management that provision of CARO are not applicable over the company is not correct and the auditor is required to report on the matter specified in the said order.

Question 79.
On what companies the CARO, 2020 is applicable and what companies are not covered by it₹
Or
What is CARO? Explain the companies which are not covered by CARO. [Nov. 11 (8 Marks)]
Or
Write short note on: Companies not covered under CARO [Nov. 14 (4 Marks)]
Or
Discuss which class of companies are specifically exempt from the applicability of CARO. [Nov. 16 (6 Marks)]
Answer:
Applicability of CARO, 2020:
CARO, 2020 shall apply to every company including a foreign company as defined in Sec. 2(42) of the Companies Act, 2013, except:
(i) a banking company;
(ii) an insurance company;
(iii) a company licensed to operate u/s 8 of the Companies Act;
(iv) a One Person Company as defined in Sec. 2(62) of the Companies Act and a Small Company as
defined in Sec. 2(85) of the Companies Act; and
(v) a private limited company, not being a subsidiary or holding of a public company,

  • having a Paid up capital & Reserves & Surplus not more than ₹ 1 Cr. as on the balance sheet date, and
  • which does not have total borrowings exceeding ₹ 1 Cr. from any bank or financial institution at any point of time during the financial year, and
  • which does not have a total revenue as disclosed in Schedule 111 to the Companies Act, 2013 (including revenue from discontinuing operations) exceeding ₹ 10 Cr. during the financial year as per the financial statements.
    The order would be applicable for unlimited companies irrespective of the size of their paid up capital and reserves, turnover or borrowings.

Question 80.
Discuss the matters to be included in the auditor’s report regarding statutory dues and repayment of loans or borrowing to a financial institution, bank, Government or dues to debenture holders as per CARO, 2020.
Answer:
Reporting under CARO, 2020
(a) Statutory Dues:

  • Whether the company is regular in depositing undisputed statutory dues including GST, provident fund, employees’ state insurance, income-tax, sales-tax, service tax, duty of customs, duty of excise, value added tax,cess and any other statutory dues to the appropriate authorities and if not, the extent of the arrears of outstanding statutory dues as at the last day of the financial year concerned for a period of more than six months from the date they became payable, shall be indicated.
  • Where statutory dues referred above have not been deposited on account of any dispute, then the amounts involved and the forum where dispute is pending shall be mentioned.

(b) Repayment of Loans and Borrowings:
Whether the company has defaulted in repayment of loans or other borrowings or in the payment of interest thereon to any lender, if yes, the period and amount of default to be reported as per the format below:
The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes 1
lender wise details to be provided in case of defaults to banks, financial institutions and Government.

(b) whether the company is a declared wilful defaulter by any bank or financial institution or other lender

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 81.
State the matters to be included in the auditor’s report as per CARO, 2020 regarding-
(a) Default in repayment of loans or borrowing to a financial institution, bank etc.
(b) Fraud by the company or on the Company by its officers or employees.
Answer:
Reporting under CARO, 2020
(a) Default in Repayment of Loans and Borrowings:
Whether the company has defaulted in repayment of loans or other borrowings or in the payment of interest thereon to any lender, if yes, the period and amount of default to be reported as per the format below:
The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes 1
lender wise details to be provided in case of defaults to banks, financial institutions and Government.

(b) Fraud by the company or on the company [Para 3(xi)]:

  • Whether any fraud by the company or any fraud on the Company has been noticed or reported during the year; If yes, the nature and the amount involved is to be indicated.
  • Whether any report u/s 143(12) of the Companies Act has been filed by the auditors in Form ADT-4 as prescribed under rule 13 of Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014 with the Central Government;
  • Whether the auditor has considered whistle-blower complaints, if any, received during the year by the company.

Question 82.
State the matters to be included in the auditor’s report as per CARO, 2020 regarding-
(i) Private placement of preferential issue.
(ii) Utilisation of IPO and further public offer. [May 18 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
Reporting requirements under CARO, 2020:
(i) Private Placement of Preferential issues:
Para 3(x) of CARO, 2020 requires the following:

  • Whether the company has made any preferential allotment or private placement of shares or convertible debentures (fully, partially or optionally convertible) during the year and if so,
  • Whether the requirements of section 42 and section 62 of the Companies Act, 2013 have been complied with and the funds raised have been used for the purposes for which the funds were raised, if not, provide details in respect of amount involved and nature of noncompliance;

(ii) Utilisation of IPO and Further Public Offer:
Para 3(x) of CARO, 2020 requires the following:

  • Whether moneys raised by way of initial public offer or further public offer (including debt instruments) during the year were applied for the purposes for which those are raised, if not,
  • The details together with delays or default and subsequent rectification, if any, as may be applicable, be reported.

Question 83.
State the matters to be included in the auditor’s report as per CARO, 2020 regarding-
(i) Property Plant and Equipment
(ii) Statutory dues
Or
Explain the Reporting requirements the auditor should ensure under CARO, 2020 related to Property Plant and Equipment. [May 19 (3 Marks)]
Answer:
Matters to be included in the Auditor’s Report under CARO, 2020:
The auditor’s report on the accounts of a company to which CARO applies shall include a statement on the following matters, namely-
(i) Property, Plant and Equipment:
As per clause (i) of Para 3 of CARO, 2020, reporting requirements in respect of property, plant and equipment are:

Adequacy of Records:

  • Whether the company is maintaining proper records showing full particulars, including quantitative details and situation of Property, Plant and Equipment.
  • Whether the company is maintaining proper records showing full particulars of intangible assets.

Physical verification:

  • Whether these Property, Plant and Equipment have been physically verified by the management at reasonable intervals;
  • Whether any material discrepancies were noticed on such verification and if so,
  • Whether the same have been properly dealt with in the books of account.

Title Deeds:

  • Whether the title deeds of all the immovable properties (Other than properties where the company is the lessee and the lease agreements are duly executed in favour of the lessee) disclosed in the financial statements are held in the name of the company.
  • If not, provide details in Specific format.

Revaluation of Property, Plant and Equipment:

  • Whether the company has revalued its Property, Plant and Equipment (including Right of Use assets) or intangible assets or both during the year and,
  • If so, whether the revaluation is based on the valuation by a Registered Valuer; specify the amount of change, if change is 10% or more in the aggregate of the net carrying value of each class of Property, Plant and Equipment or intangible assets;

Proceedings for holding Benami Property:

  • Whether any proceedings have been initiated or are pending against the company for holding any benami property under the Benami Transactions (Prohibition) Act, 1988 and rules made thereunder,
  • If so, whether the company has appropriately disclosed the details in its financial statements.

(ii) Statutory Dues:

  • Whether the company is regular in depositing undisputed statutory dues including GST, provident fund, employees’ state insurance, income-tax, sales-tax, service tax, duty of customs, duty of excise, value added tax,cess and any other statutory dues to the appropriate authorities and if not, the extent of the arrears of outstanding statutory dues as at the last day of the financial year concerned for a period of more than six months from the date they became payable, shall be indicated.
  • Where statutory dues referred above have not been deposited on account of any dispute, then the amounts involved and the forum where dispute is pending shall be mentioned.

Question 84.
“The company has raised funds by issuing fully convertible debentures. These funds were raised for the expansion and diversification of the business. However, the company utilized these funds for repayment of long term loans and advances.” Advise the auditor regarding requirements under CARO, 2020. [Nov. 18 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
Reporting requirements under CARO, 2020:
Para 3(x) of CARO, 2020 requires the following:

  • Whether moneys raised by way of initial public offer or further public offer (including debt instruments) during the year were applied for the purposes for which those are raised, if not,
  • The details together with delays or default and subsequent rectification, if any, as may be applicable, be reported.
  • In the instant case, company has raised funds by issuing fully convertible debentures. These funds were raised for the expansion and diversification of the business. However, the company utilized these funds for repayment of long-term loans and advances.

Conclusion: Auditor is required to report the fact that funds raised for the expansion and diversification
of the business by issue of fully convertible debentures were utilized for repayment of long term
loans and advances.

Question 85.
M Ltd. has given certain loans to related parties and also has accepted certain deposits. As an auditor, how you include the above items in paragraph 3 of CARO, 2020₹ [Nov. 19 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
Reporting under CARO, 2020:
(i) Loans to related parties:
Whether during the year the company has granted any loans or advances in the nature of loans, secured or unsecured, to companies, firms, Limited Liability Partnerships or any other parties, if so,
a. whether during the year the company has provided loans or provided advances in the nature of loans, if so, indicate-
i. the aggregate amount during the year, and balance out standing at the balance sheet date with respect to such loans or advances to subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates;
ii. the aggregate amount during the year, and balance outstanding at the balance sheet date with respect to such loans or advances to parties other than subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates;

b. whether the terms and conditions of the grant of all loans and advances in the nature of loans and guarantees provided are not prejudicial to the company’s interest;

c. in respect of loans and advances in the nature of loans, whether the schedule of repayment of principal and payment of interest has been stipulated and whether the repayments or receipts are regular;

d. if the amount is overdue, state the total amount overdue for more than 90 days, and whether reasonable steps have been taken by the company for recovery of the principal and interest;

e. whether any loan or advance in the nature of loan granted which has fallen due during the year, has been renewed or extended or fresh loans granted to settle the overdues of existing loans given to the same parties, if so, specify the aggregate amount of such dues renewed or extended or settled by fresh loans and the percentage of the aggregate to the total loans or advances in the nature of loans granted during the year [not applicable to companies whose principal business is to give loans];

f. whether the company has granted any loans or advances in the nature of loans either repayable on demand or without specifying any terms or period of repayment, if so, specify the aggregate amount, percentage thereof to the total loans granted, aggregate amount of loans granted to Promoters, related parties as defined in Sec. 2(76) of the Companies Act, 2013.

(ii) Public Deposits:
In case the company has accepted deposits from the public, Para 3(v) of CARO, 2020 requires the auditor to report the following:
(a) Whether the directives issued by the RBI and the provisions of sections 73 to 76 or any other relevant provisions of the Companies Act and the rules framed thereunder, where applicable, have been complied with. If not, the nature of contraventions be stated;

(b) If an order has been passed by Company Law Board or National Company Law Tribunal or Reserve Bank of India or any Court or any other Tribunal, whether the same has been complied with or not₹

Question 86.
Write short note on: Joint audit [Nov. 08 (5 Marks)]
Or
Explain the concept of Joint Audit. Discuss its advantages and Disadvantages. [May 11 (8 Marks)]
Or
Discuss the following: Advantages and Disadvantages of Joint Audit. [Nov. 14 (5 Marks)]
Or
The practice of appointing Chartered Accountants as joint auditors is quite widespread in big companies and corporations. Explain stating the advantages of the joint audit. [RTP-Nov. 19]
Answer:
Joint Audit – Meaning, Advantages and Disadvantages:
Meaning: Joint audit means that more than one firm/individuals is appointed as the Statutory Auditors of the company. It implies pooling together the resources and expertise of two or more firms to perform an expert job. SA 299 “Joint Audit of financial statements” deals with the professional responsibilities which the auditors undertake in accepting appointments as joint auditors.

Advantages:
(a) Poling and sharing of expertise.
(b) Better quality of work performance
(c) Advantage of mutual consultation.
(d) Improved services to client.
(e) Lower costs to carry out the audit work.
(f) Healthy competition towards a better performance

Disadvantages:
(a) Co-ordination problems in conduct of work.
(b) Lack of clear definition of responsibility.
(c) Different standings of joint auditee.
(d) Negligence of areas of common concern.
(e) Sharing of fees.
(f) Uncertainty about the liability for the work done.

Question 87.
A joint auditor is not bound by the views of the majority of the joint auditors regarding matters to be covered in the report, lustily this statement in the light of responsibilities of Joint Auditors under SA 299. [May 10 (5 Marks}]
Answer:
Reporting Responsibilities of Joint Auditor:
(a) The statement that a joint auditor is not bound by the views of the majority of the joint auditors regarding the matters to be covered in the report is true.

(b) SA 299 “Joint Audit of Financial Statements” provides the following in respect of reporting responsibilities of joint auditor:

  • Joint auditors are required to issue common audit report.
  • However, in case of any disagreement among joint auditors with regard to the opinion or any matters to be covered by the audit report, they shall express their opinion in a separate audit report.
  • A joint auditor is not bound by the views of the majority of the joint auditors regarding the opinion or matters to be covered in the audit report and shall express opinion formed by the said joint auditor in separate audit report in case of disagreement.
  • In case of separate reports, the audit report(s) issued by the joint auditor(s) shall make a reference to the separate audit report(s) issued by the other joint auditor(sj. Such reference shall be made under the heading “Other Matter Paragraph” as per SA 706

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 88.
Write short note on: Responsibilities of Joint Auditor.
Or
In joint Audit, “each joint auditor is responsible only for the work allocated to him”. [May 12 (5 Marks)]
Or
You have been appointed as an auditor of a company along with 2 other auditors. What steps would you like to take to ensure a smooth and effective audit? To what extent do you think you will be responsible in relation to the work performed by yours co-auditors and vice versa?
Or
Mention the points/areas in which all the joint auditors are jointly and severally responsible. [Nov. 15 (5 Marks)]
Answer:
Areas of Joint Responsibility in case of Joint auditors:
SA 299 “Joint Audit of Financial Statements” deals with the responsibilities of joint auditors. Accordingly, in respect of audit work divided among the joint auditors, each joint auditor shall be responsible only for the work allocated to such joint auditor including proper execution of the audit procedures.
All the joint auditors shall be jointly and severally responsible for:
1. the audit work which is not divided among the joint auditors and is carried out by all joint auditors;

2. decisions taken by all the joint auditors under audit planning in respect of common audit areas concerning the NTE of the audit procedures to be performed by each of the joint auditors;

3. matters which are brought to the notice of the joint auditors by any one of them and on which there is an agreement among the joint auditors;

4. examining that the F.S. of the entity comply with the requirements of the relevant statutes;

5. presentation and disclosure of the F.S. as required by the applicable FRF;

6. ensuring that the audit report complies with the requirements of the relevant statutes, the applicable Standards on Auditing and the other relevant pronouncements issued by ICAI.
It shall be the responsibility of each joint auditor to determine the NTE of audit procedures to be applied in relation to the areas of work allocated to said joint auditor.
It is the individual responsibility of each joint auditor to study and evaluate the prevailing system of internal control and assessment of risk relating to the areas of work allocated to said joint auditor.

Question 89.
“Before the commencement of audit, the joint auditors should discuss and develop a joint audit plan.” Discuss the points to be considered in developing the joint audit plan by the joint auditors. [Nov. 19 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
Points to be considered in developing the joint audit plan
As per SA 299 “Joint Audit of Financial Statements” Prior to the commencement of the audit, the
joint auditors shall discuss and develop a joint audit plan. In developing the joint audit plan, the
joint auditors shall:
(a) Identify division of audit areas and common audit areas amongst the joint auditors that define the scope of the work of each joint auditor;
(b) Ascertain the reporting objectives of the engagement to plan the timing of the audit and the nature of the communications required;
(c) Consider and communicate among all joint auditors the factors that, in their professional judgment, are significant in directing the engagement team’s efforts;
(d) Consider the results of preliminary engagement activities and, where applicable, whether knowledge gained on other or similar engagements performed earlier by the respective engagement partner(s) for the entity is relevant.
(e) Ascertain the NTE of resources necessary to perform the engagement.

Question 90.
X Ltd. has a branch office in Malaysia. The company has appointed Mr. X, who is qualified to audit accounts as per Malaysian laws. Mr. Z, the statutory auditor objects to the same, contending that he alone can audit the branch office accounts. Discuss.
Answer:
Eligibility criteria for appointment as Branch Auditor
As per Sec. 143(8) of the Companies Act, 2013, where the branch office is situated in a country outside India, the accounts of the branch office shall be audited either by the company’s auditor or by an accountant or by any other person duly qualified to act as an auditor of the accounts of the branch office in accordance with the laws of that country.

Hence, a company can appoint as auditor of a foreign branch an accountant duly qualified to act as an auditor in accordance with the laws of the foreign country.
Conclusion: Mr. Z contention that he alone can audit the branch office accounts is not valid.

Question 91.
When the accounts of the branch are audited by a person other than the company’s auditor, there is need for a clear understanding of the role of such auditor and the company’s auditor in relation to the audit of the accounts of the branch and the audit of the company as a whole. Explain. [RTP-Nov. 18, MTP-Oct. 20]
Answer:
Role and Responsibilities of Company Auditor and Branch Auditor:
SA 600 “Using the work of Another Auditor” establishes the standard when an auditor, reporting on the financial statements of a company, uses the work of another auditor on the financial information of one or more components included in the financial statements of the entity. There should be sufficient liaison between the principal auditor and the other auditor. SA 600 provides the following in this regard:

1. Where another auditor has been appointed for the component, the principal auditor would normally be entitled to rely upon the work of such auditor unless there are special circumstances to make it essential for him to visit the component and/or to examine the books of account and other records of the said component. Further, it requires that the principal auditor should perform procedures to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence, that the work of the other auditor is adequate for the principal auditor’s purposes, in the context of the specific assignment.

2. When using the work of another auditor, the principal auditor should ordinarily perform the following procedures:
(a) advise the other auditor of the use that is to be made of the other auditor’s work and report and make sufficient arrangements for co-ordination of their efforts at the planning stage of the audit. The principal auditor would inform the other auditor of matters such as areas requiring special consideration, procedures for the identification of inter-component transactions that may require disclosure and the time-table for completion of audit; and
(b) advise the other auditor of the significant accounting, auditing and reporting requirements and obtain representation as to compliance with them.

3. The principal auditor might discuss with the other auditor the audit procedures applied or review a written summary of the other auditor’s procedures and findings which may be in the form of a completed questionnaire or check-list.

4. The principal auditor may also wish to visit the other auditor. The nature, timing and extent of procedures will depend on the circumstances of the engagement and the principal auditor’s knowledge of the professional competence of the other auditor. This knowledge may have been enhanced from the review of the previous audit work of the other auditor.

Question 92
Explain the audit procedure when principal auditor is using the work of another auditor. [Nov. 14 (8 Marks)]
Answer:
Audit Procedure when principal auditor is using the work of another auditor:
As per SA 600 “Using the work of Another Auditor” when the principal auditor is using the work of another auditor, he is supposed to perform the following:

(a) When principal auditor plans to use the work of another auditor, he should consider the professional competence of the other auditor in the context of specific assignment if the other auditor is not a member of the ICAI.

(b) The principal auditor should perform procedures to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence, that the work of the other auditor is adequate for the principal auditor’s purposes, in the context of the specific assignment.

(c) The principal auditor should consider the significant findings of the other auditor.

(d) The principal auditor should document in his audit working papers the followings

  • Components audited by another;
  • Audit procedures adopted and results thereof;
  • Conclusion that particular component is not material;
  • Manner of dealing with modification in another auditor’s report

(e) When the principal auditor concludes, based on his procedures, that the work of the other auditor cannot be used and the principal auditor has not been able to perform sufficient additional procedures regarding the financial information of the component audited by the other auditor, the principal auditor should express a qualified opinion or disclaimer of opinion because there is a limitation on the scope of audit.

(f) When the principal auditor has to base his opinion on the financial information of the entity as a whole relying upon the statements and reports of the other auditors, his report should state clearly the division of responsibility for the financial information of the entity by indicating the extent to which the financial information of components audited by the other auditors have been included in the financial information of the entity.

Question 93.
There should be a sufficient liaison between a principal auditor and other auditors”. Discuss the above statement and state in this context the reporting consideration, when the auditor uses the professional work performed by other auditor.
Answer:
Coordination between Principal Auditor and Other Auditor:
SA 600 “Using the work of Another Auditor” applies in situation where an auditor [principal auditor), reporting on the financial information of an entity, uses the work of another auditor [other auditor) with respect to the financial information of one or more components included in the financial information ofthe entity. To ensure coordination among both of them, SA 600 provides the followings:
1. There should be sufficient liaison between the principal auditor and the other auditor.

2. For this purpose, the principal auditor may find it necessary to issue written communication(s) to the other auditor.

3. The other auditor, knowing the context in which his work is to be used by the principal auditor, should co-ordinate with the principal auditor.

  • Adhering to time-table.
  • Bringing to the attention of Principal auditor any significant finding.
  • Compliance with relevant statutory requirements.
  • Respond to detailed questionnaire.

Reporting Considerations:
1. When the principal auditor concludes, based on his procedures, that the work of the other auditor cannot be used,
2. The principal auditor has not been able to perform sufficient additional procedures regarding the financial information of the component audited by the other auditor, and
3. The principal auditor should express a qualified opinion or disclaimer of opinion because there is a limitation on the scope of audit.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 94.
ABC Ltd. is a company incorporated in India. It has branches within and outside India. Explain who can be appointed as an auditor of these branches within and outside India. Also explain to whom branch auditor is required to report. [RTP-May 20]
Answer:
Branch Auditor:
Sec. 143(8) of the Companies Act, 2013, prescribes the duties and powers of the company’s auditor with reference to the audit of the branch and the branch auditor. Accordingly, where a company has a branch office, the accounts of that office shall be audited by either of following:

  • the auditor appointed for the company, i.e. company auditor, or
  • any other person qualified for appointment as an auditor of the company under this Act, or
  • where the branch office is situated in a country outside India, the accounts of the branch office shall be audited either by the company’s auditor or by an accountant or by any other person duly qualified to act as an auditor of the accounts of the branch office in accordance with the laws of that country.

The branch auditor shall prepare a report on the accounts of the branch examined by him and send it to the auditor of the company who shall deal with it in his report in such manner as he considers necessary.
Rule 12 of the Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014, provides the following in relation to branch audit and branch auditor:
1. The duties and powers of the company’s auditor with reference to the audit of the branch and the branch auditor, if any, shall be as contained in sub-sections (1) to (4) of section 143.
2. The branch auditor shall submit his report to the company’s auditor.

Question 95.
RJ Limited is in the business of trading of cycles having Head Office at Delhi and branch at Mumbai. Statutory audit of Head Office was to be done by CA. D and statutory audit of branch at Mumbai was to be done by CA. M. During the course of audit by CA. D at head office, CA. D wanted to visit branch at Mumbai and verily the inventory records at Mumbai. The management of RJ Limited did not allow CA. D to visit Mumbai office and verify the inventory records as the branch audit of Mumbai was already being undertaken by another CA. M. In the above situation, discuss the rights available with CA. D in terms of the Companies Act, 2013. [Nov. 20 (3 Marks)]
Answer:
Right of Access of Company Auditor for Branch Records:

  • As per Sec. 143(8) of the Companies Act, 2013 the audit of the branches can be done by the company auditor himself or by another auditor. Even where, the branch accounts are audited, the company auditor has right to visit the branch if he deems it necessary to do so for the performance of his duties as auditor.
  • Company Auditor has also right of access at all times to the books and accounts and vouchers of the company maintained at the branch office. He can appropriately deal with the report of the branch auditor in framing his main report. He will disclose how he had dealt with the branch audit report.
  • In this case, the audits of two branches were done by the company auditor and one branch was done by a separate branch auditor.

Conclusion: Management’s objection that the company auditor is transgressing the scope of audit areas agreed, is absolutely, wrong. The right of company auditor in visiting and accessing the records of branch cannot be forfeited. Even where the branch accounts are audited by another local auditor, the company auditor has right to visit the branch and can have access to the books and vouchers of the company maintained at the branch office.

Question 96.
Briefly discuss the following with respect to applicable provisions under the Companies Act, 2013 and rules made thereunder:
(a) Maintenance of Cost Records
(b) Applicability of Cost Audit
(c) Non-applicability of Cost Audit.
Answer:
Cost Records and Audit Provisions:
(a) Maintenance of Cost records: Sec. 148(1) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that the Central Government may, by order, in respect of such class of companies engaged in the production of such goods or providing such services as may be prescribed, direct that particulars relating to the utilisation of material or labour or to other items of cost as may be prescribed shall also be included in the books of account kept by that class of companies.
Rule 3 of Companies (Cost Records and Audit) Rules, 2014 provides that the specified class of companies, including foreign companies, engaged in the production of the goods or providing services, having an overall turnover from all its products and services of ₹ 35 Cr. or more during the immediately preceding financial year, shall include cost records for such products or services in their books of account.

A company which is classified as a micro enterprise or a small enterprise under the Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises Development Act, 2006 are exempted from compliance of these provisions.

Specified Class of Companies are classified in two categories:
1. Regulated Sectors: It covers Telecommunication, Electricity, Petroleum and Gas, Drugs and Pharma, Fertilizers and Sugar
2. Non-Regulated Sectors: It includes a number of companies including those engaged in Arms and ammunitions, Steel, Rubber and Allied products, Coffee, tea, Cement etc.

(b) Applicability of Cost Audit:
Section 148(2) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that if the Central Government is of the opinion, that it is necessary to do so, it may, by order, direct that the audit of cost records of class of companies, which are covered under Sec. 148(1) and which have a net worth of such amount as may be prescribed or a turnover of such amount as may be prescribed, shall be conducted in the manner specified in the order.

Rule 4 of Companies (Cost Records and Audit) Rules, 2014 provides the following:

Regulated Sector Industries: Cost records are required to be audited if the overall annual turnover of the company from all its products and services during the immediately preceding financial year is ₹ 5 0 Cr. or more and the aggregate turnover of the individual product or products or service or services for which cost records are required to be maintained under rule 3 is ₹ 25 Cr. or more.

Non-Regulated Sectors: Cost records are required to be audited if the overall annual turnover of the company from all its products and services during the immediately preceding financial year is ₹ 100 Cr. or more and the aggregate turnover of the individual product or products or service or services for which cost records are required to be maintained under rule 3 is ₹ 35 Cr. or more.

(c) Non-Applicability of Cost Audit:
The requirement for cost audit under these rules shall not apply to a company which is covered in rule 3; and
(i) whose revenue from exports, in foreign exchange, exceeds seventy five per cent of its total revenue; or
(ii) which is operating from a special economic zone.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 97.
Elucidate the provisions of Companies Act, 2013 relating to submission of cost audit report to the Board and Central Government.
Answer:
Submission of Cost Audit report:

  • Every cost auditor, who conducts an audit of the cost records of a company, shall submit the cost audit report along with his or its reservations or qualifications or observations or suggestions, if any, in Form CRA-3.
  • Every cost auditor shall forward his duly signed report to the Board of Directors of the company within a period of 180 days from the closure of the financial year to which the report relates and the Board of Directors shall consider and examine such report particularly any reservation or qualification contained therein.
  • Every company covered under these rules shall, within a period of thirty days from the date of receipt of a copy of the cost audit report, furnish the Central Government with such report along with full information and explanation on every reservation or qualification contained therein, in Form CRA-4 in XBRL format in specified manner along with specified fees.

Question 98.
Write short note on: Cost Audit. [May 05 (4 Marks)]
Answer:
Cost Audit:

  • Section 148(2) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that if the Central Government is of the opinion, that it is necessary to do so, it may, by order, direct that the audit of cost records of class of companies, which are covered under Sec. 148(1) and which have a net worth of such amount as may be prescribed or a turnover of such amount as may be prescribed, shall be conducted in the manner specified in the order. The audit conducted under this section shall be in addition to the audit conducted under section 143 of the Companies Act, 2013.
  • The audit shall be conducted by a Cost Accountant in Practice who shall be appointed by the Board of such remuneration as may be determined by the members in such manner as may be prescribed. No person appointed under section 139 as an auditor of the company shall be appointed for conducting the audit of cost records.
  • The auditor conducting the cost audit shall comply with the cost auditing standards.
  • The report on the audit of cost records shall be submitted to the Board of Directors of the company and company shall within 30 days from the date of receipt of a copy of the cost audit report prepared furnish the Central Government with such report along with full information and explanation on every reservation or qualification contained therein.

Question 99.
“Mr. A is offered by ABC Ltd. for appointment as cost auditor and asked to certify certain requirements before such appointment.” Discuss those requirements with reference to the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013. [Nov. 18 (5 Marks)]
Answer:
Requirements as to Certificate from Cost Auditor:
As per Rule 6 of the Companies (Cost Records and Audit) Rules, 2014, the Cost Auditor appointed
shall submit certificate that-
(a) the individual or the firm, as the case may be, is eligible for appointment and is not disqualified for appointment under the Act, the Cost and Works Accountants Act, 1959 and the Rules or regulations made thereunder.
(b) the individual or the firm, as the case may be, satisfies the criteria provided in Sec. 141, so far as may be applicable.
(c) the proposed amendment is within the limits laid down by or under the authority of the Act.
(d) the list of proceedings against the cost auditor or audit firm or any partner of the audit firm pending with respect to professional matters of conduct, as disclosed in the certificate, is true and correct.

Objective Type Questions – Correct/Incorrect

Question 1.
Where at any AGM, no auditor is appointed or re-appointed, the existing auditor shall continue be the auditor of the company.
Answer:
Statement is correct.

  • As per section 139(10) of the Companies Act, 2013, where at any AGM, no auditor is appointed or re-appointed, the existing auditor shall continue to be the auditor of the company.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 2.
If the auditor appointed at the AGM refuses to accept the same, the Company can appoint another person by holding General Meeting. [May 07 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect:

  • If the auditor appointed at the AGM refuses to accept the same, it will be held that no auditor is appointed at the AGM.
  • Sec. 139(10) of Companies Act, 2013 will apply which provides that if no auditor is appointed at AGM, the existing auditor will continue to be the auditor of the company.

Question 3.
Government companies are also to be considered for the ceiling on number of audits. [Nov. 07 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is correct. Section 141(3)(g) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that a person is not eligible to be appointed as auditor of a company if he is in full time employment elsewhere or a person or a partner of a firm holding appointment as its auditor, if such persons or partner is at the date of such appointment or reappointment holding appointment as auditor of more than 20 Companies other than one person company, dormant companies, small companies and private companies having paid up share capital less than 100 Crores.

Question 4.
If appointment of a person as an auditor is void-ab-initio, it should be treated as a casual vacancy. [Nov. 07 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • If appointment of a person as an auditor is void-ab-initio, it should not be treated as a casual vacancy.
  • Sec. 139(10) of Companies Act, 2013 will apply which provides that if no auditor is appointed at AGM, the existing auditor will continue to be the auditor of the company.

Question 5.
An auditor can be appointed as first auditor of a newly formed company simply because his name has been stated in the Articles of Association. [May 08 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • Section 139(6) of the Companies Act, 2013 lays down that “the first auditor or auditors of a company shall be appointedby the Board of directors within 30 days from the date of registration of the company”.
  • In the case of failure of the Board to appoint first auditor, it shall inform the members of the company, who shall within 90 days at an EGM shall appoint the auditor.

Question 6.
C.A. Mr. X is the Auditor of PQ Ltd. in which one of his relative is having substantial interest, whether Mr. X is qualified to be an Auditor₹ [Nov. 08 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • Sec. 141 disqualifies a person to be appointed as auditor if he or his relative or his partner is holding any security in the company. However relative may hold securities of face value not exceeding ₹ 1 Lac. Assuming that the interest of the relative exceeds face value of ₹ 1 Lac, Mr. X is disqualified.
  • Further as per provisions of Chartered Accountant Act, 1949, a CA will be considered as guilty of professional misconduct if he expresses any opinion on the financial statements of an entity in which he or his partner or his relative has substantial interest.

Question 7.
An Auditor may be removed from Office before the expiry of his term, by the company in General Meeting. [Nov. 08 (2 Marks)]
or
The first auditor appointed by the board of directors can be removed by the board at its subsequent meeting. [Nov. 07 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • As per Sec. 140(1) of the Companies Act, 2013, an auditor appointed u/s 139 may be removed from his office before the expiry of his term only by a special resolution of the company, after obtaining the prior approval of the Central Government.
  • For this purpose, an application to the Central Government for removal of auditor shall be made in Form ADT-2 and shall be accompanied with prescribed fees.
  • The application shall be made to the Central Government within thirty days of the resolution passed by the Board.

Question 8.
An auditor of a company in which not less than 25% of authorized capital is held by public financial institution is to be appointed by a special resolution in general meeting. [June 09 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • There is no special provision under the Companies Act, 2013, as to the requirement of special resolution for appointment of auditor of a company in which not less than 25% of authorized capital is held by public financial institution.
  • Appointment will be made as per the requirement of section 139(1) of Companies Act, 2013, which does not require any special resolution.

Question 9.
While conducting audit of Government Companies, the auditors are paid their Professional Fees as prescribed by the Government. [May 10 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
As per sec. 142(1) of the Companies Act, 2013, the fees of auditors of a company is fixed by the company in its general meeting or in such a manner as the company in general meeting may determine.

Question 10.
Audit Committee is to be formed by each and every company and the auditor has no compulsion to attend the meeting of the Audit Committee. [May 10 (2 Mhrks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • As per sec. 177 of the Companies Act, 2013 Audit committee is to be formed by every listed companies, all public companies with a paid up capital of ₹ 10 Cr. or more, all public companies having turnover of ₹ 100 Cr. or more, all public companies having in aggregate, outstanding loans or borrowings or debentures or deposits exceeding ₹ 50 Cr. or more.
  • Further, the Auditor shall have the right to be heard in the meetings of the Audit Committee when it considers the Auditor’s Report but shall not have the right to vote.

Question 11.
The auditor should study the Memorandum and Articles of Association to see the validity of his appointment. [May 10. Nov. 15 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • Memorandum of Association lays down the object to be carried on and Articles of Associations reflects the regulations of the company to govern its internal management and to regulate the rights of the members.
  • Auditor should ascertain whether the company has complied with provisions of sections 139 and 140 to ensure validity of his appointment.

Question 12.
A casual vacancy caused by resignation of the auditor can be filled by the Board of Directors. [Nov. 09 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • As per sec. 139(8) of Companies Act, 2013, casual vacancy caused by the resignation of an auditor cannot be filled in by the Board of Directors itself.
  • Such appointment shall also be approved by the company at general meeting convened within three months of the recommendation of the board and the auditor so appointed shall hold office till the conclusion of the next annual general meeting.

Question 13.
Comment on the following: AGM is not held in time, auditor automatically vacates his office. [May 13 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is false.

  • Section 139(1) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that an auditor is appointed for a particular period, i.e., from conclusion of one AGM until conclusion of the 6th AGM subject to ratification of such appointment at every AGM.
  • In case the AGM is not held within the period prescribed, the auditor will continue in office till the AGM is actually held and concluded.
  • Therefore, auditor shall continue to hold office till the conclusion of the AGM. Auditor’s office is not vacated automatically if AGM is not held in time.

Question 14.
Rajat, an Auditor recovers his fees on progressive basis is said to be indebted to the company. [Nov. 13 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • If the auditor recovers fees from the company on a progressive basis, even though the audit has not been completed he cannot be said to be indebted to the company.
  • Only when the auditor recovers the fees as an advance, he will be said to be indebted to the company and attracts disqualification u/s 141(3)(d)(z7) of Companies Act, 2013.

Question 15.
The first auditor of PQR Ltd., a Government Company was appointed by the board of directors of company. fNov. 13 (2 Marks)!
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • Sec. 139(7] of the Companies Act, 2013 provides that the first auditor of a Government Company shall be appointed by the CAG.
  • Board of Directors appoints first auditors in case of other companies as per sec. 139(6] of Companies Act, 2013.

Question 16.
Mr. ‘R’, a practicing Chartered Accountant, is appointed as a “Tax Consultant” of MN Ltd., in which his father Mr. ‘C is the managing director. [Nov. 13 (2 Marks]]
Answer:
Appointment is valid.

  • A member of the ICAI will be held guilty of professional misconduct if he or partner of his firm or their relatives hold substantial interest in an enterprise and he expresses his opinion on the F.S. of such enterprise.
  • In this case, Mr. R is a “Tax Consultant” and not a “Statutory Auditor” of ABC Ltd., hence he is not disqualified to be appointed as tax consultant.

Question 17.
Audit of Private Limited Companies are to be excluded while calculating ceiling on number of audits. [Nov. 13 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • Sec. 141 (3]Cg] of Companies Act, 2013 does not exclude audit of private limited companies while calculating ceiling on number of audits.

Question 18.
The Board of Directors can fill the casual vacancy caused by resignation of an auditor, who shall hold office until the conclusion of the next AGM. [May 14 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • As per sec. 139(8] of Companies Act, 2013, casual vacancy caused by the resignation of an auditor cannot be filled in by the Board of Directors itself.
  • Such appointment shall also be approved by the company at general meeting convened within three months of the recommendation of the board and the auditor so appointed shall hold office till the conclusion of the next annual general meeting.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 19.
The first Auditor is generally appointed by the company at a General Meeting. [Nov. 14(2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect:

  • As per section 139(6) of the Companies Act, 2013, the first auditor(s) of a company shall be appointed by the Board of Directors within 30 days from the date of registration of the company.
  • General Meeting is authorized to appoint the subsequent auditor u/s 139(1).

Question 20.
The first auditor of a Government Company was appointed by the Board in its meeting after 10 days from the date of registration. [May 15 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • As per section 139(7] of the Companies Act, 2013, the first auditor of a government company shall be appointed by the Comptroller and Auditor-General of India within 60 days from the date of registration of the company.
  • If CAG does not appoint the first auditor within 60 days, the Board shall appoint in next 30 days.

Question 21.
Director’s relative can act as an auditor of the company. [May 15 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect:
As per section 141(3) of the Companies Act, 2013, a person shall not be eligible for appointment as an auditor of a company whose relative is a Director or is in the employment of the Company as a director or key Managerial Personnel.

Question 22.
If an LLP (Limited Liability Partnership Firm) is appointed as an auditor of a company, every partner of a firm shall be authorized to act as an auditor. [May 15 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect:
As per section 141(2) of the Companies Act, 2013, where a firm including a limited liability partnership (LLP) is appointed as an auditor of a company, only the partners who are Chartered Accountants shall be authorised to act and sign on behalf of the firm.

Question 23.
AB & Co. is an audit firm having partners Mr. A and Mr. B Mr. C, the relative of Mr. B is holding se-curities having face value of₹ 2,00,000 in XYZ Ltd. AB & Co. is qualified for an auditor of XYZ Ltd. [Nov. 15 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • Sec. 141(3)(d)(i) of the Companies Act, 2013, disqualifies a person to be appointed as auditor of a company if the person or his relative or his partner is holding securities in the company. However Relative may hold securities of face value up to ₹ 1,00,000.
  • AB & Co. is disqualified to be appointed as auditor of XYZ Ltd. as relative of Mr. B, the partner of the AB & Co. is holding securities of face value of₹ 2,00,000.

Question 24.
Manner of rotation of auditor will not be applicable to company A, which is having paid up share capital of ₹ 15 crores and having public borrowing from nationalized bank of ₹ 50 crore because it is a Private Limited Company. [Nov. 15 (2 Marks), RTP-May 18]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • Provisions related with rotation of auditors are applicable in case of private companies having paid up capital of ₹ 20 Crore or more and to companies having paid up capital below ₹ 20 Crore, but having public borrowings from financial institutions, banks or public deposits of ₹ 5 0 Crore or More.
  • In the instant case, as borrowings is of ₹ 50 Crore, provisions related with rotation of auditors are applicable.

Question 25.
Managing director of A Ltd. himself appointed the first auditor of the company. [Nov. 15 (2 Marks), MTP-Oct. 19]
Or
Managing Director of Pigeon Ltd. himself wants to appoint CA. Champ, a practicing Chartered Accountant, as first auditor of the company. [MTP-May 20]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • Sec. 139(6) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that the first auditor of the company is to be appointed by the Board of Directors within 30 days of registration of the company. If the Board fails, members shall within 90 days appoint the auditor in EGM. In case of Government company, the first auditor is to be appointed by CAG of India.
  • Appointment of first auditor by the managing director is not correct.

Question 26.
A Chartered Accountant holding securities of S Ltd. having face value of ₹ 950 is qualified for appointment as an auditor of S Ltd. [Nov. 15 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • Sec. 141(3)(d)(z) of the Companies Act, 2013, disqualifies a person to be appointed as auditor of a company if the person or his relative or his partner is holding securities in the company.
    Chartered accountant is disqualified to be appointed as auditorofS Ltd. as he is holding securities of face value of ₹ 950.

Question 27.
Mr. N, a member of the Institute of Chartered Accountant of England and Wales, is qualified to be appointed as auditor of Indian Companies. [Nov. 15 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • As per Section 141(1) of Companies Act, 2013, a person shall be eligible to be appointed as auditor of an Indian company only if he is a Chartered Accountant. Chartered Accountant implies the member of Institute of Chartered Accountant of India holding certificate of practice.
  • Mr. N, member of Institute of Chartered Accountant of England and Wales is disqualified to be appointed as auditor of Indian companies.

Question 28.
The first auditors of a Government Company were appointed by the Board of Directors. [May 16 (2 Marks))
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • Section 139(7) of the Companies Act, 2013 lays down that in the case of a Government company the first auditor shall be appointed by the CAG of India within 60 days of registration of the company.
  • In case the CAG of India does not appoint such auditor within the said period, the BOD of the company shall appoint such auditor within the next 30 days.
  • In the case of failure of the Board to appoint such auditor within the next 30 days, it shall inform the members of the company who shall appoint such auditor within the 60 days at an EGM.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 29.
Mr. Pawan, a practicing Chartered Accountant, is appointed as “Tax-Consultant” of ABC Ltd., in which his father. Mr. Singh is Managing Director. [May 16 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is correct.

  • Sec. 141(3)(f) of Companies Act, 2013 disqualifies a person to be appointed as auditor whose relative is a director or is in employment of the company as a director or key managerial personnel.
  • However no such disqualification is prescribed under the law for appointing a person as a tax consultant, therefore sec. 141(3)(f) will not be attracted.
  • Mr. Pawan can be appointed as a tax consultant irrespective that his father is the managing director of the company.

Question 30.
Central Government permission is required when auditors are to be removed before expiry of their term, but not so when auditors are changed after expiry of their term. [Nov. 16 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is correct.
Removal of auditor before expiry of his term is a serious matter and may adversely affect his independence. Hence, the permission of the Central Government is required when auditors are removed before expiry of their term and the same is not needed when they are not re-appointed after expiry of their term.
Chartered accountant is disqualified to be appointed as auditor of S Ltd. as he is holding securities of face value of₹ 950.

Question 31.
If the Board of Directors fails to appoint the first auditor in case of a company other than a Govern- | ment Company, then the Central Government shall appoint the auditor. [May 17 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
As per section 139(6) of Companies Act, 2013, in case of non-government companies, if Board fails to appoint the first auditor, it shall inform the members of the company, who shall within 90 days at an EGM shall appoint the auditor.

Question 32.
If LLP is appointed as an auditor of a company, every partner of a firm shall be authorized to act as an auditor. [RTP-May 18]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
As per section 141(2) of the Companies Act, 2013, where a firm including LLP is appointed as an auditor of a company, only the partners who are Chartered Accountants shall be authorised to act and sign on behalf of the firm.

Question 33.
PQR & CO., Chartered Accountants, resigned from the audit of a government company and filed the resignation with the company and the registrar within 30 days. Comment, whether PQR & CO. has complied with the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013. [May 18 (2 Marks), MTP-April 19]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
As per Sec. 140(2) of Companies Act, 2013, in case of Govt, companies or Govt, owned/controlled companies, the auditor shall also file statement of resignation with the Comptroller and Auditor General of India, indicating the reasons and other facts as may be relevant with regard to his resignation.

Question 34.
K Ltd., a non-government company, was incorporated on 01.10.2017. Mr. B, managing Director of K Ltd., himself appointed the first auditor of the company on 31.12.2017. [May 18 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • AsperSec. 139(6) of Companies Act, 2013, the first auditor of a company, other than a Government company, shall be appointed by the Board of Directors. The appointment shall be made within 30 days from the date of registration of the company.
  • In the case of failure of the Board to appoint first auditor, it shall inform the members of the company, who shall within 90 days at an EGM shall appoint the auditor.

Question 35.
The Board of Director of ABC Ltd., a listed company at Bombay Stock Exchange, is required to fill the casual vacancy of an auditor only after taking into account the recommendations of the audit committee. [Nov. 18 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is correct:
As per Sec. 139(11) of Companies Act, 2013, where a company is required to constitute an Audit Committee u/s 177, all appointments, including the filling of a casual vacancy of an auditor under Sec. 139 shall be made after taking into account the recommendations of such committee.

Question 36.
Any partner of an LLP, who is appointed as an auditor of a company, can sign the audit report. [Nov. 18 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
As per Sec. 141(2) of Companies Act, 2013, where a firm including a LLP is appointed as an auditor of a company, only the partners who are CA shall be authorised to act and sign on behalf of the firm.

Question 37.
Where the firm of appointed as an auditor of the entity the audit report is signed only in the name of audit firm. [May 19 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • AsperSec. 145 of the Companies Act, 2013, the person appointed as an auditor of the company shall sign the auditor’s report or sign or certify any other document of the company, in accordance with the provisions of section 141(2). Sec. 141(2) of the Companies Act, 2013 states that where a firm including a LLP is appointed as an auditor of a company, only the partners who are chartered accountants shall be authorised to act and sign on behalf of the firm.
  • As per SA 700 “Forming an Opinion and Reporting on Financial Statements” where the firm is appointed as the auditor, the report is signed in the personal name of the auditor and in the name of the audit firm.

Question 38.
Bhartiya Gas Ltd. a Government Company, the Comptroller and Auditor-General of India shall, in respect of a financial year, appoint an auditor duly qualified to be appointed as an auditor of companies under this Act, within a period of 180 days from the end of the financial year, who shall hold office till the end of the next financial year. [May 19 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
In the case of a Government company, the Comptroller and Auditor-General of India shall, in respect of a financial year, appoint an auditor duly qualified to be appointed as an auditor of companies under this Act, within a period of 180 days from the commencement of the financial year, who shall hold office till the conclusion of the annual general meeting.

Question 39.
As per Section 139(6), the first auditor of a company, including a Government company, shall be appointed by the Board of Directors within 60 days from the date of registration of the company. [RTP-Nov. 19]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
As per Sec. 139(6) of the Companies Act, 2013, the first auditor of a company, other than a Government company, shall be appointed by the Board of Directors within 30 days from the date of registration of the company.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 40.
As per section 140(2) of the Act, the auditor who has resigned from the company need not inform the Registrar of Companies. [RTP-Nov. 19]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
As per Sec. 140(2) of the Companies Act, 2013, the auditor who has resigned from the company shall file within a period of 30 days from the date of resignation, a statement in the prescribed Form ADT-3 (as per Rule 8 of CAAR) with the company and the Registrar.

Question 41.
CA. K has resigned as auditor, after 2 months from appointment of NML Ltd. He needs to file ADT-3 with the Registrar within 60 days from the date of resignation. [Nov. 19 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
As per Sec. 140(2) of the Companies Act, 2013, the auditor who has resigned from the company shall file within a period of 30 days from the date of resignation, a statement in the Form ADT-3 with the company and the Registrar.

Question 42.
All public companies, having in aggregate, outstanding loans or borrowings or debentures or deposits exceeding hundred crore rupees or more shall constitute an Audit Committee. [RTP-May 20]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
As per Sec. 177 of Companies Act, 2013, all public companies, having in aggregate, outstanding loans or borrowings or debentures or deposits exceeding fifty crore rupees or more shall constitute an Audit Committee.

Question 43.
According to Section 140(1), the auditor appointed under section 139 may be removed from his office before the expiry of his term only by a general resolution of the company. [RTP-May 20]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
As per Sec. 140(1), the auditor appointed u/s 139 may be removed from his office before the expiry of his term only by a special resolution of the company, after obtaining the previous approval of the Central Government in that behalf as per Rule 7 of CAAR, 2014.

Question 44.
As per sub-section (5) of the section 140, the Tribunal cannot direct the company to change its auditors. [RTP-May 20]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
As per Sec. 140(5), the Tribunal either suo motu or on an application made to it by the Central Government or by any person concerned, if it is satisfied that the auditor of a company has, whether directly or indirectly, acted in a fraudulent manner or abetted or colluded in any fraud by, or in relation to, the company or its directors or officers, it may, by order, direct the company to change its auditors.

Question 45.
Audit committee is to be constituted by every public company to ensure better standards of corporate governance. [MTP-Oct. 20]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
As per Sec. 177 of Companies Act, 2013 audit committee is to be constituted by every listed public company and following classes of public companies only:

  • the Public Companies having paid up share capital of₹ 10 crore or more; or
  • the Public Companies having turnover of ₹ 100 crore; or
  • the Public Companies which have, in aggregate, outstanding loans, debentures and deposits, exceeding ₹ 50 crore.

Question 46.
The term “relative”, as defined under the Companies Act, 2013, means anyone who is closely related to another. [RTP-Nov. 20]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
The term “relative”, as defined under the Companies Act, 2013, means anyone who is related to another as members of a Hindu Undivided Family; husband and wife; Father (including step- father), Mother (including step-mother), Son (including step-son), Son’s wife, Daughter, Daughter’s husband, Brother (including step-brother), Sister (including step-sister).

Question 47.
According to Section 140(1), the auditor appointed under section 139 may be removed from his office before the expiry of his term only by passing a Board resolution. [RTP-Nov. 20]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
According to Section 140(1), the auditor appointed under section 139 may be removed from his office before the expiry of his term only by a special resolution of the company, after obtaining the previous approval of the Central Government in that behalf as per Rule 7 of CAAR, 2014

Question 48.
Auditor’s lien on his client’s books and record is not unconditional. [May 07 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is correct.
Auditor’s lien is subject to following conditions:

  • Documents must belong to the client who owes the money.
  • These documents must come to the possession of the auditor on the client’s authority.
  • The auditor can retain such documents, only if he has done work on such documents, on which fees have not been paid.

Question 49.
The auditor of a company is entitled to attend any General Meeting of the company as his duty. [Nov. 08 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is correct.
Section 146 of the Companies Act, 2013 requires the auditor of a company to attend either by himself or through his qualified authorised representative to attend the general meeting, unless exempted. Company is required to forward all notices and other communications relating to any general meeting of a company to the auditor.

Auditor shall have right to be heard at such meeting on any part of the business which concerns him as an auditor.

Question 50
Mr. X, a Chartered Accountant, is an employee of M/s M & N Co., a firm of Chartered Accountants of India. The firm is the Auditors of ABC & Co. Ltd. After auditing the accounts of the Company the Auditor firm allowed Mr. X, their employee, to sign the audit report which he did. [Nov. 09 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • An employee Chartered Accountant cannot sign the auditor’s report on behalf of the auditing firm.
  • Only a partner in the firm can sign the audit report in compliance with the provisions of sec. 145 read with section 141(2) of the Companies Act, 2013.

Question 51.
It is the responsibility of the Auditor to ensure that statement of profit and Loss and Balance Sheet of the company shall comply with the Accounting Standards. [Nov. 14 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect:

  • As per section 143(3) of Companies Act, 2013, it is the duty of the auditor to report whether, in his opinion, the financial statements comply with the accounting standards.
  • To ensure that statement of profit and loss and balance sheet of the company comply with the accounting standards is the responsibility of the company.

Question 52
C&AG orders to conduct test audit of the accounts of a Government company. [May 15 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is correct.
As per Sec. 143(7) of Companies Act, 2013, CAG may in case of government company, if he considers necessary, by an order cause test audit to be conducted of the accounts of such company.

Question 53.
The auditor of A Ltd. Company wanted to refer to the minute books during audit but boards of directors refused to show the minute books to the auditors. [Nov. 15 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • Sec. 141(3) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that every auditor of a company shall have a right of access at all times to the books of account and vouchers of the company, whether kept at the registered office of the company or at any other place.
  • The term ‘books of account and vouchers’ includes all books which have any bearing, or are likely to have any bearing on the accounts, whether these be the usual financial books or the statutory or statistical books.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 54.
The auditor has to report to Central Govt, within 90 days of his knowledge of an offence involving fraud. [Nov. 15 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • Sec. 141(12) of Companies Act, 2013 provides that if an auditor of a company, in the course of the performance of his duties as auditor, has reason to believe that an offence of fraud which involves an amount of ₹ 1 Cr. or above is being or has been committed against the company by officers or employees of the company, he shall report the matter to the CG.
  • Rule 13 of Companies [Audit and Auditor’s) Rules, 2014 provides that auditor shall report to the Board or the Audit Committee immediately but not later than 2 days of his knowledge of fraud, seeking their reply within 45 days.
  • On receipt of reply, he shall forward his report to the Central Government within 15 days from the receipt of such reply.

Question 55.
The members of XYZ Ltd. preferred a complaint against the auditor stating that he has failed to send the auditor’s report to them. [May 16 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • Section 143 of the Companies Act, 2013 lays down the powers and duties of auditor. As per provisions of the law, it is no part of the auditor’s duty to send a copy of his report to members of the company.
  • In case of Allen Graig and Company [London) Ltd., it was held that duty of the auditor after having signed the report to be annexed to a balance sheet is confined only to forwarding that report to the secretary of the company. It will be for the secretary or the director to convene a general meeting and send the balance sheet and report to the members [or other person) entitled to receive it.

Question 56.
Auditor’s right of lien is unconditional. [Nov. 16 [2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is not correct.
Auditor’s lien is subject to following conditions:

  • Documents must belong to the client who owes the money.
  • These documents must come to the possession of the auditor on the client’s authority.
  • The auditor can retain such documents, only if he has done work on such documents, on which fees have not been paid.

Question 57.
Fraud against the company shall be reported by the auditor to the Central Government within 45 days of his knowledge, [May 17 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • As per Rule 13 of Companies [Audit & Auditor’s) Rules, 2014, the auditor shall report the fraud to the CG within 15 days of reply received from the Board or Audit Committee, as the case may be.
  • In case auditor does not receive any reply within the stipulated period of 45 days, he shall forward his report to the CG within next 15 days.

Question 58.
The auditor has to report under section 143 of Companies Act, 2013whether company has adequate internal controls in place and overall effectiveness of such internal controls. [MTP-Oct. 20]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.

  • As per Sec. 143 of the Companies Act, 2013, auditor has to report whether the company has adequate internal financial controls with reference to financial statements in place and operating effectiveness of such controls.
  • The auditor has to report on adequacy and effectiveness of internal financial controls only and not internal controls.

Question 59.
CARO, 2020 does not apply to a foreign company. [May 13 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
CARO, 2020 applies to all companies including foreign companies except Banking, Insurance, Sec. 8 Companies, One Person Company, Small Companies and Private Ltd, companies subject to certain conditions.

Question 60.
CARO, 2020 shall not apply to a Private Limited Company whose paid up capital and reserves are not more than ₹ 50 Lacs. [May 14 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is correct.
CARO, 2020 is not applicable over a private limited company, not being a subsidiary or holding of a public company, if following conditions are satisfied:

  • having a Paid up capital & Reserves & Surplus not more than ₹ 1 Cr. as on the balance sheet date, and
  • which does not have total borrowings exceeding ₹ 1 Cr. from any bank or financial institution at any point of time during the financial year, and
  • which does not have a total revenue as disclosed in Schedule III to the Companies Act, 2013 (including revenue from discontinuing operations) exceeding ₹₹0 Cr. during the financial year as per the financial statements.

Question 61.
Provisions of Companies (Auditor’s Report) Order, 2020, apply to clubs, chambers of commerce, research institutes etc., which have been established under section 8 of the Companies Act, 2013. [Nov. 09 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is Incorrect.
CARO, 2020 applies to all companies including foreign companies except Banking, Insurance, sec. 8 Companies, One Person Company, Small Companies and Private Ltd. companies subject to certain conditions.

Question 62.
CARO 2020 is also applicable to the audit of branch of a company, except where the company is exempt from the applicability of the order.
Answer:
Statement is correct.
Provisions of CARO are equally applicable in case of branches also, because under sec. 143(8), a branch auditor has same duties as of company auditor.

Question 63.
Provision of CARO, 2020 is not applicable to ABC Pvt. Ltd., a subsidiary of XYZ Ltd. (a public company) having fully paid Capital and Reserves & Surplus of ₹ 50 lakhs, Secured loan from bank of ₹ 90 Lakhs and Turnover of ₹ 5 Crore, for the financial year 2020-21. [Nov. 19 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
CARO, 2020 is not applicable over a private limited company, not being a subsidiary or holding of a public company, if following conditions are satisfied:

  • having a paid-up capital & Reserves & Surplus not more than ₹ 1 Cr. as on the balance sheet date, and
  • which does not have total borrowings exceeding ₹ 1 Cr. from any bank or financial institution at any point of time during the financial year, and
  • which does not have a total revenue as disclosed in Schedule III to the Companies Act, 2013 (including revenue from discontinuing operations) exceeding ₹ 10 Cr. during the financial year as per the financial statements.
    In this case, CARO is applicable as ABC Pvt. Ltd is a subsidiary of another public company.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 64.
Internal auditor of the company cannot also be its cost auditor. [Nov. 07 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is correct.

  • Cost auditor should not be the internal auditor of a company for the period for which he is conducting the cost audit.
  • If the cost auditor is also the internal auditor, he would not be able to discharge his duties properly.

Question 65.
Comment on the following: ABC Ltd. having turnover of ₹ 100 crores during financial year 2015-16, need not get its branch audited whose turnover is ₹ 1.5 crores during the same year. [May 13 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
As per section 143(8) of Companies Act, 2013 where a company has a branch office, the accounts of that office shall be audited by either of following:

  • the auditor appointed for the company, i.e. company auditor, or
  • any other person qualified for appointment as an auditor of the company under this Act, or
  • where the branch office is situated in a country outside India, the accounts of the branch office shall be audited either by the company’s auditor or by an accountant or by any other person duly qualified to act as an auditor of the accounts of the branch office in accordance with the laws of that country.

Question 66.
A joint auditor is not bound by the views of the majority of the joint auditors regarding matters to be covered in the auditor’s report. [May 17 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is correct.
SA 299 “Joint Audit of financial statements” provides the following in respect of reporting responsibilities of joint auditor:

  • Normally, the joint auditors are able to arrive at an agreed report.
  • However, where the joint auditors are in disagreement with regard to any matters to be covered by the report, each one of them should express his own opinion through a separate report.
  • A joint auditor is not bound by the views of the majority of the joint auditors regarding matters to be covered in the report and should express his opinion in a separate report in case of a disagreement.

Question 67.
Joint auditor is always bound by the views of majority of the joint auditors regarding matters to be covered in report. [May 19 (2 Marks)]
Answer:
Statement is incorrect:
SA 299 “Joint Audit of Financial Statements” provides that a joint auditor is not bound by the views of the majority of the joint auditors regarding matters to be covered in the report and should express his opinion in a separate report in case of a disagreement.

The Company Audit – CA Inter Audit Notes

Question 68.
Rule 3 of the Companies (Cost Records and Audit) Rule, 2014 provides the classes of companies, engaged in the production of goods of providing services, having an overall turnover of Rs. 25 crore or more during the immediately preceding financial year, required to include cost records in their books of account. [May 19 (2 MarksJl
Answer:
Statement is incorrect.
Rule 3 of the Companies (Cost Records and Audit) Rule, 2014, provides that for the purposes of Sec. 148(1) of the Companies Act, 2013, the specified class of companies, including foreign companies, engaged in the production of the goods or providing services, having an overall turnover from all its products and services of ₹ 35 Cr. or more during the immediately preceding financial year, shall include cost records for such products or services in their books of account.

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Banking Companies – CA Inter Advanced Accounting Study Material is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Banking Companies – CA Inter Advanced Accounting Study Material

Theory Questions

Question 1.
Mention the condition when a cash credit overdraft account is treated as ‘out of order’. (May 2010) (2 Marks)
Answer:
A cash credit overdraft account is treated as NPA if it remains out of order for a period of more than 90 days. An account is treated as ‘out of order’ if any of the following conditions is satisfied:
(a) The outstanding balance remains continuously in excess of the sanctioned limit/drawing power.
(b) Though the outstanding balance is less than the sanctioned limit /drawing power:

  1. there are no credits continuously for more than 90 days as on the date of balance sheet; or
  2. credits during the aforesaid period are not enough to cover the interest debited during the same period.

(c) Further any amount due to the bank under any credit facility is ‘overdue’ if it is not paid on the due date fixed by the bank.

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 2.
Write short note on classification of advances in case of Banking Company. (May 2016) – (4 Marks)
Answer:
Banks are required to classify their advances into four broad groups:

(i) Standard Assets – Standard assets are those which do not disclose any problems and which do not carry more than normal risk attached to the business. Such an asset is not a NPA (Non-performing asset).

(ii) Sub standard Assets – Sub-standard asset is one which has been classified as NPA for a period not exceeding 12 months. In other words, such
an asset will have well defined credit weaknesses that jeopardize the liquidation of the debt and are characterized by the distinct possibility that the bank will sustain some loss, if deficiencies are not corrected.

(iii) Doubtful Assets – A doubtful asset is one which has remained sub-standard for a period of at least 12 months. A loan classified as doubtful has all the weaknesses inherent in assets that were classified as sub-standard with added characteristic that the weaknesses make collection or liquidation in full, on the basis of currently known facts, conditions and values, highly questionable and improbable.

(iv) Loss Assets – A loss asset is one where loss has been identified by the bank or internal or external auditors or the RBI inspectors but the amount has not been written off, wholly or partly. In other words such assets are considered uncollectable or if collected of such low value that their being shown as bankable assets is not warranted even though there may be some salvage or recoverable value.

The classification of advances should be done taking into account

  1. Degree of well defined credit weakness and
  2. Extent of dependence on collateral security for the recovery of dues.

This classification is meant for the purpose of computing the amount of provision to be made in respect of advances.

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Tier I and II Capital

Question 3.
A Commercial Bank has the following capital funds and assets. Segregate the capital funds into Tier I and Tier II capitals. Find out the risk adjusted asset and risk weighted assets ratio. (Nov. 2010) (8 Marks)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 1
Answer:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 2
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 3

Risk Weighted Assets Ratio:
\(\frac{\text { Capital fund } \times 100}{\text { Risk adjusted assets }}\)
(824.8/11,392.60) × 100 = 7.24%

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 4.
A Commercial Bank has the following capital funds and assets. Segregate the capital funds into Tier-I and Tier-II Capitals. Find out the risk- adjusted and risk weighted assets and capital adequacy ratio: (May 2012) (8 Marks)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 4
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 12
Answer:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 13
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 5
Capital Adequacy Ratio = \(\frac{\text { Capital fund }}{\text { Risk adjusted assets }}\) × 100
= \(\frac{₹ 1,103 \text { crores } \times 100}{₹ 13,989 \text { crores }}\) = 7.89%

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 5.
A commercial bank has the allowing capital funds and assets. Segregate the capital funds into Tier I and Tier II capitals. Find out the risk adjusted asset and risk weighted asset ratio. State your observation on the risk weighted asset ratio. (Nov. 2014) (8 Marks)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 6
Answer:
Computation of Tier I and Tier II Capital Fund
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 7

Risk Adjusted Assets
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 8
Risk Weighted Assets Ratio:
\(\frac{\text { Capital fund } \times 100}{\text { Risk adjusted assets }}\)
= (726.10/11,183) × 100
= 6.49%
At present capital adequacy ratio as per RBI norms is 9%. Therefore, Bank has to improve the ratio by introducing further Tier-I capital or by reducing risk adjusted assets.

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 6.
A commercial bank has the following capital funds and assets. You are required to segregate the capital funds into Tier-I and Tier-II capitals and also find out the risk adjusted assets and capital adequacy ratio. (May 2017) (8 Marks)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 9
Answer:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 10
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 11
Capital to Risk Weighted Assets Ratio (Capital Adequacy Ratio):
Capital Fund/(Risk Adjusted Assets + Off-Balance Sheet items) × 100
(2,206/15,978) × 100 = 13.8196

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 7.
Astha Bank has the following Capital Funds and Assets as at 31st March, 2018:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 14
You are required to:
(i) Segregate the capital funds into Tier I and Tier II capitals.
(ii) Find out the risk-adjusted assets and risk weighted assets ratio. (May 2018 – New Course) (10 Marks)
Answer:
(i) Capital Funds-
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 15

(ii) Risk Adjusted Assets
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 16

Risk Weighted Assets Ratio:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 17
= (1,145+11.25)/(9,636 +7,300)
= (1,156.25/16.936) × 100 = 6.83% (rounded off)

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Interest Recognition

Question 8.
Find out the income to be recognised by ABC Bank Ltd. for the year ended 31st March, 2014 in respect of interest on advances [₹ in Lakhs] as detailed below: (Nov. 2014) (4 Marks)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 18
Answer:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 19
Note : Interest on Performing assets to be recognised on accrual basis, but interest on Non-Performing assets should be recognised on cash basis.

Classification Of Advances

Question 9.
The outstanding amount (funded as well as unfunded) as on 31st March, 20X1 was: ₹ 10,000. The realizable value of security of the same was ₹ 8,000.
Period for which the advance has remained in ‘doubtful’ category as on 31st March, 20X1 was: 2.5 years.
Answer:
Provisioning requirement:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 20

Provisioning for Advances (Without Ecgc and Dicgc Cover)

Question 10.
From the following information of details of advances of Zenith Bank Ltd., calculate the amount of provisions to be made in Profit and Loss Account for the year ended on 31-3-2010: (Nov. 2010) (5 Marks)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 21
Answer:
Statement showing provisions
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 22
Note: It is assumed that sub-standard assets and all doubtful assets are fully secured.

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 11.
From the following information, compute the amount of provisions to be made in the Profit and Loss Account of a Commercial Bank for the year ending on 31-03-2012. (May 2012) (5 Marks)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 23
Answer:
Statement showing the amount of provisions
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 24

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 12.
From the following information of STP Bank Ltd. pertaining to the financial year 2012-13, compute the provisions to be made in the Profit and Loss Account: (Nov. 2013) (4 Marks)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 25
Answer:
Statement showing amount of provision
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 26

Provisioning for Advances (With Ecgc and Dicgc Cover)

Question 13.
In ABC Bank, the doubtful assets (more than 3 years) as on 31.3.20X1 is ₹ 1,000 lakhs. The value of security (including DICGC 100% cover of ₹ 100 lakhs) is ascertained at ₹ 500 lakhs. How much provision must be made in the books of the Bank towards doubtful assets?
Answer:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 27

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 14.
A loan account remains out of order as on the date of Balance Sheet of a Bank. The account has been classified as doubtful assets (up to 1 year).
Details of the accounts are:
Outstanding – ₹ 6,73,000
ECGC coverage – 25% (Limited to ₹ 1,00,000)
Value of security held – ₹ 1,50,000
Compute the necessary provision to be made by a Bank as per applicable rates. (Nov. 2012) (5 Marks)
Answer:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 28

Question 15.
A loan account remains out of order as on the date of Balance Sheet of a Bank. The account has been classified as doubtful assets (up to 3 years). i Detail of the account is:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 29
Compute the necessary provision to be made by bank as per applicable rate. (May 2014) (4 Marks)
Answer:
Computation of provision to be made by a Bank
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 30

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 16.
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 31
You are required to calculate provisions as per applicable rules. (May 2018) (4 Marks)
Answer:
Provision required to be made as on 31.3.2018
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 32

Rebate On Bills Discounted

Question 17.
The following facts have been taken out from the records of C Bank Ltd. as on 31st March, 2015:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 33
An analysis of the bills discounted is as follows:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 34
You are required to:
(i) Calculate Rebate on Bill Discounted as on 31st March, 2015.
(ii) The amount of discount to be credited to the profit and loss account.
Answer:
(i) Computation showing Rebate on bills discounted
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 35

(ii) Amount of discount [to be credited to the Profit and Loss Account]
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 36

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 18.
Given below is an extract from the that balance of T.K. Bank Limited as on 31st December, 2009:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 37
An analysis of the bills discounted is shown below:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 38
Show the workings, how the relevant items will appear in the bank’s Profit and Loss account as on 31st December, 2009 and in bank’s Balance Sheet as on 31st December, 2009. (May 2010) (8 Marks)
Answer:
Profit & Loss Account (extract) for the period ending 31.12.2009
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 39

Balance Sheet (Extract) as on 31.12.2009
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 40

Statement of rebate on bills discounted as on 31.12.2009
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 41

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 19.
The following particulars are extracted from the records of M/s. Engco Bank Limited for the year ended 31st March, 2011:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 42

An analysis of the bills discounted is a follows:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 43
The rate of discount is 12% per annum. You are required to:

  1. Calculate rebate on bills discounted as on 31st March, 2011.
  2. Determine the amount of discount to be credited to the profit and loss account for the year ended 31st March, 2011.
  3. Show the necessary journal entries in the books of M/s. Engco Bank Ltd. as on 31st March, 2011. (Nov. 2011) (8 Marks)

Answer:
(i) Computation showing Rebate on Bills Discounted as on 31st March, 2011
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 44
Amount of rebate on bills = ₹ 11,43,38,000 x 1296 × 1/365 = ₹ 37,591 (approx.)
Note: Alternatively rebate on each bill can be calculated individually.

(ii) Amount of discount (to be credited to the Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 2011)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 45

In the books of Engco Bank Ltd. Journal Entries
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 46

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 20.
The following information is available in the books of X Bank Limited as on 31st March, 2013:
Bills discounted – ₹ 1,37,05,000
Rebate on bills discounted (as on 1-4-2012) – ₹ 2,21,600
Discount received – ₹ 10,56,650
Details of bills discounted are as follows:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 47
Calculate the rebate on bills discounted as on 31-3-2013 and give necessary Journal Entries in the books of X Bank Ltd. as on 31st March, 2013. (May 2013) (8 Marks)
Answer:
Computation showing of Rebate on bills discounted
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 48

Journal Entries in the books of X Bank Ltd.
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 49

Working Note:
Amount of discount (to be credited to the Profit and Loss Account)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 50

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 21.
The following is an extract from the trial balance of Novel Bank Limited as on 31st March, 2017:
Rebate on bills discounted as on 1st April 2016 – ₹ 78,566 (Cr. bal.)
Discount Received – ₹ 1,60,572 (Cr. bal.)
An analysis of bills discounted is as follows:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 51
Find out the amount of discount to be credited to Profit and Loss Account for the year ending on 31st March, 2017 and pass the necessary journal entries. The rate of discount shall be taken at 10% per annum. (Nov. 2017) (6 Marks)
Answer:
Computation showing Rebate on bill (discounted as on 31-3-2017)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 52

Amount of discount (to be credited to the profit and loss account)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 53

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 22.
Forward Bank Ltd. furnishes the following information as on 31st March, 2018.
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 54
Details of bills discounted is as given below:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 55
(i) Calculate the rebate on bills discounted as on 31st March, 2018.
(ii) Pass necessary Journal Entries. (Nov. 2018 – New Course) (5 Marks)
Answer:
Computation showing Rebate on Bill discounted (as on 31-3-2018)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 56

Working Note:
Amount of discount (to be credited to the Profit and Loss Account)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 57

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Bills for Collection

Question 23.
On 01.04.20X1 bills for collection was 7 lacs. During 20X1-X2 bills received for collection amounted to 64.5 lacs. Bills collected were 47 lacs. Bills dishonoured was 5.5 lacs. Prepare Bills for collection (Assets) and Bills for Collection (Liabilities) Accounts.
Answer:
Bills for Collection (Assets) Account
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 58

Bills for Collection (Liabilities) Account
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 59

Acceptances, Endorsements and Other Obligations

Question 24.
From the following details prepare ‘Acceptances, Endorsements and other Obligation A/c’ as would appear in the General Ledger.

On 1.4.20X1 Acceptances not yet satisfied stood at ₹ 22,30,000. Out of which ₹ 20 lacs were subsequently paid off by clients and bank had to honour the rest. A scrutiny of the Acceptance Register (for transactions during the year) revealed the following:
Client Acceptances/Guarantees
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 60
Answer:
Acceptances, Endorsements and other Obligation Account (in general ledger)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 61

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Mix Question (Rebate On Bills Discounted; Bills For Collection; Acceptances, Endorsements And Other Obligations)

Question 25.
(a) Following facts have been taken out from the records of M/s. Sneha Bank Ltd. in respect of the year ending March 31, 2015:
(i) On 1-4-2014 Bills for collection were ₹ 10,15,000. During 2014-15 bills received for collection amounted to ₹ 89,75,000, bills collected were ₹ 64,50,000 and bills dishonoured and returned were ₹ 11,25,000. Prepare Bills for collection (Assets) Account and bills for Collection (Liability) Account.

(ii) On 1 -4-2014, Acceptance, Endorsement, etc. not yet satisfied amounted to ₹ 27,50,000. During the year under question, Acceptances, Endorsements, Guarantees etc., amounted to ₹ 67,50,000. Bank honoured acceptances to the extent of ₹ 44,50,000 and client paid of ₹ 15,00,000 against the guaranteed liability. Clients failed to pay ₹ 4,00,000 which the Bank had to pay.
Prepare the ‘Acceptances, Endorsements and other obligations Account’ as it would appear in the General Ledger.

(iii) It is found from the books, that a loan of ₹ 50,00,000 was advanced on 30.09.2014 @ 14% p.a. Interest payable half yearly; but the loan was outstanding as on 31.3.2015 without any payment recorded in the meantime, either towards principal or towards interest. The security for the loan was ₹ 1,00,000 fully paid shares of ₹ 100 each (the market value was ₹ 98 per share as per the Stock Exchange information as on 30th September, 2014). But due to fluctuations, the price fell to ₹ 45 per share in January, 2015. On 31-3-2015, the price as per Stock Exchange rate was ₹ 85 per share.
State how would you classify the loan as secured/unsecured in the Balance Sheet of the Company.

(iv) The following balances are extracted from the Trial Balance as on 31.3.2015:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 62
It is ascertained that the proportionate discounts not yet earned for bills to mature in 2014-15 amount to ₹ 24,000. Prepare ledger accounts.

(b) From the following information of M/s. XY Bank Ltd. for the year ended 31st March, 2014, compute the provisions to be made in the Bank’s Books for Doubtful Assets: (May 2015)
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 63
Answer:
(a)(i) Bills for Collection (Assets) A/c
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 64

(ii) In the general ledger
Acceptances, Endorsement & other Obligation Account
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 65

(iii) For classifying loans as fully secured or otherwise, the value of the security as on the last date of the year is considered. The value of the security is ₹ 85,00,000 covering the loan and the interest due comfortably. Hence, it is to be treated as good and fully secured.

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

(iv) Rebate on Bills Discounted Account
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 66

(b) Computation of provision in the books of XY Bank Ltd.
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 67

Question 26.
From the following facts drawn from the records of Honest Bank for the year ended 31st March, 2015, prepare the accounts as mentioned below:
(i) 1-4-2014 Bills for Collection were ₹ 28,00,000. During 2014-15, bills received for collection were ₹ 2,58,00,000. Bills collected were ₹ 1,88,00,000. Bills dishonoured and returned were ₹ 22,00,000. Prepare Bills for Collection (Assets) Account and Bills for Collection (Liability) Account.

(ii) On 1st April, 2014, Acceptance, Endorsement etc. not yet satisfied amounted to ₹ 58,00,000. During the year, Acceptances, Endorsements, Guarantees etc. were ₹ 1,76,00,000. The Bank honoured acceptances of ₹ 1,00,00,000 and a client paid ₹ 40,00,000 against guaranteed liabilities. The Bank paid ₹ 4,00,000 which clients failed to pay.
Prepare ‘Acceptances, Endorsements and Other Obligations Account’ in the General Ledger.

(iii) A loan of ₹ 24,00,000 advanced by the Bank on 30th August, 2014 @10 per annum, whose interest is payable half-yearly. The loan was outstanding as on 31st March, 2015. Nothing was paid either towards Principal or Interest of this loan. The security for the loan was 40,000 fully paid shares of ₹ 100 each. The shares were quoted on the stock exchange on 30th September, 2014 at t 90 per share. Due to fluctuations, the price felt to ₹ 50 per share in January, 2015. On 31st March, 2015 the share price quoted on the stock exchange was ₹ 96 per share. State giving reasons, whether the loan would be classified as secured or unsecured in the Balance Sheet of the Company as on 31st March, 2015.

(iv) The following balances were taken from the Trial Balance as on 31st March, 2015.
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 68
Proportianate discounts not yet earned for Bills to mature in 2015-2016 were ₹ 56,000. Prepare the following Accounts:
(a) Rebate on Bills Account
(b) Interest and Discount Account. (Nov. 2016) (10 Marks)
Answer:
(i) Bills for Collection (Assets) A/c
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 69

Bills for Collection (Liabilities) Account
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 70

(ii) In the General Ledger
Acceptances, Endorsement & other Obligations Account
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 71

(iii) For classifying loans as fully secured or otherwise, the value of the security as on the last date of the year is considered. The value of the security is ₹ 38,40,000 (40,000 shares ₹ ₹ 96 per share) covering the loan and the interest due comfortably. Hence it is to be treated as good and fully secured loan.

(iv) Rebate on Bills Discounted Account
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 72

Interest & Discount Account
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 73

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Final Accounts – P&L

Question 27.
The following figures are extracted from the books of XYZ Bank Ltd. as on 31-03-20X2:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 74

The following further information is given:

  1. A customer to whom a sum of ₹ 10 lakhs was advanced has become insolvent and it is expected only 55% can be recovered from his estate.
  2. There was also other debts for which a provisions of ₹ 2,00,000 was found necessary.
  3. Rebate on bill discounted on 31-03-20X1 was ₹ 15,000 and on 31-03- 20X2 was ₹ 20,000.
  4. Income tax of ₹ 2,00,000 is to be provided.

The directors desire to declare 5% dividend.
Prepare the Profit and Loss account of XYZ Bank Ltd. for the year ended 31-03-20X2 and also show, how the Profit and Loss account will appear in the Balance Sheet if the Profit and Loss account opening balance was NIL as on 31-03-20X1
Answer:
XYZ Bank Limited
Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 20X2
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 75

Profit & Loss Account balance of ₹ 3,75,445 will appear under the head ‘Reserves and Surplus’ in Schedule 2 of the Balance Sheet.

SCHEDULES:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 76

Working Mote I:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 77

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 28.
The following figures have been taken from the books of XYZ Bank Limited as on 31st March, 2014:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 78

The following additional information is given to you:

  1. One customer to whom a sum of ₹ 10 lakhs was advanced, has become insolvent and it is expected that only 50% of the amount will be recovered from his estate.
  2. Auditors find that a provision of ₹ 1.5 lakhs is necessary against other debts.
  3. Rebate on bills discounted on 31st March, 2013 was ₹ 12,000 and on 31st March, 2014 was ₹ 16,000.
  4. Provide ₹ 6,50,000 for income tax.
  5. The Board of Directors decides to declare dividend @ 10% after transfer of 25% of the year’s profit to Statutory Reserve.

You are required to prepare Profit and Loss Account of the bank with all the necessary schedules for the year ended 31st March, 2014. Ignore figures for the previous year and corporate dividend tax.
Answer:
XYZ Bank Limited
Profit and Loss account for the year ended 31st March, 2014
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 79

Schedule 13 – Interest earned
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 80

Schedule 14 – Other Income
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 81

Schedule 15-Interest Expended
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 82

Schedule 16-Operating Expenses
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 83

Working Notes:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 84

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 29.
From the following information of ABC Bank Limited, Prepare Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 2018:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 85

Other Information:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 86
(iii) Provide 35% of the profits towards provision for taxation.
(iv) Transfer 25% of the profit to Statutory Reserves.
Answer:
ABC Bank Limited Profit and Loss Account
For the year ended 31st March, 2018
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 87

Schedule 13 – Interest Earned
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 88
Note: Interest on NPA is recognized on cash basis, hence difference of accrued interest not received have been reduced from the total accrued interest.

Schedule 14 – Other Income
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 89

Schedule 15 – Interest Expended
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 90

Schedule 16 – Operating Expenses
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 91

Working Note:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 92

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 30.
From the following information, you are required to prepare Profit and Loss Account of Zee Bank Ltd., for the year ending 31st March, 2009:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 93
Additional information:
(a) Rebate on bills discounted to be provided for? 15,000
(b) Classification of advances:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 94
(c) Make tax provision @ 35%
(d) Profit and Loss A/c (Cr.) ₹ 40,000. (Nov. 2009) (8 Marks)
Answer:
Form B’
Zee Bank Ltd.
Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 2009
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 95

Schedule 13: Interest Earned
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 96

Working Notes:
I. Calculation of provisions on non-performing assets
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 97

II. Calculation of provision for tax
Tax = 35% of [Total income – Total expenditure (excluding tax)].
Tax = 35% of [₹ 44,30,000 + ₹ 1,25,000 – (₹ 13,60,000 + ₹ 13,31,000 + ₹ 5,90,250 + ₹ 15,000)]
Tax = ₹ 451063

III. Total amount of provisions and contingencies
= Provision for non-performing assets + Provision for tax + Rebate on bills discounted
= ₹ 5,90,250 + ₹ 4,51,063 + ₹ 15,000
= ₹ 10,56,313

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 31.
From the following information prepare the Profit & Loss Account of Jawahar Bank Limited for the year ended 31st March, 2011. Also give necessary Schedules.
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 98
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 99
Bank should not keep more than 25% of its investments as ‘held-for-maturity’ investment. The market value of its best 75% investments is ₹ 9,00,000 as on 31st March, 2011. (May 2011) (16 Marks)
Answer:
Jawahar Bank Limited
Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 2011
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 100

Schedule 13 – Interest Earned
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 101

Schedule 14 – Other Income
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 102

Schedule 15 – Interest Expended
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 103

Schedule 16 – Operating Expenses
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 104
** Note 25% of investments classified as held for maturity’ need not be marked to market as per RBI Guidelines. However, the remaining 75% investments have been marked to market according to RBI Guidelines.

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 32.
The following figures are extracted from the books of KLM Bank Ltd. as on 31-03-2012:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 105

The following further information is given:

  1. A customer to whom a sum of ₹ 10 lakhs was advanced has become insolvent and it is expected only 55% can be recovered from his estate.
  2. There was also other debts for which a provisions of ₹ 2,00,000 was found necessary.
  3. Rebate on bill discounted on 31-03-2011 was ₹ 15,000 and on 31-032012 was ₹ 20,000.
  4. Income tax of ₹ 2,00,000 is to be provided.

The directors desire to declare 5% dividend.
Prepare the Profit and Loss account of KLM Bank Ltd. for the year ended 31-03-2012 and also show, how the Profit and Loss account will appear in the Balance Sheet if the Profit and Loss account opening balance was NIL as on 31-03-2011. (Nov. 2012) (8 Marks)
Answer:
KLM Bank Limited
Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 2012
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 106

Note: Profit & Loss Account balance of ₹ 3,75,445 will appear under the head ‘Reserves and Surplus’ in Schedule 2 of the Balance Sheet.
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 107

Working Note:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 108

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 33.
From the following information of Wealth Bank Limited, Prepare Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 2016:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 109

Other Information:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 110
(iii) Investments : Bank should not keep more than 25% of its investment as ‘held-for-maturity’ investment; the market value of its rest 75% investment is ₹ 3,95,00,000 as on 31.03.2016.
(iv) Provide 35% of the profits towards provision for taxation.
(v) Transfer 20% of the profit to Statutory Reserves. (May 2016) (10 Marks)
Answer:
Wealth Bank Limited Profit and Loss Account
For the year ended 31st March, 2016
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 111

Schedule 13 – Interest Earned
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 112

Schedule 14 – Other Income
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 113

Schedule 15 – Interest Expended
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 114

Schedule 16 – Operating Expenses
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 115

Working Note:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 116

Note:
1. Cost of investment is missing in the question. Therefore, it is assumed that cost of 75% of the investments, other than the investments held for maturity, is same as its market value. Hence no diminution in the value is provided for in the given solution.

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 34.
The following are the figures extracted from the books of National Bank Limited as on 31-3-2018.
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 117

The following further information is given:

  1. A customer to whom a sum of ₹ 16 lakhs has been advanced has become insolvent and it is expected only 40% can be recovered from his estate.
  2. There were also other debts for which a provision of ₹ 2,10,000 was found necessary by the auditors.
  3. Rebate on bills discounted on 31-3-2017 was ₹ 19,000 and on 31-3-2018 was ₹ 25,000.
  4. Preliminary expenses are to be fully written off during the year.
  5. Provide ₹ 9,00,000 for Income-tax.
  6. Profit and loss account opening balance was Nil as on 31 -3-2017.
  7. The directors desire to declare 10% dividend after transfer of 25% of the year’s profit to statutory reserve.

You are required to prepare profit & loss Account of the National Bank Ltd. with all the necessary schedules for the year ended 31st March 2018. Ignore figures for the Previous year and corporate dividend tax. (May 2018) (8 Marks)
Answer:
National Bank Limited
Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 2018
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 118

Note: The Profit & Loss Account balance of ₹ 254.60 thousand will appear in the Balance Sheet under Schedule 2 ‘Reserves and Surplus’.
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 119

Working Notes:
I.
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 120

II. Provisions and Contingencies
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 121

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Question 35.
The following are the figures extracted from the books of PQR Bank Limited as on 31.3.2017.
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 122

The following further information is given:

  1. A customer to whom a sum of ₹ 16 lakhs has been advanced has become insolvent and it is expected only 40% can be recovered from his estate.
  2. There were also other debts for which a provision of ₹ 2,10,000 was found necessary by the auditors.
  3. Rebate on bills discounted on 31.3.2016 was ₹ 19,000 and on 31.3.2017 was ₹ 25,000.
  4. Preliminary expenses are to be fully written off during the year.
  5. Provide ₹ 9,00,000 for Income-tax.
  6. Profit and Loss account opening balance was Nil as on 31.3.2016.

You are required to Prepare the Profit and Loss account of PQR Bank Limited for the year ended 31.3.2017.
Answer:
PQR Bank Limited
Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 2017
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 123
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 124

Working Note:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 125

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Final Accounts – Balance Sheet

Question 36.
How will you disclose the following Ledger balances in the Final accounts of DVD bank:
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 126

Additional information:

  1. Included in the current accounts ledger are accounts overdrawn to the extent of ₹ 250 lacs.
  2. One of the cash credit account of ₹ 10 lacs (including interest ₹ 1 lac) is doubtful.
  3. 60% of term loans are secured by government guarantees, 20% of cash credits are unsecured, other portion is secured by tangible assets. (May 2010) (4 Marks)

Answer:
Relevant Schedules
Schedule 3: Deposits
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 127

Schedule 9: Advances
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 128

Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material

Schedule 5: Other Liabilities & Provisions
Banking Companies – Advanced Accounts CA Inter Study Material 129

*Note: It is assumed that the cash credit has been in the ‘doubtful’ category for more than three years.